Manual De Servicio Hp Laserjet Enterprise M501-m506-m507-mfp M527-m528 Managed Mfp E52645-e50145-e50045-e52545.pdf 1j3b1i

at the telnet prompt, and then press the Enter key. NOTE: For , substitute the IP address that was displayed in step 7 in "Start the telnet server function at the printer" in the Troubleshooting Manual. TIP: If the telnet connection fails to establish a connection, the printer is probably behind a firewall or on a different network that the remote telnet client computer. See "Network connection" in the Troubleshooting Manual. Figure 2-15 Establish a telnet connection

4.

Type the PIN that was displayed in step 7 in "Start the telnet server function at the printer" in the Troubleshooting Manual at the prompt, and then press the Enter key. IMPORTANT: Make sure to type the PIN correctly. After five incorrect PIN entries, the printer terminates the Remote connection. The Remote feature must be re-initiated at the printer. See "Start the telnet server function at the printer" in the Troubleshooting Manual. Figure 2-16 Enter the PIN

5.

The following screen displays when the correct PIN is entered and the Remote connection is successful. For information about the Pre-boot menu and options, see "Pre-boot menu options" in the Troubleshooting Manual.

100 Chapter 2 Solve problems

ENWW

NOTE: Because a Remote connection is an unsecure telnet network protocol connection, the following Pre-boot menu items are disabled for the remote telnet client computer. ●

The +3: menu 4:Change item.

●

The +3: menu 5:Clear item.

●

The +3: menu 6:Disk Manage item.

Figure 2-17 Remote window

Disconnect a remote connection The Remote connection can be terminated from the printer control or the remote telnet client computer. NOTE: The following procedure describes terminating a Remote connection from the remote telnet client computer. 1.

From the Pre-boot main menu, use the arrow buttons on the keyboard to scroll down to the +3: item, and then press the Enter key. Figure 2-18 Access the menu

ENWW

Solve problems checklist (all except M501) 101

2.

Use the arrow buttons on the keyboard to scroll down to the +A:Remote item, and then press the Enter key. Figure 2-19 Access the remote menu

3.

Use the arrow buttons on the keyboard to scroll down to the 2:Stop Telnet item, and then press the Enter key. The Remote connection between the printer and the remote telnet client computer terminates. IMPORTANT: The printer remains in the Pre-boot menu. Have the person that is physically present at the printer do the following: ●

Touch the Home button to return to the main Pre-boot menu and highlight the 1:Continue item, and then touch the OK button. The printer will continue to initialize.

Figure 2-20 Terminate the telnet connection


ENWW

Print the event log Printing the event log might be helpful in the troubleshooting process. ●

Print the event log from the istration menu (FutureSmart 3) or Tools menu (FutureSmart 4) from a touchscreen control

●

Print the event log from the istration menu (FutureSmart 3) or Tools menu (FutureSmart 4) from a LCD control

●

Print the event log from the Service menu from a touchscreen control

●

Print the event log from the Service menu from a LCD control

●

Clear the event log from a touchscreen control

●

Clear the event log from a LCD control

For more information, see the interpret control- messages and event log entries topics in the printer Troubleshooting Manual.

Print the event log from the istration menu (FutureSmart 3) or Tools menu (FutureSmart 4) from a touchscreen control Use the following procedure to print the event log from the istration menu from a touchscreen control . 1.

From the Home screen on the printer control , scroll to and touch the istration button (FutureSmart 3), or touch the Tools button (FutureSmart 4).

2.

Open the following menus:

3.

●

Troubleshooting

●

Event Log

The event log displays on the screen. To print it, touch the Print button.

Print the event log from the istration menu (FutureSmart 3) or Tools menu (FutureSmart 4) from a LCD control Use the following procedure to print the event log from the istration menu (FutureSmart 3) or the Tools menu (FutureSmart 4) from a LCD control . FutureSmart 3 1.

From the Home screen on the printer control , use the down arrow istration, and then press the OK button.

2.

Use the down arrow

3.

If necessary, use the down arrow print the page.

button to scroll to

button to scroll to Troubleshooting, and then press the OK button. button to scroll to Print Event Log, and then press the OK button to

FutureSmart 4

ENWW


1.

From the Home screen on the printer control , use the arrow keys to navigate to Tools, and then select OK.

2.

Select Troubleshooting, and then select OK.

3.

Select Event Log.

4.

Use the down arrow

to scroll down to Cancel, and then use the right arrow

to highlight the print icon

. Select OK to print the pages. TIP:

Multiple report pages can be selected, and then printed together.

Print the event log from the Service menu from a touchscreen control Use the following procedure to print the event log from the Service menu from a touchscreen control . 1.

From the Home screen on the printer control , scroll to and touch the Device Maintenance button (FutureSmart 3), or touch the Tools button (FutureSmart 4).

2.

Open the Service menu.

3.

On the screen, select the Service Access Code option from the drop-down list.

4.

Enter the following service access code for the printer:

5.

●

10050615 (M506/E50045/M507/E50145)

●

11052715 (M527/E52545/M528/E52645)

Touch the Print Event Log item.

Print the event log from the Service menu from a LCD control Use the following procedure to print the event log from the Service menu from a LCD control . FutureSmart 3 1.

From the Home screen on the printer control , use the down arrow Maintenance, and then press the OK button.

2.

Use the down arrow

3.

On the screen, use the down arrow the OK button.

4.


5.

button to scroll to Device

button to scroll to Service, and then press the OK button. button to scroll to Service Access Code option and then press

●

10050615 (M506/E50045/M507/E50145)

●

11052715 (M527/E52545/M528/E52645)


button to scroll to Print Event Log, and then press the OK button to

FutureSmart 4


ENWW

1.


2.

Select Service, and then select OK.

3.

On the screen, select Service Access Code from the drop-down list.

4.

Enter the following service access code for the printer: –

10050615 (M506/E50045/M507/E50145)

–

11052715 (M527/E52545/M528/E52645)

5.

Select Event Log.

6.

Use the down arrow



. Select OK to print the pages.

Clear the event log from a touchscreen control Use the following procedure to clear the event log from a touchscreen control . 1.

From the Home screen on the printer control , scroll to and touch the Device Maintenance button (FutureSmart 3), or touch the Tools button (FutureSmart 4).

2.


3.

On the screen, select the Service Access Code option from the drop-down list.

4.


5.

●

10050615 (M506/E50045/M507/E50145)

●

11052715 (M527/E52545/M528/E52645)

Select the Clear Event Log item, and then touch the OK button.

Clear the event log from a LCD control Use the following procedure to clear the event log from a LCD control . FutureSmart 3 1.


2.

Use the down arrow button to scroll to Service, and then press the OK button.

3.

On the screen, use the down arrow the OK button.

4.


5.

button to scroll to Service Access Code option and then press

●

10050615 (M506/E50045/M507/E50145)

●

11052715 (M527/E52545/M528/E52645)

If necessary, use the down arrow


button to scroll to Clear Event Log, and then press the OK button.

FutureSmart 4

ENWW


1.


2.

Select Service, and then select OK.

3.


4.

Enter the following service access code for the printer: –

10050615 (M506/E50045/M507/E50145)

–

11052715 (M527/E52545/M528/E52645)

5.

Select Event Log.

6.

Use the down arrow to scroll down to Cancel, and then use the right arrow icon . Select OK to clear the event log.


to highlight the trash can

ENWW

Troubleshooting process Review the following information about the troubleshooting process.

ENWW

●

Determine the problem source

●

Power subsystem

●

Control checks (M501)

●

Control checks (all except M501)

Troubleshooting process 107

Determine the problem source When the printer malfunctions or encounters an unexpected situation, the printer control alerts the to the situation. ●

Pre-troubleshooting checklist

●

Troubleshooting flowchart

This section contains a pre-troubleshooting checklist and a troubleshooting flow chart to filter out many possible causes of the problem. ●

Use the pre-troubleshooting check list to gather information about the problem from the customer.

●

Use the troubleshooting flowchart to pinpoint the root cause of hardware malfunctions. The flowchart guides you to the section of this chapter that contains steps for correcting the malfunction.

Before beginning any troubleshooting procedure, check the following issues: ●

Are supply items within their rated life?

●

Does the configuration page reveal any configuration errors?

NOTE: The customer is responsible for checking supplies and for using supplies that are in good condition.

Pre-troubleshooting checklist The following table includes basic questions to ask the customer to quickly help define the problem(s). Table 2-8 Pre-troubleshooting checklist General topic

Questions

Environment

●

Is the printer installed on a solid, level surface (+/- 1°)?

●

Is the power-supply voltage within ± 10 volts of the specified power source?

●

Is the power-supply plug inserted in the printer and the wall outlet (not a surge protector)?

●

Is the operating environment within the specified parameters?

●

Is the printer exposed to ammonia gas, such as that produced by diazo copiers or office cleaning materials? NOTE: Diazo copiers produce ammonia gas as part of the copying processes. Ammonia gas (from cleaning supplies or a diazo copier) can have an adverse effect on some printer components (for example, the toner cartridge or cartridges OPC).

Media


●

Is the printer exposed to direct sunlight?

●

Is the printer exposed to an air conditioning or heating vent that can cause temperature fluctuations?

●

Does the customer use only ed media?

●

Is the media in good condition (no curls, folds, or distortion)?

●

Is the media stored correctly and within environmental limits?

ENWW

Table 2-8 Pre-troubleshooting checklist (continued) General topic

Questions

Input trays

●

Is the amount of media in the tray within specifications?

●

Is the media correctly placed in the tray?

●

Are the paper guides aligned with the stack (no gaps in the stack or excessive pressure causing the stack to bow)?

●

Is the tray (or trays) correctly installed in the printer?

Toner cartridge

●

Is the toner cartridge (or cartridges) installed correctly?

Transfer unit and f

●

Are the transfer unit and f installed correctly? NOTE: For printers with an intermediate transfer belt (ITB), is the ITB installed correctly and fully seated. If a replacement ITB was installed, was all of the packing materials removed?

Covers

●

Is the toner cartridge door closed?

Condensation

●

Does condensation occur following a temperature change (particularly in winter following cold storage)? If so, wipe affected parts dry or leave the printer on for 10 to 20 minutes.

●

Was a toner cartridge (or cartridges) opened soon after being moved from a cold to a warm room? If so, allow the toner cartridge (or cartridges) to sit at room temperature for 1 to 2 hours.

●

Check for and remove any non-HP components (toner cartridges, memory modules, and EIO cards) from the printer.

●

Remove the printer from the network and ensure that the failure is associated with the printer before beginning troubleshooting.

●

For any color print-quality issues (color printers only), calibrate the printer, and then print a diagnostics page to print quality.

Miscellaneous

Troubleshooting flowchart This flowchart highlights the general processes to follow to quickly isolate and solve printer hardware problems. Each row depicts a major troubleshooting step. Follow a “yes” answer to a question to proceed to the next major step. A “no” answer indicates that more testing is needed. Go to the appropriate section in this chapter, and follow the instructions there. After completing the instructions, go to the next major step in this troubleshooting flowchart. Table 2-9 Troubleshooting flowchart Step

Question

1

Is the printer on and does a readable message display?

Power on

Yes

Action

No

Follow the power-on troubleshooting checks. See "Power subsystem" in the Troubleshooting Manual. After the control display is functional, see step 2.

ENWW


Table 2-9 Troubleshooting flowchart (continued) Step

Question

2

Does the message Ready display on the control ?

Control messages

Yes 3 Event log

Action

No

After the errors have been corrected, go to step 3.

No

If the event log does not print, check for error messages.

Open the Troubleshooting menu and print an event log to see the history of errors with this printer. Does the event log print? Yes

If paper jams inside the printer, see the jams section of the printer service manual. If error messages display on the control when trying to print an event log, see the control message section of the printer troubleshooting service manual. After successfully printing and evaluating the event log, see step 4. 4 Information pages

Open the Reports menu and print the configuration pages to that all the accessories are installed. Are all the accessories installed? Yes

No

If accessories that are installed are not listed on the configuration page, remove the accessory and reinstall it. After evaluating the configuration pages, see step 5.

5 Print quality

Does the print quality meet the customer's requirements? Yes

No

Compare the images with the sample defects in the image defect tables. See the images defects table in the printer repair service manual. After the print quality is acceptable, see step 6.


ENWW

Table 2-9 Troubleshooting flowchart (continued) Step

Question

6

Can the customer print successfully from the host computer?

Interface

Yes. This is the end of the troubleshooting process.

Action

No

that all I/O cables are connected correctly and that a valid IP address is listed on the HP Jetdirect configuration page. If error messages display on the control when trying to print an event log, see the control- message section of the printer troubleshooting service manual. When the customer can print from the host computer, this is the end of the troubleshooting process.

ENWW


Power subsystem Review the following information about the power subsystem. ●

Power-on checks


ENWW

Power-on checks The basic printer functions should start up when the printer is connected into an electrical outlet and the power switch is pushed to the on position. If the printer does not start, use the information in this section to isolate and solve the problem. ●

Power-on troubleshooting overview

If the control display remains blank, random patterns display, or asterisks remain on the control display, perform power-on checks to find the cause of the problem. NOTE: For touchscreen control models, also try the control checks in the printer troubleshooting manual.

ENWW


Power-on troubleshooting overview During normal operation, cooling fans begins to spin briefly after the printer power is turned on. Place a hand over the vents in the right- and left-side covers. Lean close to the printer to hear the fans operating. If the fan are operating, the dc side of the power supply is functioning. ●

Troubleshooting power on problems

●

Troubleshooting a blank control

If the fans are operating correctly, the next troubleshooting step is to isolate print engine, formatter, and control problems. Perform an engine test. If the formatter is damaged, it might interfere with the engine test. If the engine-test page does not print, try removing the formatter, and then performing the engine test again. If the engine test is then successful, the problem is almost certainly with the formatter, the control , or the cable that connects them. NOTE: Depressing, and holding down, the test-page switch causes the printer to continually print test pages. Releasing the switch stops the test page continuous printing. Troubleshooting power on problems Use the following procedure to troubleshoot power on problems. 1.

that power is available to the printer. If the printer is plugged into a surge protector or uninterruptible power supply (UPS), remove it, and then plug the printer directly into a known operating wall receptacle (make sure that the wall receptacle provides the correct voltage and current for the printer). Unplug any other devices on the same circuit that the printer is using.

2.

Try another known operating wall receptacle and a different power cord.

3.

Listen for startup noises (for example, fans or motors) and look for illuminated lights on the control and formatter LEDs. NOTE:

4.

Operational fans, motors, and control- lights indicate the following:

●

AC power is present at the printer.

●

The power supply is providing either or both 24 Vdc and 5 Vdc voltages.

●

The DC controller microprocessor is functioning.

Check the following: a.

Turn the printer on, and then listen for startup noises. If normal startup noises are heard, go to step c below.

b.

If normal startup noises are not heard, turn the printer off, and then remove any installed accessories (for example, envelope feeders, paper feeders, or output accessories). Turn the printer on, and then listen for startup noises. If normal startup noises are heard, the problem might be with one of the accessories.

c.

Turn the printer off and then remove the power connector from the formatter. Turn the printer on, and then use a small pointed object (like a paper clip) to depress the test-page switch located on the rear side of the printer (near the formatter). NOTE: The test page can only use Tray 2 as the paper source, so make sure that paper is loaded in Tray 2.


ENWW

d.

If the engine test page prints, the print engine is operating normally. Replace the formatter. NOTE: M506/E50045/M507/E50145 (all) and M527dn/E52545dn/M528dn/E52645dn models only: If the engine test page does not print, turn the printer off, remove the embedded MultiMedia Card (eMMC), and then try the engine test again. If the page prints, the problem might be the eMMC.

e.

If after replacing the formatter normal startup noises are still not heard, replace the DC controller. NOTE: If the error persists after replacing these assemblies, escalate the problem to the Global Business Unit (GBU).

Troubleshooting a blank control A blank control display can be caused by one or more of the following:

ENWW

1.

that power is available to the printer. If the printer is plugged into a surge protector or uninterruptible power supply (UPS), remove it, and then plug the printer directly into a known operating wall receptacle (make sure that the wall receptacle provides the correct voltage and current for the printer).

2.

Make sure that the power switch is in the on position.

3.

Make sure that the fans run briefly, which indicates that the power supply is operational.

4.

Make sure that the control- display wire harness is connected.

5.

Make sure that the formatter connectors are fully seated. Make sure the power switch is in the on position, and then that the heartbeat LED is blinking and that the connectivity LED is illuminated.

6.

Remove any external solutions, and then try to turn the printer on again.

7.

If the control display is blank, but the cooling fans run briefly after the printer power is turned on, try printing an engine-test page to determine whether the problem is with the control display, formatter, or other printer assemblies.


a.

Remove the formatter.

b.

Use a small pointed object to depress the test-page switch located on the rear of the printer. NOTE: The test page can only use Tray 2 as the paper source, so make sure that paper is loaded in Tray 2.

c.

If the engine test page prints, the print engine is operating normally (a failed engine test print page does not necessarily indicate that the print engine or DC controller is defective).

d.

Use the control diagnostics to test the control . See the control checks section in the printer troubleshooting manual. If the error persists, proceed to 8.

8.

If the print engine appears to be correctly operating (the engine test page successfully printed) and the control is still blank, replace the power supply.

9.

If after replacing the power supply normal startup noises and lights are still not present, replace the DC controller. NOTE: If the error persists after replacing these assemblies, escalate the problem to the Global Business Unit (GBU).

Control checks (M501) The printer includes diagnostic tests for the control . This mode allows for troubleshooting issues with the LEDs (2-line control s), display, and the buttons. 1.

Open the secondary service menu. a.

From the printer control , press the setup

b.

Press and the down arrow

c.

Press the setup

d.

Press the OK button to open the 2ndary Service menu.


button to open the main menu.

button, and then quickly press the Cancel

button.

button. The message 2ndary Service appears on the control- display.

ENWW

NOTE: 2.

ENWW

Use the arrow buttons to scroll though the 2ndary Service menu.

Select one of the following tests: ●

LED test: Test the LED lights on 2-line control s. The touchscreen control s do not have any LEDs.

●

Display Test: Test the control display.

●

Button Test: Test the control buttons.


Control checks (all except M501) Review the following information about control checks. ●

Control diagnostics (M506x/M507x and M527/E52545/M528/E52645)

NOTE: The printer includes a diagnostic test mode for the touchscreen control s. Diagnostic tests are not available for the LCD control .


ENWW

Control diagnostics (M506x/M507x and M527/E52545/M528/E52645) Review the following information about the control diagnostics. ●

Touchscreen diagnostic mode (M506x, M527/E52545/M528/E52645)

●

Touchscreen diagnostic mode (M507x and E50145dn)

●

Control system diagnostics (M506x/M507x, M527/E52545/M528/E52645)

●

Control diagnostic flowcharts (M506x/M507x, M527/E52545/M528/E52645)

Touchscreen diagnostic mode (M506x, M527/E52545/M528/E52645) Use the diagnostics in this section to test the control hardware and embedded firmware. These tests are useful for checking control functionality independent of the printer control system diagnostics. To test the control using the system diagnostics, see "Control system diagnostics (M506x/M507x, M527/E52545/M528/E52645)" in the Troubleshooting Manual. 1.

M506x only: Locate the diagnostic-tests access button on the back of the control . Figure 2-21 Diagnostic-tests access button (M506x)

ENWW


2.

M506x only: Press the diagnostics-access button. Repeatedly pressing the button cycles through the available diagnostics. NOTE: TIP:

A pen, pencil, or other small blunt object is needed to press the button. When pressed, the button illuminates green.

Figure 2-22 Press the diagnostics-access button (M506x)

3.

M527/E52545/M528/E52645 only: Locate the diagnostic-tests access button on the back of the control . Figure 2-23 Diagnostic-tests access button (M527/E52545/M528/E52645)


ENWW

4.

M527/E52545/M528/E52645 only: Press the diagnostics-access button. Repeatedly pressing the button cycles through the available diagnostics. Figure 2-24 Press the diagnostics-access button (M527/E52545/M528/E52645)

5.

A yellow screen appears (after the first press of the button) indicating that the control firmware is version A (a magenta screen indicates version B firmware). NOTE: If a different color appears on the screen, your global business unit (GBU) to determine the firmware version. TIP:

After 4 seconds of inactivity, the diagnostic mode times out and is exited.

Figure 2-25 Control version A yellow screen

6.

Touch the screen to cycle the screen through the following: ●

ENWW

A red screen.


●

A green screen.

●

A blue screen.

●

Five brightness levels of a white screen.

●

A final black screen. TIP: When the final black screen displays, press the Home button to cycle through the diagnostic screens and test its functionality.


ENWW

7.

Pressing the diagnostic-tests button with the black screen displayed exits the diagnostic mode. Figure 2-26 Exit the diagnostic mode

Touchscreen diagnostic mode (M507x and E50145dn) Use the diagnostics in this section to test the control hardware and embedded firmware. These tests are useful for checking control functionality independent of the printer control system diagnostics. To test the control using the system diagnostics, see "Control system diagnostics (M506x/M507x, M527/M528/E52645)" in the Troubleshooting Manual. 1.

ENWW

M507x and E50145dn only: Locate the diagnostic-tests access button on the back of the control .


Figure 2-27 Diagnostic-tests access button (M507x and E50145dn)

2.

Press the diagnostics-access button to enter the diagnostic mode. NOTE: TIP:

A pen, pencil, or other small blunt object is needed to press the button. When pressed, the button illuminates green.

Figure 2-28 Press the diagnostics-access button (M507x and E50145dn)

Repeatedly pressing the button cycles through different brightness levels on the touchscreen control . 3.

To exit the diagnostic mode, wait approximately five seconds. The diagnostic mode automatically ends, and the touchscreen control returns to normal mode.


ENWW

Control system diagnostics (M506x/M507x, M527/E52545/M528/E52645) Use the diagnostics in this section to test the control hardware and display using the printer firmware system diagnostics. ●

Open the control system diagnostic tests

●

Screen test

●

Touch test

●

SoftKey test

●

Backlight test

●

Sound test

●

Keyboard test (M527c/z, E52545c, M528c/z, E52645c only)

●

Version

Open the control system diagnostic tests Use the following procedure to open the control system diagnostics tests from a touchscreen control . 1.

Turn the printer power off, and then on again.

2.

Touch the middle of the control display when you see the 1/8 under the logo. Figure 2-29 Open the Pre-boot menu

1

ENWW

2


3.

On the Pre-boot menu screen, use the following buttons to navigate the tests. Figure 2-30 Pre-boot menu

Button

Description Use this button to see more information about a selected item.

Use this button to scroll up through menu items.

Use this button to select a highlighted menu item.

Use this button to scroll down through menu items.

Use this button to go back to the previous menu.

Not used.

Use this button to exit a diagnostic test.


ENWW

4.

Use the down arrow

button to scroll to +3 istration, and then press the OK button to select it.

Figure 2-31 Access the istration menu

5.

Use the down arrow NOTE:

button to scroll to +E Diagnostics, and then press the OK button to select it.

An might be required to continue.

Figure 2-32 Access the diagnostics menu

Screen test Use the following procedure to perform a screen test. 1.

ENWW

Open the control system diagnostic tests. See "Open the control systems diagnostic tests" in the Troubleshooting Manual.


2.

With 1 Screen Test highlighted, press the OK button to select it. Figure 2-33 Open the screen test

The blue vertical gradient screen appears. Figure 2-34 Blue vertical gradient screen

3.

Touch the touchscreen to scroll though the remaining touchscreen test screens. NOTE:

Touch the Home button to exit the test.


ENWW

Table 2-10 Touchscreen test screens Screen

Description Green vertical gradient

Red vertical gradient

Blue horizontal gradient

Green horizontal gradient

Red horizontal gradient

Blue with black horizontal interlaced

ENWW


Table 2-10 Touchscreen test screens (continued) Screen

Description Green with black horizontal interlaced

Red with black horizontal interlaced

Blue with black vertical interlaced

Green with black vertical interlaced

Red with black vertical interlaced

Black with white center


ENWW

Table 2-10 Touchscreen test screens (continued) Screen

Description White with black center

Checkerboard

Multicolor stripes

Blue green grid meshing

Touch test Use the following procedure to perform a touch test. 1.

ENWW

Open the control system diagnostic tests. See "Open the control systems diagnostic tests" in the Troubleshooting Manual..


2.

Use the down arrow

button to scroll to 2 Touch Test, and then press the OK button to select it.

Figure 2-35 Open the touch test


ENWW

3.

Use your finger to touch the white grid on the display. Figure 2-36 Touch the white grid

A mark appears on the grid where it was touched. NOTE:

Touch the Home button to exit the test.

Figure 2-37 the mark

SoftKey test Use the following procedure to perform a SoftKey test. 1.

ENWW



2.

Use the down arrow

button to scroll to 3 SoftKey Test, and then press the OK button to select it.

Figure 2-38 Open the softkey test


ENWW

3.

When prompted, touch the Home button. Figure 2-39 Touch the Home button

If the test is successful, the following screen appears on the display. NOTE:

Touch the screen to exit the test.

Figure 2-40 Successful test

Backlight test Use the following procedure to perform a backlight test. 1.

ENWW



2.

Use the down arrow

button to scroll to 4 Backlight Test, and then press the OK button to select it.

After selecting the 4 Backlight Test, the screen automatically dims, and then returns to full brightness. NOTE:

Touch any key to exit the test.

Figure 2-41 Open the backlight test

Sound test Use the following procedure to perform a sound test. 1.



ENWW

2.

Use the down arrow

button to scroll to 5 Sound Test, and then press the OK button to select it.

After selecting the 5 Sound Test, the printer emits a series of audible tones. NOTE:


Figure 2-42 Open the sound test

Keyboard test (M527c/z, E52545c, M528c/z, E52645c only) Use the following procedure to perform a keyboard test on M527c/z, E52545c, M528c/z, and E52645c printers only. IMPORTANT: The control system diagnostic tests include a 6 Keyboard Test item. This test is not valid for the M506x, M507x, M527dn/f, E52545dn, M528dn/f, or E52645dn printers even though this option is present in the control system diagnostic tests menu. If the 6 Keyboard Test is opened on the M506x, M507x, M527dn/f, E52545dn, M528dn/f, or E52645dn printers, the printer power must be turned off to exit the test. HP does not recommend turning the printer power off during the control system diagnostic tests. 1.

ENWW

Open the control system diagnostic tests. See the control system diagnostics test section in the Troubleshooting Manual.


2.

Use the down arrow

button to scroll to 6 Keyboard Test, and then press the OK button to select it.

Figure 2-43 Do not open the keyboard test except for M527c/z, E52545c, M528c/z, or E52645c printers

3.

When prompted, touch the H key on the keyboard or the Home button to exit the test.

Version Use the following procedure to view the control version information. 1.


2.

Use the down arrow

button to scroll to 7 Version, and then press the OK button to select it.

NOTE:


NOTE:

The following types of information are for the control only, not the printer.

●

ID

●

Hardware (version)

●

Firmware (version)

●

KB Hw (version)

●

KB Firm (version)

●

LCD Vendor

●

Touch Controller Version


ENWW

Figure 2-44 Open the version information

ENWW


Control diagnostic flowcharts (M506x/M507x, M527/E52545/M528/E52645) Use the flowcharts in this section to troubleshoot the following control problems. ●

Touchscreen black, white, or dim (no image)

●

Touchscreen has an unresponsive zone

●

No control sound

●

Home button is unresponsive

●

Hardware integration pocket (HIP) is not functioning (control functional)

Touchscreen black, white, or dim (no image) To open the diagnostic function, press the button on the back of the control . Figure 2-45 Touchscreen blank, white, or dim (no image) Black display (no backlight or image)

Is the Home button illuminated (bright white)?

Dim display (no image)

White display (no image)

Y Is the product in bright sunlight? If yes, move the product to a different location.

Open the diagnostic function.

N

Touch the display or Home button to exit sleep mode. Make sure that the product is plugged in and the power is turned on.

Does an image appear on the control ?

Y Open the diagnostic function. Perform the backlight test.

N Y

Turn the product power off. Inspect and reseat the control cables. Remove and reseat the formatter cables. Make sure that the formatter LEDs function.

Does the display turn on?

Problem solved.

N

Are the formatter LEDs functioning?

Problem fixed?

Y

Do not replace the control . Turn the product power off. Check connection and cables on the formatter and at the comtrol .

N

Turn the product power off. Remove and reseat the formatter cables. Do not replace the control .

Is the backlight adjustable?

Y

Y

N

N

Replace the control .

Touchscreen has an unresponsive zone To open the diagnostic function, press the button on the back of the control .


ENWW

Figure 2-46 Touchscreen has an unresponsive zone Touchscreen has an unresponsive zone

Is the area of the touchscreen you are touching greyed out (intentionally deactivated)?

N

Open the diagnostic function. Perform the touch test.

Does the previously inactive area respond to a touch?

N Y

Turn the product power off, and then on again.

Y


N

Does the previously inactive area respond to a touch?

Y

Do not replace the control .

No control sound To open the diagnostic function, press the button on the back of the control .

ENWW


Figure 2-47 No control sound Control has no sound

Open the following menus: istration Display Settings Key Press Sound Select the following: On Save

Can sounds be heard?

N Y

Open the diagnostic function. Perform the sound test.

Can sounds be heard?

Y

N Do not replace the control .


N

Turn the product power off. Remove the control . Check the cables to the speaker. Reseat the cables to the speaker. Turn the product power on. Can sounds be heard?

Home button is unresponsive To open the diagnostic function, press the button on the back of the control .


ENWW

Figure 2-48 Home button is unresponsive Home button unresponsive Note: If illuminated: continue. If not illumated: that the power is turned on, the printer is not in sleep mode, tunr the power off, and then on agian.

Open the diagnostic function. Perform the Home button test.

Does the virtual LED illuminate green when the Home button is pressed?

N

Turn the product power off, and then on again.

Y

Open the diagnostic function. Perform the Home button test.

Does the virtual LED illuminate green when the Home button is pressed?

Y

N


Do not replace the control .

Hardware integration pocket (HIP) is not functioning (control functional) Review the following information when the HIP is not functioning, but the control is functional.

ENWW


Figure 2-49 Hardware integration pocket (HIP) is not functioning (control functional) Hardware integration pocket (HIP) not functional (control functional)

Check that all installed hardware integration pocket devices are within HP specifications. The control provides only 0.5 Amps to the port. If an installed device attempts to draw more power than is provided, the port is automatically disabled. Troubleshoot third-party devices with the device manufacturer.


ENWW

Tools for troubleshooting This section describes tools that can help to solve printer problems.

ENWW

●

Individual component diagnostics

●

Diagrams

●

Internal test and information pages

●

Control menus (M501)

●

Control menus (all except M501)

●

Error code and control message troubleshooting overview

Tools for troubleshooting 145

Individual component diagnostics Review the following information about individual component diagnostics. ●

LED diagnostics (M501)

●

LED diagnostics (all except M501)

●

Engine diagnostics

●

Paper path and sensor diagnostic tests (all except M501)

●

Print/stop test (all except M501)

●

Component tests (all except M501)

●

Scanner tests (M527/E52545/M528/E52645)


ENWW

LED diagnostics (M501) LED, engine, and individual diagnostics can identify and troubleshoot printer problems. ●

Network port LEDs (M501)

●

M501 control LEDs

Network port LEDs (M501) The formatter has two network port LEDs. When the printer is connected to a properly working network through a network cable, the amber LED indicates network activity, and the green LED indicates the link status. Figure 2-50 Formatter network port LEDs

2 1

1

Link status LED (green)

2

Network activity LED (amber)

A blinking amber LED indicates network traffic. If the green LED is off, a link has failed. For link failures, check all of the network cable connections. In addition, you can try to manually configure the network card link speed setting by using the printer control . 1.

On the printer control , press the OK button.

2.


3.

●

Network Setup

●

Link Speed

Select the appropriate link speed.

M501 control LEDs The state of the Ready light and Attention light on the printer signal the printer status. The following table outlines the possible control light states.

ENWW


1

Printer state

Ready light state

Attention light state

Initializing

Blinking

Blinking

Ready

On

Off

Receiving data/processing job or cancelling job

Blinking

Off

Error message

Off

Blinking

Fatal error (49 or 79 error)1

On

On

The printer restarts after one of these errors occurs.


ENWW

LED diagnostics (all except M501) LED, engine, and individual diagnostics can identify and troubleshoot printer problems. ●

Understand lights on the formatter

●

Heartbeat LED

●

HP Jetdirect LEDs

Understand lights on the formatter Three LEDs on the formatter indicate that the printer is functioning correctly. Figure 2-51 Formatter LED lights

1

Heartbeat LED

2

HP Jetdirect LEDs

Heartbeat LED The heartbeat LED indicates that the formatter is functioning correctly. While the printer is initializing after it is turned on, the LED blinks rapidly, and then turns off. When the printer has finished the initialization sequence, the heartbeat LED pulses on and off. The following list describes the heartbeat LED operation while the printer is executing the firmware boot process.

ENWW


NOTE: When the initialization process completes, the heartbeat LED should be illuminated solid green. If after initialization, the heartbeat LED is not solid green, see Table 2-11 Heartbeat LED, printer operational (all except M501) on page 150. ●

●

●

Green –

Blinking: The printer is correctly functioning.

–

Solid: The FW has not yet booted.

Amber –

Blinking: The control is not detected.

–

Solid: The FFC between the formatter and DC controller is not connected or is damaged.

Red –

Solid: Valid SPI code; there is a problem releasing ASIC and running the BIOS Solid: BIOS initiates PROSAC to change the LED from red to green. Solid: PROSAC is not running (No ROM or SPI code).

– ●

Blinking: Valid SPI code not found.

Off: No 5V or 3.3V PROSAC power.

The following table describes the heartbeat LED operation when the printer completes the firmware boot process and is in the Ready state. Table 2-11 Heartbeat LED, printer operational (all except M501) LED color

Description

Green

●

Yellow

Red

Off

●

●

–

Formatter is operating normally

–

Firmware is operating normally

–

Control is connected

Formatter cannot connect to the control –

Check control connections

–

control functionality

Formatter error or failure –

Serial peripheral interface (SPI) flash memory boot error

–

Power on self-test (formatter) failed

–

Diagnostic (formatter) failed

TIP: The heartbeat LED is off if the power cable is disconnected, the printer power switch is in the off position, or the printer is in Sleep Mode. ●


Normal operation

Firmware or system freeze

ENWW

Table 2-11 Heartbeat LED, printer operational (all except M501) (continued) LED color

Description –

Check control for an error message

–

Control failure

NOTE: This condition is not usually caused by a formatter failure. Turn the power off, and then on again. If the error persists, perform a firmware upgrade.

HP Jetdirect LEDs The embedded HP Jetdirect print server has two LEDs. The yellow LED indicates network activity, and the green LED indicates the link status. A blinking yellow LED indicates network traffic. If the green LED is off, a link has failed. For link failures, check all the network cable connections. In addition, try to manually configure the link settings on the embedded print server by using the printer control- menus. 1.

From the Home screen on the printer control , scroll to and touch the istration button (FutureSmart 3), or scroll to and touch the Settings button (FutureSmart 4).

2.


3.

ENWW

●

Network Settings (FutureSmart 3) or Networking (FutureSmart 4).

●

Embedded Jetdirect Menu

●

Link Speed

Select the appropriate link speed, and then touch the OK button.


Engine diagnostics The printer contains extensive internal engine diagnostics that help in troubleshooting print quality, paper path, noise, assembly, and timing issues. ●

Engine test button

●

Defeating interlocks

●

Disable cartridge check (all except M501)

Engine test button To that the printer engine is functioning, print an engine test page. Use a small pointed object to depress the test-page switch located on the rear side of the printer. The test page should have a series of lines that are parallel to the short end of the page. The test page can use only Tray 2 as the paper source, so make sure that paper is loaded in Tray 2. NOTE: Depressing and holding down the test-page switch causes the printer to continually print test pages. Releasing the switch stops the test page continuous printing. Figure 2-52 Engine test button


ENWW

Defeating interlocks Different tests can be used to isolate different types of issues. For assembly or noise isolation, run the diagnostic test when the toner cartridge door or rear door is open. ●

Defeat the rear door interlock

●

Defeat the toner cartridge door interlock

Defeating the door interlocks allows observation of the paper pick operation (and view the page enter registration). WARNING! Be careful when performing printer diagnostics to avoid risk of injury. Only trained service personnel should open and run the diagnostics with a door open. Never touch any of the power supplies when the printer is turned on. Defeat the rear door interlock Use the following procedure to defeat the rear door interlock. 1.

Open the rear door.

2.

Insert a folded piece of paper into the slot. TIP: Fold a stiff piece of paper, for example a business card or index card, into two 10 mm (.375 in) strips, and insert the strips into the slot for the cartridge door logic switches. Figure 2-53 Defeat the rear door interlock

Defeat the toner cartridge door interlock Use the following procedure to defeat the toner cartridge door interlock. 1.

ENWW

Open the toner cartridge door.


2.

Insert a folded piece of paper into the slot. TIP: Fold a stiff piece of paper, for example a business card or index card, into two 10 mm (.375 in) strips, and insert the strips into the slot for the cartridge door logic switches. Figure 2-54 Defeat the toner cartridge door interlock


ENWW

Disable cartridge check (all except M501) Use this diagnostic test to print internal pages or send an external job to the printer when the toner cartridge is removed or exchanged. Supply errors are ignored while the printer is in this mode. ●

Disable cartridge check from a touchscreen control

●

Disable cartridge check from a LCD control

When the printer is in this mode, access the troubleshooting menus and print internal pages (the print quality pages will be the most useful). This test can be used to isolate problems, such as noise, and to isolate printquality problems that are related to the toner cartridge. NOTE: Do not remove or exchange the toner cartridge until after beginning the disable cartridge check diagnostic. Disable cartridge check from a touchscreen control Use the following procedure to disable cartridge check from a touchscreen control . 1.

From the Home screen on the printer control , scroll to and touch the istration button (FutureSmart 3), or scroll to and touch the Tools button (FutureSmart 4).

2.

Open the following menus: ●

Troubleshooting

●

Diagnostic Tests

●

Disable Cartridge Check

Disable cartridge check from a LCD control Use the following procedure to disable cartridge check from a LCD control . FutureSmart 3 1.


button to scroll to

2.

Use the down arrow

button to scroll to Troubleshooting, and then press the OK button.

3.

Use the down arrow

button to scroll to Diagnostics, and then press the OK button.

4.

Use the down arrow

button to scroll to Disable Cartridge Check, and then press the OK button to select it.

FutureSmart 4

ENWW

1.

From the Home screen on the printer control , use the arrow keys to navigate to Tools, and then press the OK button.

2.

Use the down arrow


3.

Use the down arrow

button to scroll to Diagnostic Tests, and then press the OK button.

4.

Select Continue to enter Maintenance Mode.

5.

Use the down arrow

button to scroll to Disable Cartridge Check, and then press the OK button to select it.


Paper path and sensor diagnostic tests (all except M501) Review the following information about the paper path and sensor diagnostics test for the M506/M507/E50145 and M527/M528/E52645 printers. ●

Paper path test (all except M501)

●

Paper path sensors test (all except M501)

●

Manual sensor tests (all except M501)

●

Tray/bin manual sensor test (all except M501)


ENWW

Paper path test (all except M501) This diagnostic test generates one or more test pages. Use these pages to isolate the cause of jams. ●

Access the paper path test from a touchscreen control

●

Access the paper path test from a LCD control

To isolate a problem, specify which input tray to use, specify whether to use the duplex path (duplex models only), and specify the number of copies to print. Multiple copies can be printed to help isolate intermittent problems. The following options become available after beginning the diagnostic feature: ●

Print Test Page: Run the paper-path test from the default settings: Tray 2, no duplex, and one copy. To specify other settings, scroll down the menu, and select the setting, and then scroll back up and select Print Test Page to start the test.

●

Source Tray: Select Tray 1, Tray 2, or the optional tray.

●

Test Duplex Path: Enable or disable two-sided printing from designated optional tray (depending on how many optional accessories are installed.

●

Number of Copies: Set the numbers of copies to be printed; the choices are 1, 10, 50, 100, or 500.

Access the paper path test from a touchscreen control Use the following procedure to access the paper path test from a touchscreen control . 1.


2.


3.

●

Troubleshooting

●

Diagnostic Tests

●

Paper Path Test

Select the paper path test options for the test.

Access the paper path test from a LCD control Use the following procedure to access the paper path test from a LCD control . FutureSmart 3 1.


button to scroll to

2.

Use the down arrow


3.

Use the down arrow


4.

Use the down arrow

button to scroll to Paper Path Test, and then press the OK button.

FutureSmart 4

ENWW

1.


2.

Use the down arrow



3.

Use the down arrow

4.


5.

Use the down arrow



button to scroll to Paper Path Test, and then press the OK button.

ENWW

Paper path sensors test (all except M501) This test displays the status of each paper path sensor and allows viewing of sensor status while printing internal pages. ●

Access the paper path sensors test from a touchscreen control

●

Access the paper path sensors test from a LCD control

Access the paper path sensors test from a touchscreen control Use the following procedure to access the paper path sensors test from a touchscreen control . 1.


2.


3.

●

Troubleshooting

●

Diagnostic Tests

●

Paper Path Sensors

Touch Start to run the test.

Access the paper path sensors test from a LCD control Use the following procedure to access the paper path sensors test from a LCD control . FutureSmart 3 1.


button to scroll to

2.

Use the down arrow


3.

Use the down arrow


4.

Use the down arrow

button to scroll to Paper Path Sensors, and then press the OK button.

FutureSmart 4

ENWW

1.


2.

Use the down arrow


3.

Use the down arrow


4.


5.

Use the down arrow

button to scroll to Paper Path Sensors, and then press the OK button.


NOTE: The menu list of sensors and switches for the Paper path sensors test, Manual Sensor Test, and the Tray/Bin Manual Sensor Test varies depending on which optional accessories are installed. The tables in this section describe the sensor tests available with an optional 1x550-sheet paper feeder installed. For trays other than Tray 1 or Tray 2, the tray number associated with a sensor or switch depends on the number of accessories installed. Table 2-12 Paper path sensors diagnostic tests (all except M501) Sensor name

Sensor/Switch number

Replacement part number

Descriptions

Tray 3 feed sensor1

PS8008

F2A68-67909

Optional paper feeder

Prefeed sensor

PS102

NA

Not replaceable2

Top-of-Page (TOP) sensor

PS215

NA

Not replaceable2

Paper width 3 sensor

NA

NA

Not replaceable2


NA

NA

Not replaceable2


NA

NA

Not replaceable2

F output sensor

PS2

RM2-5679-000CN (110 V)

F

RM2-5692-000CN (220 V) (M501/M506/E50045/M527/E52545) F output sensor

PS2

RM2-2585-000CN (110 V)

F

RM2-2586-000CN (220 V) (M507/E50145/M528/E52645) Duplexer refeed sensor NOTE: only.

2

NA

Not replaceable2

PS4

NA

Not replaceable2

Duplex models

Output bin full sensor 1

PS502

Only appears if optional accessories are installed. Require whole unit replacement.


ENWW

Manual sensor tests (all except M501) The table in this section lists the sensors and switches available in the Manual Sensor Test. ●

Access the manual sensor test from a touchscreen control

●

Access the manual sensor test from a LCD control

Access the manual sensor test from a touchscreen control The Manual Sensor Test screen shows the sensor number, sensor name (M506x/M507x and M527/E52545/ M528/E52645 only), sensor state (active or inactive), and the number of times the sensor has been toggled (activated). 1.


2.


3.

●

Troubleshooting

●

Diagnostic Tests

●

Manual Sensor Test

Activate the desired sensor, and then check the control display to the sensor state (active or inactive). NOTE: Only the M506x/M507x and M527/E52545/M528/E52645 control displays the State and Toggle descriptor. ●

The State virtual LED next to the sensor number and sensor name (M506x/M507x and M527/ E52545/M528/E52645 only) illuminates green when the sensor is active.

●

The Toggle virtual LED next to the sensor number and sensor name (M506x/M507x and M527/ E52545/M528/E52645 only) illuminates green after the sensor is activated and increments by one each time the sensor is interrupted (activated or deactivated). For example, opening the front door increments the SW501 Cartridge doorToggled item count two times—once when the door is opened, and once when the door is closed.

Access the manual sensor test from a LCD control Use the following procedure to access the manual sensor test from a LCD control . FutureSmart 3

ENWW

1.


button to scroll to

2.

Use the down arrow


3.

Use the down arrow


4.

Use the down arrow

button to scroll to Manual Sensor Test, and then press the OK button.

5.

Activate the desired sensor, and then check the control display to the sensor state (active or inactive).


TIP:

Press the return arrow

button to reset the sensor or press the Cancel

button to exit the test.

NOTE: Only the M506x/M507x and M527/E52545/M528/E52645 control displays the State and Toggle descriptor. ●


●

The Toggle virtual LED next to the sensor number and sensor name (M506x/M507x and M527/ E52545/M528/E52645 only) illuminates green after the sensor is activated and increments by one each time the sensor is interrupted (activated or deactivated). For example, opening the cartridge door increments the SW501 Front door opening/closing Toggled item count two times—once when the door is opened, and once when the door is closed.

FutureSmart 4 1.


2.

Use the down arrow


3.

Use the down arrow


4.


5.

Use the down arrow

6.

Activate the desired sensor, and then check the control display to the sensor state (active or inactive). Press the return arrow

button to scroll to Manual Sensor Test, and then press the OK button.



NOTE: Only the M506x/M507x and M527/E52545/M528/E52645 control displays the State and Toggle descriptor. –

The State virtual LED next to the sensor number and sensor name illuminates green when the sensor is active.

–

The Toggle virtual LED next to the sensor number and sensor name illuminates green after the sensor is activated and increments by one each time the sensor is interrupted (activated or deactivated). For example, opening the front door increments the SW3 Front door opening/closing Toggled item count two times—once when the door is opened, and once when the door is closed.

NOTE: The following table describes the sensor tests available with an optional 1x550-sheet paper feeder installed. For trays other than Tray 1 or Tray 2, the tray number associated with a sensor or switch depends on the number and type of accessories installed. Table 2-13 Manual sensor diagnostic tests (all except M501) Sensor or switch

Replacement Part number

Description

SW501 Cartridge door sensor

RK2-0534-000CN

Microswitch (SW2)


ENWW

Table 2-13 Manual sensor diagnostic tests (all except M501) (continued) Sensor or switch

Replacement Part number

Description

PS8008 Tray 3 feed sensor1

F2A68-67909

550-sheet paper feeder

PS102 Prefeed sensor

NA

Not replaceable2

PS215 Top-of-Page (TOP) sensor

NA

Not replaceable2


NA

Not replaceable2


NA

Not replaceable2


NA

Not replaceable2

PS2 F output sensor

RM2-5679-000CN (110 V)

F

RM2-5692-000CN (220 V) (M501/M506/E50045/M527/E52545) PS2 F output sensor

RM2-2585-000CN (110 V)

F

RM2-2586-000CN (220 V) (M507/E50145/M528/E52645) PS502 Duplexer refeed sensor NOTE:

Not replaceable2

NA

Not replaceable2

Duplex models only.

PS4 Output bin full sensor 1 2

ENWW

NA

Only appears if optional accessories are installed. Requires whole unit replacement.


Tray/bin manual sensor test (all except M501) The table in this section lists the sensors and switches available in the Tray/Bin Manual Sensor Test. ●

Access the tray/bin manual sensor test from a touchscreen control

●

Access the tray/bin manual sensor test from a LCD control

Access the tray/bin manual sensor test from a touchscreen control The Tray/Bin Manual Sensor Test screen shows the sensor number, sensor name (M506x/M507x and M527/ E52545/M528/E52645 only), sensor state (active or inactive), and the number of times the sensor has been toggled (activated). 1.


2.


3.

●

Troubleshooting

●

Diagnostic Tests

●

Tray/Bin Manual Sensor Test

Activate the desired sensor, and then check the control display to the sensor state (active or inactive). NOTE: Only the M506x/M507x and M527/E52545/M528/E52645 control displays the State and Toggle descriptor. ●


●

The Toggle virtual LED next to the sensor number and sensor name illuminates green after the sensor is activated and increments by one each time the sensor is interrupted (activated or deactivated). For example, raising, and then releasing, the output bin full flag increments the PS4 Output bin full Toggled item count two times—once when the flag is raise, and once when it is released.

Access the tray/bin manual sensor test from a LCD control Use the following procedure to access the tray/bin manual sensor test from a LCD control . FutureSmart 3 1.


2.

Use the down arrow


3.

Use the down arrow


4.

Use the down arrow

button to scroll to Tray/Bin manual Sensor Test, and then press the OK button.

5.

Activate the desired sensor, and then check the control display to the sensor state (active or inactive).


button to scroll to

ENWW

TIP:

Press the return arrow



NOTE: Only the M506x/M507x and M527/E52545/M528/E52645 control displays the State and Toggle descriptor. ●


●

The Toggle virtual LED next to the sensor number and sensor name (M506x/M507x and M527/ E52545/M528/E52645 only) illuminates green after the sensor is activated and increments by one each time the sensor is interrupted (activated or deactivated). For example, raising, and then releasing, the output bin full flag increments the PS4 Output bin full Toggled item count two times—once when the flag is raise, and once when it is released.

FutureSmart 4 1.


2.

Use the down arrow


3.

Use the down arrow


4.


5.

Use the down arrow

6.

Activate the desired sensor, and then check the control display to the sensor state (active or inactive). Press the return arrow

button to scroll to Tray/Bin manual Sensor Test, and then press the OK button.



NOTE: Only the M506x/M507x and M527/E52545/M528/E52645 control displays the State and Toggle descriptor. –


–

The Toggle virtual LED next to the sensor number and sensor name illuminates green after the sensor is activated and increments by one each time the sensor is interrupted (activated or deactivated). For example, opening the front door increments the SW3 Front door opening/closing Toggled item count two times—once when the door is opened, and once when the door is closed.

NOTE: The following table describes the sensor tests available with an optional 1x550-sheet paper feeder installed. For trays other than Tray 1 or Tray 2, the tray number associated with a sensor or switch depends on the number and type of accessories installed. Table 2-14 Tray/bin manual sensors (all except M501)

ENWW

Sensor or switch name


Descriptions

PS205 Tray 1 paper sensor

F2A68-67914

Cartridge door assembly


Table 2-14 Tray/bin manual sensors (all except M501) (continued)

1 2

Sensor or switch name


Descriptions

PS3 Tray 2 paper sensor

NA

Not replaceable1

PS451 Tray 3 paper sensor2

F2A68-67909


PS8008 Tray 3 paper feed sensor2

F2A68-67909


PS1603 Tray 3 feed sensor2

F2G68-67901


PS4 Output bin full sensor

NA

Not replaceable1

Requires whole unit replacement. Only appears if optional accessories are installed.


ENWW

Print/stop test (all except M501) Use this diagnostic test to isolate the cause of problems such as image-formation defects and jams within the engine. ●

Access the print/stop test from a touchscreen control

●

Access the print/stop test from a LCD control

●

Common print stop test timing millisecond (ms) stops

During this test, stop the paper anywhere along the printer paper path. The test can be programmed to stop printing internal pages or an external print job when the paper reaches a certain position. The test can also be programmed to stop from 0 to 60,000 ms. If the timer is set to a value that is greater than the job-print time, the printer can recover in one of two ways. ●

After the print job is completed press OK button to return to the Troubleshooting menu before the timer times out.

●

After the timer times out, touch the Stop button. Activate the door switch to restart the engine and return it to a normal state.

Access the print/stop test from a touchscreen control Use the following procedure to access the print/stop test from a touchscreen control . 1.


2.


3.

●

Troubleshooting

●

Diagnostic Tests

●

Print/Stop Test

Enter a range, and then touch the OK button.

Access the print/stop test from a LCD control Use the following procedure to access the print/stop test from a LCD control . FutureSmart 3 1.


button to scroll to

2.

Use the down arrow


3.

Use the down arrow

button to scroll to Diagnostic Test, and then press the OK button.

4.

Use the down arrow

button to scroll to Print/Stop Test, and then press the OK button.

FutureSmart 4

ENWW

1.


2.

Use the down arrow



3.

Use the down arrow


4.


5.

Use the down arrow

button to scroll to Print/Stop Test, and then press the OK button.

Common print stop test timing millisecond (ms) stops Review the following information about common print stop test timing stops. ●

600 ms: The page has ed the registration area and the leading edge is just short of entering the f. The image can be seen on the paper but has not fused. If the defect is visible then the cause might be the drum, transfer roller, or a roller prior to, or in, the registration area.

●

1200 ms: The leading edge is about 18mm (0.71 in) into the top output bin. The image has gone through the f. If the defect was not visible prior to the f, and is visible after the f, then the f it is the likely cause of the print quality defect. Inspect the f for damage, debris, or labels stuck to the f. Replace the f. Discuss media specifications and proper care of the f with the customer.


ENWW

Component tests (all except M501) Use the procedure below to test various printer mechanical and electromechanical assemblies. ●

ENWW

Individual component diagnostics (special-mode test; all except M501)


Individual component diagnostics (special-mode test; all except M501) This test activates individual parts independently to isolate problems. ●

Access the individual component diagnostics from a touchscreen control

●

Access the individual component diagnostics from a LCD control

NOTE: The following table describes the sensor tests available with an optional 1x550-sheet paper feeder installed. For trays other than Tray 1 or Tray 2, the tray number associated with a sensor or switch depends on the number and type of accessories installed. Each component test can be performed once or repeatedly. If the Repeat option is enabled from the drop-down menu, the test cycles the component on and off. This process continues for two minutes, and then the test terminates. NOTE: The cartridge door interlocks must be defeated to run the component tests. A control display prompt appears to indicate removing the toner cartridge, during certain tests. Access the individual component diagnostics from a touchscreen control Use the following procedure to access the individual component diagnostics from a touchscreen control . 1.


2.


3.

●

Troubleshooting

●

Diagnostic Tests

●

Component Test

Select the component test options for the test.

Access the individual component diagnostics from a LCD control Use the following procedure to access the individual component diagnostics from a LCD control . FutureSmart 3 1.


button to scroll to

2.

Use the down arrow


3.

Use the down arrow

button to scroll to Diagnostic Test, and then press the OK button.

4.

Use the down arrow

button to scroll to Component Test, and then press the OK button.

FutureSmart 4 1.


2.

Use the down arrow



ENWW

3.

Use the down arrow


4.


5.

Use the down arrow

6.

Select the component and desired options.

7.

Select Start to start the test.

8.

Select Stop to stop the test.

button to scroll to Component Test, and then press the OK button.

NOTE: The following table describes the sensor tests available with an optional 1x550-sheet paper feeder installed. For trays other than Tray 1 or Tray 2, the tray number associated with a sensor or switch depends on the number and type of accessories installed. Table 2-15 Component test details (all except M501) Component test

Item tested

Comments

F motor

M1

Activates the specified motor.

Pickup motor

M2


Tray 1 Pickup Solenoid

SL2

Activates the specified solenoid.

Tray 2 Pickup Solenoid

SL1

Activates the specified solenoid. Activates the specified solenoid.

Tray 3 Pickup Solenoid1 Duplex switchback solenoid NOTE:

SL3

Activates the specified solenoid.

Duplex models only.

Optional Clutch Drive Repick Clutch

Activates the specified clutch/drive. CL1

Activates the specified clutch.

Laser Scanner Motor

M3


Repeat

NA

Choose Off to execute the test once.

NOTE:

Duplex models only.

Choose On to execute the test continuously. 1

ENWW

Only appears if an optional 550-sheet paper feeder accessory is installed.


Scanner tests (M527/E52545/M528/E52645) Use these diagnostic tests to manually test the document feeder and scanner sensors. ●

Scanner tests (M527/E52545/M528/E52645)


ENWW

Scanner tests (M527/E52545/M528/E52645) This section lists the sensors available in the Scanner Tests. ●

Document feeder and image scanner sensor replacement parts

●

Use the scanner tests

Document feeder and image scanner sensor replacement parts If a document feeder or image scanner sensor fails, replace the following assemblies. ●

Document feeder sensors –

Document feeder whole unit kit Enterprise printers; 5851-6568 NOTE:

–

Document feeder whole unit kit Work Flow printers; 5851-6569 NOTE:

–

Includes the white backing kit.


Scanner sub assembly (SSA) kit; F2A76-67909 NOTE:


Use the scanner tests The Scanner Tests screen shows the sensor name, sensor state (active or inactive), and the number of times the sensor has been toggled (activated). 1.


2.


Troubleshooting

●

Diagnostic Tests

●

Scanner Tests

●

Sensors

3.

Touch the sensor name on the Scanner Tests screen to display a sensor location graphic on the control display.

4.

Activate the desired sensor, and then check the control display to the sensor state (active or inactive). ●


●

The Toggle virtual LED next to the sensor number and sensor name illuminates green after the sensor is activated and increments by one each time the sensor is interrupted (activated or deactivated). For example, opening the flatbed cover increments the Flatbed cover Toggle item count two times— once when the door is opened, and once when the door is closed.

ENWW


Scanner tests sensors ●

ADF paper present

●

ADF Y (length)

●

ADF jam cover

●

ADF paper path deskew

●

ADF paper path pick success

●

Paper path sensor 1 (unreachable)

●

Paper path sensor 2 (unreachable)

●

Flatbed Y (length)

●

Flatbed cover


ENWW

Diagrams Use the diagrams in this section to identify printer components.

ENWW

●

Diagrams: Block diagrams

●

Diagrams: External plug and port locations

●

Diagrams: Locations of major assemblies

●

Diagrams: General timing chart

●

Diagrams: General circuit diagrams


Diagrams: Block diagrams Use the diagrams in this section to identify printer sensors, switches, and assemblies. ●

Sensors and switches

●

Cross section diagrams

●

Diagrams: Printed circuit assembly (PCA) connector locations

Sensors and switches Review the following information about the sensors and switches. Figure 2-55 Printer base, sensors and switches block diagram

PS4

PS13

PS3 PS1a PS11

PS2 PS2a PS12

SW4

PS1

1

Sensor

Description

Sensor

Description

SR1a

Media width sensor

SR4

Output bin media-full sensor

SR2b

Duplex feed sensor1

SR11

Registration sensor

SR1

Cassette media out sensor

SR12

Prefeed sensor

SR2

Top-of-Page (TOP) sensor

SR13

F output sensor

SR3

Tray 1 (multipurpose tray) media out and registration sensor

SW4

Cassette detection switch

Duplex models only.


ENWW

Figure 2-56 1x550-sheet paper feeder, sensors and switches block diagram

SW3

PS460 PS461

Sensor

Description

PS460

Media surface sensor

PS461

Cassette media out sensor

PS432

Feed sensor

SW3

Cassette detection switch

PS432

Figure 2-57 Printer base, motors, clutches, and solenoids block diagram M1

M2

SL3

SL2

CL1 SL1

M4

ENWW


1

Item

Description

M1

F motor

M2

Pickup motor

M4

Lifter motor

SL1

Cassette pickup solenoid

SL2

Tray 1 (MP) pickup solenoid

SL3

Duplex switchback solenoid1

CL1

Duplex re-pickup clutch1

Duplex models only.

Figure 2-58 1x550-sheet paper feeder, motors, clutches, and solenoids block diagram M2

CL2 SL4

M5

M2

F motor (located in the printer)

M5

Lifter motor

CL2

Feed clutch

SL4

Cassette pickup solenoid

Cross section diagrams Review the following information about the cross section diagrams.


ENWW

Figure 2-59 Printer base, cross section diagram 1

2

4

3

5

21

1

ENWW

6

20

7

8

19

18

17

9

16

15

10

11

14

13

Item

Description

Item

Description

1

F output roller

12

Feed roller

2

Duplex flapper1

13

Tray 2 feed roller

3

Output roller

14

Tray 2 separation roller

4

F film

15

Tray 2 pickup roller

5

F

16

Duplex re-pickup roller1

6

Photosensitive drum

17

Registration roller

7

Laser/scanner assembly

18

Cassette

8

Toner cartridge

19

Transfer roller

9

Registration shutter

20

Duplex feed roller1

10

Tray 1 (MP) tray pickup roller

21

Pressure roller

11

Tray 1 (MP) tray separation pad

12

Duplex models only.


Figure 2-60 1x550-sheet paper feeder, cross section diagram 1

2

Item

Description

1

Cassette

2

Cassette pickup roller

3

Cassette feed roller

4

Feed roller

5

Cassette separation roller


3

4

5

ENWW

Diagrams: Printed circuit assembly (PCA) connector locations Use the diagrams in this section to identify printer PCA connector locations. ●

DC controller connections

●

Formatter PCA (M501)

●

Formatter PCA (M506/E50045/M507/E50145)

●

Formatter PCA (M527/E52545/M528/E52645)

●

1x550-sheet paper feeder controller PCA connections

DC controller connections Each of the connections on the DC controller PCA is indicated in the following figure. Figure 2-61 DC controller PCA connectors

J161

J133

J162

J163

J146

J152

J141

J159

J143

J111

J151

J171 J153

J131 J132

J154 J157

J156

J158

J135

J144

J147

Item

Description

Item

Description

J111

Not used

J152

Output bin media-full sensor (PS4) F output sensor (PS13) Thermistor (YH401)

J131

Low-voltage power supply (LVPS)

J153

Paper feeder

Power LED J132

F power supply (FPS)

J154

Duplex re-pickup clutch (CL1)1

J133

High-voltage power supply (HVPS)

J156

Media surface sensor (PS12)

J135


J157

Registration sensor (PS11)

J141

Duplex switchback solenoid (SL3)1

J158

Cassette detection switch (SW4)

J143

Tray 1 (MP) tray pickup solenoid (SL2)

J159

Rear door switch (SW5)

J144

Lifter motor

J161


Cassette pickup solenoid (SL1)

ENWW


Item

Description

Item

Description

J146

F motor (M1)

J162

Laser/scanner motor

J147

Sub fan (FM2)

J163

Formatter

J151

Media width sensor (PS1a)

J171

Pickup motor (M2)

Duplex feed sensor (PS2b)1 Top-of-Page (TOP) sensor (PS2) Duplex models only.

1

Formatter PCA (M501) Review the following information about the formatter PCA for the M501 printer. Figure 2-62 Formatter PCA M501

3 2

4

5 6

1

Item

Description

Item

Description

1

Control

4

Local area network (LAN)

2

Engine

5

USB device

3

Power supply

6

USB host

Formatter PCA (M506/E50045/M507/E50145) Review the following information about the formatter PCA for the M506/E50045/M507/E50145 printers.


ENWW

Figure 2-63 Formatter PCA (M506/E50045/M507/E50145)

6

8

7

5 9

4 3

10

2 11

1 14

13

12

Item

Description

Item

Description

1

Power

8

IOD

2

Engine I/F

9


3

Hardware integration pocket (HIP)

10

USB device

4

Easy-access USB

11

USB host

5

Control HDMI

12

Dual in-line memory module (DIMM)

6

Control sideband

13

embedded MultiMedia Card (eMMC)

7

Wireless

14

Hard-disk drive (HDD) riser

Formatter PCA (M527/E52545/M528/E52645) Review the following information about the formatter PCA for the M527/E52545/M528/E52645 printers.

ENWW


Figure 2-64 Formatter PCA M527/E52545/M528/E52645

9

10

11

8

12

7 6

13

5

14

4 3

15 16

2 1

17 20 19 18

Item

Description

Item

Description

1

Power

11

NVRAM

2

Accessible architecture

12

Control HDMI

3

Engine and video control

13


4

Hard-disk drive (HDD) riser

14

BASH

5

Scanner HDMI

15

Auxiliary

6

Hardware integration pocket (HIP)

16

USB host

7

Fax

17

USB device

8

Easy-access USB

18

Dual in-line memory module (DIMM)

9

Control sideband

19

embedded MultiMedia Card (eMMC) NOTE: Only the M527dn/E52545dn/M528dn/ E52645dn uses the eMMC.

10

Wireless


20

Debug port

ENWW

1x550-sheet paper feeder controller PCA connections Each of the connections on the 1x550-sheet paper feeder controller PCA is indicated in the following figure. Figure 2-65 1x550-sheet paper feeder controller PCA connectors J621

J612

J610

J623

J624 J625 J622

J620

J611

Item

Description

Item

Description

J610

Printer

J622

Lifter motor (M5)

J611

Paper feeder

J623

Media surface sensor (PS460)

J612

Cassette detection switch (SW3)

J624

Feed sensor (PS432)

J620

Lifter motor (M5)

J625

Cassette media out sensor (PS461)

J621

Cassette pickup solenoid (SL4)

Diagrams: External plug and port locations Use the following figure to locate and identify the printer external port locations.

ENWW


Figure 2-66 External plug and port locations (M501)

1

2 3 4

Item

Description

1

Slot for a cable-type security lock

2

Local area network (LAN) Ethernet (RJ-45) network port

3

Hi-Speed USB 2.0 printing port

4

USB port for job storage feature (requires a 16 GB or larger USB flash drive)


ENWW

Figure 2-67 External plug and port locations (M506/E50045/M507/E50145)

1

2 3

4

Item

Description

1


2


3


4

USB port for connecting external USB devices (this port might be covered) NOTE:

ENWW

For easy-access USB printing, use the USB port on the top cover.


Figure 2-68 External plug and port locations (M527/E52545/M528/E52645)

1 2

3

4

5 Item

Description

1


2

Fax port (f and z models only)

3


4

USB port for connecting external USB devices (this port might be covered) NOTE:

5

For easy-access USB printing, use the USB port on the top cover.



ENWW

Diagrams: Locations of major assemblies Use the figures in this section to identify and locate major components and assemblies in the printer. ●

Main assemblies (printer base)

●

Rollers and pads (printer base)

●

Motor and fans

●

Printed circuit assemblies (PCAs; printer base)

Main assemblies (printer base) Review the following information about the main assemblies (printer base). Figure 2-69 Main assemblies

1

2

4

3

ENWW

Item

Description

1

F

2

Registration assembly

3

Feed drive assembly

4



Rollers and pads (printer base) Review the following information about the rollers and pads (printer base). Figure 2-70 Rollers and pads (printer base)

1 2 3

4 5

Item

Description

1

Transfer roller

2

Tray 1 separation pad assembly

3

Tray 2 separation roller assembly

4

Tray 1 pickup roller

5

Tray 2 pickup roller assembly

Motor and fans Review the following information about the motor and fans.


ENWW

Figure 2-71 Motor and fans

1 2 3

Item

Description

1

F motor (M1)

2

Main fan (FM1)

3

Sub fan (FM2)

Printed circuit assemblies (PCAs; printer base) Review the following information about the PCAs (printer base).

ENWW


Figure 2-72 PCAs (printer base)

4

1

3

2

Item

Description

1


2

High-voltage power supply (HVPS)

3

F power supply (FPS)

4

DC controller PCA

Diagrams: General timing chart Review the following information about the general timing chart. Figure 2-73 General timing chart

Diagrams: General circuit diagrams Review the following information about the general circuit diagrams.


ENWW

PS460

PS432

PS461

SW3

PS1

FT1

FT2

SOLD6122

SOLD6121

J4011

J4012

J4013

J4031

J4032

J4033

J4601

J4602

J4603

J4321

J4322

J4323

J4611

J4612

J4613

2 1

1 2 1

TAG

FM1 M5

J777 1

PS3

SL

M

SW2

SL6

2 1 2

CL1

1 2

+24VD

+3.3VB

SGND

OPTCSTSNS

OPTSDA

OPTSCL

OPTCL

OPT_CL

+24VD

PICKSL

+24VD

SGND(BR)

PLEVELSNS(GN)

+3.3VB(V)

SGND(GN)

PATHSNS(W)

+3.3VB(BR)

SGND(BR)

OPTCSTPSNS(GN)

+3.3VB(Y)

LIFTMT(W)

+24VD(BR)

CSTSNS(BL)

SGND(BL)

SGND(GN)

CSTPSNS(W)

+3.3VB(R)

SGND(GN)

MPTPSNS(W)

+3.3VB(V)

MAINFANON

MAINFANLOCK

GND

VSS(W)

VIN(R)

+24VB

+24VA

J344

J343

Laser/scanner ass’y J376 J372

1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3

J375 J374

Paper feeder controller PCA

3 2 1 2 1

2

J651L J651DH J651D 1 2

2 1 7

CL

J604DH

6 5 4 3 2 1

J650 J604

1 2 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

J612 J622 J625

J802

+24VD

+3.3VB

SGND

OPTCSTSNS

22

14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5

TRPCLK TRNCLK TRCRNT DEVAWM DEVACCLK DEVDCSNS PRIACCLK PRIAWM PRIDWM TNR

+24VD

+24VD

MPTSL

REFEEDCL

+24VD

+24VD

+3.3VB

SGND

OPTCSTSNS

OPTSDA

OPTSCL

OPTCL

LVPSFANON

LVPSFANLOCK

PGND

DUPSWBKSL

1

2

15

TRPWM

4

16

TGRDATA

3

17

TGSDATA

+3.3VH

18

CSTPSNS

19

/TGOFF

MPTPSNS

20

AIRTEMP 24VCON

PGND

FULLSNS

SGND

+3.3VB

NFCS

FSROUTSNS

MAINTH

RLYD LVT

+3.3VA

SGND

+24VD

ZEROX

FSRD

+24VA

+24VA

PGND

5VCON

+5VA

SGND

+3.3VA

24VAON

24VEON

INHIBIT

PWRSAVE1

PWRLED

+5VA

SGND

PWRSW

J254

3

SW1

+3.3VB(PK)

J248

J247

J246

J245

J244

J243

J202

J201

J206

J205

PS4

J204

J203

F power supply PCA

J251

J252

J253

+3.3VB(Y)

4 3 2 1

1 2 3 4

1

OPTSDA

23

MAINFANON MAINFANLOCK 21

SGND

1

24

+24VBSNS

+24VA

2

1

2

SW5

J860

SGND 1

2

2

2

3

GND

MAINTH

+3.3VB(GY)

NFCS(BL)

FSROUTSNS(GN)

SGND(BR)

AC-N

1

PS2b AC-H

AC-N

AC-H

DCH

DCL

+5VC

+5VC

+5VC

PGND

PGND

PGND

3

J700

1

J151

2

TH1

J4204

J4203

J4202

J4201

4

1

5

DC controller

SOLD71

SOLD70

1 2 3

1

J158

1

2

2

2

TP

TP1

6

J302

SW4

1

5

4

3

2

1

J660D J660DH J660L 1 2

SL4

SL

2

2 1

1

4

3

2

1

J144 +24VD

2

OPTSCL

PGND

PGND

+24VD

+24VD

BLMFG

/BLMDEC

/BLMACC

PMOUTA

/PMOUTA

/PMOUTB

PMOUTB

6

/VDO1

2

7

VDO1

LDCTRL0

8

SGND

3

9

VD02

LDCTRL1

10

/VD02

4

11

SGND

5

12

SGND

SGND

13

+3.3VB

LDCTRL2

14

/BDI

1

CSTSL

J156 SGND(R)

3

OPTCL

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

15

14

13

12

11

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

14

13

12

11

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

J4112

3

J4111

2

PREREGSNS(W)

J4113

3

J4121

2

SGND(V) SOLD4201

/LDPWM

1

+24VD(R)

J157 2

M

2

1

M4

ENGTYPE

M

Laser PCA High-voltage power supply PCA

1

/VCRESET

17

4

J851

FM2

REFEEDSNS(V) J7015

1

3 +3.3VA

15

16

5

Formatter

14

J159

J7012

2

4 WAKEVC WAKEENG

13

6 CLEI

12

7

17

J163

17 J300

SGND

11

8 CLEO

10

PGND

9 SGND

9

/SCNDEC

/BDO 10

8

+24VD

SGND 11

7

/SCNACC

J161 J133

2

/VDO1 12 VDO1 13

5

6

1

1 2 1

14 24

M2

J341 M M

3 2 1

M1

SL SL 4 3

1 2 3 4

SL2 SL3 J711 J712

2 1 7 6 5

7 6 5 4 3

4 3 2 1

J624 J623 J621 J620 J611

M3 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

CL

2 1

2

CL1

1 2 3

3 2 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

J661L J661DH J661D 2 1

J602L J602LH 1 2

J602DH J602D J663

J4021

J162 J143

9 10 11 12 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

REARSNS

1

14 24 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3

J141 J147 J171 J146

4 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2

J153 J154

J131 J135

SGND(GN)

J4122

PS12

SGND(GN)

PS11

CSTPLVLSNS(W)

J4123

LED1

+3.3VB(BK)

2 3 4 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1

1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6

J132 J152

1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

J410 J241 J216 J405

1 2

Low-voltage power supply PCA

TOPSNS(GN)

J4022

PS2 3 2

2 1

SGND(W)

J4023

J211

+3.3VB(W)

J7013

1 2

1 4 3 2 1 2 1

J406 J407

TOPSNS(GY) J7014

PS1a 1 2

J290

PWSNSAND(GN)

FU1

3

3

4

FU2

CSTSNS(V) SOLD4202

Inlet PS13

LIFTERMT(W)

1 2

J293

J7011 2 1

J291 2 1

1 2

SGND 14

4

5

H1

SGND 17

/VDO2 15 VDO2 16

2

ENWW 1

6

1

A

B

C

D

Figure 2-74 General circuit diagram for the printer base (1 of 2)


J610

6

5

11

10 10

9 9

8 8

7 7

3

2 2

1 1 1

J1

6 6

5 5

4 4

J1812S

2

2

3

3

4

4

5

5

6

6

7

8

HIP

5

4 J7

5

J6

10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

C

5

9

9

USB

J9

J8

7

J3

3 1

12

11

8

13 13 +5V

14 14

12

J2

15 15

40 1 2

Contorl LCD PCA 40

Fomatter

LCD Module

J15

1

2

J1104

J11

3

19

19

J10

4

5

2

1

Memory PCA

J1812D

2

1

J1815

3

3

4

4

4.3 STP

5

5

6

6

8

8

2

1

5

6

4

4

3

5

5

6

6

7

7

8

8

10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

10

3

9

9

4

<M506>

Wireless PCA

J1103

2

1

J1102

7

7

2

3

NFC PCA

2

3

4

5

5

6

7

8


J1100

1

4

3

2

Fomatter 1

J1101

PGND +24VA

J4

1

PGND +24VA

J1816

8

7

J242

8

5

7

4

6

3

5

2

4

1

3

2

1


6

Image scanner J301 +5VC

15

+5VC

<M506 MF model>

PGND

Contorl SW PCA

PGND

2

PGND

3

+24VE

<M506>

3.3V(V) J4305

SCL(GY) J4304

GND(BL) J4303

SDA(W) J4302

GND(GN) J4301

+24VE

194 Chapter 2 Solve problems INHIBIT

4

1

A

B

C

D

Figure 2-75 General circuit diagram for the printer base (2 of 2)

ENWW

Internal test and information pages Review the following information about the internal test and information pages.

ENWW

●

Print a configuration page

●

Print a f test page (all except M501)

●

Advanced configuration with HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) and HP Device Toolbox (Windows) (M501)


Print a configuration page Use the following procedures to print a configuration page. ●

Print the configuration page from a LCD control (M501)

●

Print the configuration page from a LCD control (M506/E50045/M507/E50145)

●

Print the configuration page from a touchscreen control (M527/E52545/M528/E52645)

●

HP embedded Jetdirect page (all except M501)

●

Wireless page (all except M501)

●

Finding important information on the configuration pages

NOTE: Depending on the model, up to three pages print when printing a configuration page. In addition to the main configuration page, the HP embedded Jetdirect configuration and the wireless pages print. Print the configuration page from a LCD control (M501) Use the following procedure to print the configuration page from a LCD control on an M501 printer. 1.


2.

Open the Reports menu.

3.

Select Configuration Report.


ENWW

Figure 2-76 Configuration report (M501)

1

5

2

6

3

7

4

8

Item

Description

Item

Description

1

Product information

5

Product settings

2

Memory

6

Installed personalities and options

3

Paper settings

7

Print

4

Impressions

8

HP Web services

Print the configuration page from a LCD control (M506/E50045/M507/E50145) Use the following procedure to print the configuration page from a LCD control on an M506/E50045/ M507/E50145 printer. FutureSmart 3

ENWW

1.


2.


button to scroll to


●

Reports

●

Configuration/Status Pages

3.

Use the down arrow

4.

Use the up arrow

button to scroll to Configuration Page, and then press the OK button to select it.

button to scroll to Print, and then press the OK button to print the pages.

FutureSmart 4 1.

From the Home screen on the printer control , use the arrow keys to navigate to Reports, and then press the OK button.

2.

Use the down arrow

button to scroll to Configuration/Status Pages, and then press the OK button.

3.

Use the down arrow

button to scroll to Configuration Page, and then press the OK button.

4.

Use the down arrow



. Select OK to print the pages. Print the configuration page from a touchscreen control (M527/E52545/M528/E52645) Use the following procedure to print the configuration page from a touchscreen control on an M527/ E52545/M528/E52645 printer. 1.

From the Home screen on the printer control , scroll to and touch the istration button (FutureSmart 3), or scroll to and touch the Reports button (FutureSmart 4).

2.


Reports (FutureSmart 3)

●


3.

Touch Configuration Page to select it.

4.

Touch the Print button to print the pages.


ENWW

Figure 2-77 Configuration page (all except M501)

HP LaserJet M506

4

1

5 6 2 7

3

Item

Description

Item

Description

1

Device information

5

Event log

2

Installed personalities and options

6

Security

3

HP Web services

7

Paper trays and options

4

Memory

HP embedded Jetdirect page (all except M501) The second configuration page is the HP embedded Jetdirect page, which contains the following information: Always make sure the status line under the general information line indicates "HP embedded Jetdirect page."

ENWW


Figure 2-78 HP embedded Jetdirect page (all except M501)

HP LaserJet M506

4

1

5

2

6

3

Item

Description

1

General Information indicates the printer status, model number, hardware firmware version, port select, port configuration, auto negotiation, manufacturing identification, and manufactured date.

4

Security Settings information

3

Network Statistics indicates the total packets received, unicast packets received, bad packets received, framing errors received, total packets transmitted, unsendable packets, transmit collisions, and transmit late collisions.

4

T/IP information, including the IP address

5

IPv4 information

6

IPv6 information

Wireless page (all except M501) The third configuration page is the wireless page, which contains the following information: NOTE: Wireless models only.


ENWW

Always make sure the status line under the general information line indicates "I/O Card Ready." Figure 2-79 Wireless page (all except M501)

HP LaserJet M506

1

4

2

5 6

3

7 8

ENWW

Item

Description

1

General Information indicates the printer status, model number, hardware firmware version, port select, port configuration, auto negotiation, manufacturing identification, and manufactured date.

2

Wireless Direct indicates the wireless function status.

3

Connected Clients indicates the MAC or IP address of connected clients.

4

Security Settings information

5

Network Statistics indicates the total packets received, unicast packets received, bad packets received, framing errors received, total packets transmitted, unsendable packets, transmit collisions, and transmit late collisions.

6

T/IP information, including the IP address.

7

IPv4 information.

8

IPv6 information.


Finding important information on the configuration pages Certain information, such as the firmware date codes, the IP address, and the email gateways, is especially helpful while servicing the printer. This information is on the various configuration pages. Table 2-16 Important information on the configuration pages Type of information

Specific information

Configuration page

Firmware date codes

DC controller (all except M501)

When performing a remote firmware upgrade procedure, all of these firmware components are upgraded.

NOTE: For the M501 printer, the DC controller version is listed as the controller number under product information on the configuration page.

Look on the main configuration page, under "Device Information."

Firmware date codes

Firmware datecode

When performing a remote firmware upgrade procedure, all of these firmware components are upgraded.

NOTE: For the M501 printer, open the main menus, select the Service menu, and then select Firmware Datecode.

Firmware date codes

HP embedded Jetdirect firmware version (all except M501)

Look on the HP embedded Jetdirect page, under "General Information."

Embedded HP Jetdirect (all except M501)

Look on the main configuration page, under "Installed Personalities and Options." Shows model and ID.

Total RAM

Look on the main configuration page, under "Memory."

Additional 550-sheet feeders

Additional 550-sheet feeders

Look on the main configuration page, under "Paper Trays and Options" (all except M501).

Engine cycles and event logs

Engine cycles

Look on the main configuration page, under Impressions" (M501) or "Device Information" (all except M501).

When performing a remote firmware upgrade procedure, all of these firmware components are upgraded. Accessories and internal storage All optional devices that are installed on the printer should be listed on the main configuration page.

Look on the main configuration page, under "Product Information" (M501) or "Device Information" (all except M501).

In addition, separate pages print for the optional paper handling devices and the fax accessory (all except M501). These pages list more-detailed information for those devices. Accessories and internal storage All optional devices that are installed on the printer should be listed on the main configuration page. In addition, separate pages print for the optional paper handling devices and the fax accessory (all except M501). These pages list more-detailed information for those devices.

Total page counts and maintenance kit counts are important for ongoing printer maintenance. The configuration page lists only the three most recent errors. To see a list of the 50 most recent errors, print an event log from the Diagnostics menu.


ENWW

Table 2-16 Important information on the configuration pages (continued) Type of information

Specific information

Configuration page

Event-formation (all except M501)

Event-formation

Look on the main configuration page, under "Event Log."

Error report information (M501)

Error-formation

Open the 2ndary Service menu, select Service Reports, and then select Error Report. Press the OK button to print the report. NOTE: This report can also be printed using the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS).

ENWW


Print a f test page (all except M501) Use the f test page to evaluate problems with f print quality. ●

Print a f test page from a touchscreen control

●

Print a f test page from a LCD control

Print a f test page from a touchscreen control Use the following procedure to print a f test page from a touchscreen control . 1.


2.


3.

●

Troubleshooting

●

Print Quality Pages

●

F Test Page

Touch the Print button.

Print a f test page from a LCD control Use the following procedure to print a f test page from a LCD control . FutureSmart 3 1.


button to scroll to

2.

Use the down arrow

3.

If necessary, use the down arrow start the calibration process.

button to scroll to Print Quality Pages, and then press the OK button to

4.


button to scroll to F Test Page, and then press the OK button to


FutureSmart 4 1. From the Home screen on the printer control , use the arrow keys to navigate to Tools, and then select OK. 2.

Navigate to Maintenance, and then select OK.

3.

Navigate to Troubleshooting, and then select OK.

4.

Use the down arrow

button to scroll to Print Quality Pages, and then press the OK button.

5.

Use the down arrow

button to scroll to F Test Page, and then press the OK button.

6.

Use the down arrow





ENWW

Figure 2-80 F test page (all except M501)

ENWW


Advanced configuration with HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) and HP Device Toolbox (Windows) (M501) Use the HP Embedded Web Server to manage printing functions from your computer instead of the printer control . ●

Open the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) from the Start menu

●

Open the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) from a Web browser

●

View printer status information

●

Determine the remaining life for all supplies and order new ones

●

View and change tray configurations (paper types and sizes)

●

View and print internal pages

●

View and change network configuration

The HP Embedded Web Server works when the printer is connected to an IP-based network. The HP Embedded Web Server does not IPX-based printer connections. You do not have to have Internet access to open and use the HP Embedded Web Server. When the printer is connected to the network, the HP Embedded Web Server is automatically available. NOTE: HP Device Toolbox is available only if you performed a full installation when you installed the printer. Depending on how the printer is connected, some features might not be available. NOTE: The HP Embedded Web Server is not accessible beyond the network firewall. Open the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) from the Start menu Use the following procedure to open the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) from the Start menu. 1.

Click the Start button, and then click the Programs item.

2.

Click your HP printer group, and then click the HP Device Toolbox item.

Open the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) from a Web browser Use the following procedure to open the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) from a Web browser. 1.

2-line control s: On the printer control , press the OK button. Open the Network Setup menu, and then select Show IP Address to display the IP address or host name. Touchscreen control s: From the Home screen on the printer control , touch the Connection Information button, and then touch the Network Connected button or the Network Wi-Fi ON

button to display the IP address or host name.


ENWW

2.

Open a Web browser, and in the address line, type the IP address or host name exactly as it displays on the printer control . Press the Enter key on the computer keyboard. The EWS opens.

NOTE: If the Web browser displays a There is a problem with this website’s security certificate message when attempting to open the EWS, click Continue to this website (not recommended). Choosing Continue to this website (not recommended) will not harm the computer while navigating within the EWS for the HP printer. Tab or section

Description

Home tab

●

Provides printer, status, and configuration information.

Device Status: Shows the printer status and shows the approximate percent life remaining of HP supplies.

●

Supplies Status: Shows the approximate percent life remaining of HP supplies. Actual supply life remaining can vary. Consider having a replacement supply available to install when print quality is no longer acceptable. The supply does not need to be replaced unless the print quality is no longer acceptable.

●

Device Configuration: Shows the information found on the printer configuration page.

●

Network Summary: Shows the information found on the printer network configuration page.

●

Reports: Print the configuration and supplies status pages that the printer generates.

●

Event Log: Shows a list of all printer events and errors.

System tab

●

Device Information: Provides basic printer and company information.

Provides the ability to configure the printer from your computer.

●

Paper Setup: Change the default paper-handling settings for the printer.

●

Print Quality: Change the default print-quality settings for the printer.

●

EcoSMART Console: Change the default times for entering Sleep mode or Auto Power Down mode. Configure which events cause the printer to wake.

●

Paper Types: Configure print modes that correspond to the paper types that the printer accepts.

●

System Setup: Change the system defaults for the printer.

●

Service: Perform the cleaning procedure on the printer.

●

Save and Restore: Save the current settings for the printer to a file on the computer. Use this file to load the same settings onto another printer or to restore these settings to this printer at a later time.

●

istration: Set or change the printer . Enable or disable printer features.

NOTE: The System tab can be -protected. If this printer is on a network, always consult with the before changing settings on this tab.

ENWW

Print tab

●

Provides the ability to change default print settings from your computer.

Printing: Change the default print settings, such as number of copies and paper orientation. These are the same options that are available on the control .

●

PCL5c: View and change the PCL5c settings.

●

PostScript: Turn off or on the Print PS Errors feature.


Tab or section

Description

Fax tab

●

Receive Options: Configure how the printer handles incoming faxes.

(Fax models only)

●

Phone Book: Add or delete entries in the fax phone book.

●

Junk Fax List: Set fax numbers to block from sending faxes to the printer.

●

Fax Activity Log: Review recent fax activity for the printer.

Scan tab

Configure the Scan to Network Folder and Scan to E-mail features.

(MFP models only)

●

Network Folder Setup: Configure folders on the network to which the printer can save a scanned file.

●

Scan to E-mail Setup: Begin the process to set up the Scan to E-mail feature.

●

Outgoing E-mail Profiles: Set an email address that will appear as the “from” address for all emails sent from the printer. Configure the SMTP Server information.

●

E-mail Address Book: Add or delete entries in the email address book.

●

E-mail Options: Configure a default subject line and body text. Configure default scan settings for emails.

Networking tab (Network-connected printers only)

Network s can use this tab to control network-related settings for the printer when it is connected to an IP-based network. It also allows the network to set up Wireless Direct functionality. This tab does not appear if the printer is directly connected to a computer.

Provides the ability to change network settings from your computer. HP Web Services tab


Use this tab to set up and use various Web tools with the printer.

ENWW

Control menus (M501) Review the following information about the control menus.

ENWW

●

Setup menu

●

Function specific menus (M501)


Setup menu To open this menu, either press the OK button (2-line control s) or touch the Setup control s). The following sub menus are available: ●

HP Web Services menu (M501)

●

Reports menu (M501)

●

System Setup menu (M501)

●

Service menu (M501)

●

Network Setup menu (M501)

●

Quick Forms menu (M501)

button (touchscreen

HP Web Services menu (M501) Review the following information about the HP Web Services menu for the M501 printer. Table 2-17 HP Web Services menu (M501) Menu item

Description

Enable Web Services

Use Enable Web Services to set up Web Services on the printer. NOTE:

Proxy Settings

You must be connected to a network to enable HP Web Services.

The Proxy Settings sub-menu includes the following: ●

Proxy Server

●

Proxy Port

●

name

●

Reports menu (M501) Review the following information about the Reports menu for the M501 printer. Table 2-18 Reports menu (M501) Menu item

Description

Demo Page

Prints a page that demonstrates print quality.

Menu Structure

Prints a control- menu layout map.

Configuration Report

Prints a list of the printer settings.


ENWW

Table 2-18 Reports menu (M501) (continued) Menu item

Description

Supplies Status

Prints the toner cartridge status. Includes the following information:

Network Summary

●

Approximate pages remaining

●

Supply level

●

Serial number

●

Number of pages printed

●

First install date

●

Last used date

Displays status for: ●

Network hardware configuration

●

Enabled features

●

T/IP and SNMP information

●

Network statistics

Usage Page

Displays the number of pages printed by the printer. (Specific items reported are model dependent.)

PCL Font List

Prints a list of all installed PCL 5 fonts.

PS Font List

Prints a list of all installed PS fonts.

PCL6 Font List

Prints a list of all installed PCL 6 fonts.

Service Page

Prints the service page. The service page includes information about ed paper types, and other settings that are not included on the configuration page. It also includes the event log.

Print Quality Page

Prints a page that helps solve problems with print quality.

Default Info Page

Prints a page that shows the default settings for the LaserJet Update feature.

System Setup menu (M501) In the following table, items that have an asterisk (*) indicate the factory default setting. Table 2-19 System Setup menu (M501) Menu item

Sub-menu item

Language

(List of available control- display languages.)

Paper Setup

Default Paper Size

Sub-menu item

Sets the language in which the control displays messages and printer reports. Letter A4

Default Paper Type

ENWW

Description

Sets the size for printing internal reports or any print job that does not specify a size.

Legal

NOTE: The default setting is determined by the choice of location during the initial printer setup.

Lists available paper types.

Sets the type for printing internal reports or any print job that does not specify a type.


Table 2-19 System Setup menu (M501) (continued) Menu item

Sub-menu item

Sub-menu item

Description

Tray 1

Paper Type

Configures the size and type for the tray.

Paper Size Tray 2

Paper Type


Paper Size Tray 3

Paper Type


Paper Size Paper Out Action

Wait forever* Cancel Override

Print Quality

Adjust Alignment

Print Test Page

Determines how the printer reacts when a print job requires a paper size or type that is unavailable or when the tray is empty. ●

Wait forever: The printer waits until you load the correct paper.

●

Override: Print on a different size paper after a specified delay.

●

Cancel: Automatically cancel the print job after a specified delay.

●

If you select either the Override or Cancel item, the control prompts you for the number of seconds to delay.

Shifts the margin alignment to center the image on the page from top to bottom, and left to right. You can also align the image that is printed on the front with the image that is printed on the back. Allows for one-sided and two-sided printing alignment. Print Test Page: Prints a test page that shows the current registration settings.

Print Quality

Adjust Alignment

(continued)

(continued)

Adjust Tray 1

●

X1 Shift: Registration of the image on the paper from side to side, as the paper lies in the tray. For duplex models, this side is the second side (back) of the paper.

●

X2 Shift: Registration of the image on the paper from side to side, as the paper lies in the tray, for the first side (front) of a duplexed page. This item appears only on duplex models. NOTE:

Adjust Tray 2

●

Y Shift: Registration of the image on the paper from top to bottom as the paper lies in the tray.

●

X1 Shift: Registration of the image on the paper from side to side, as the paper lies in the tray. For duplex models, this side is the second side (back) of the paper.

●

X2 Shift: Registration of the image on the paper from side to side, as the paper lies in the tray, for the first side (front) of a duplexed page. This item appears only on duplex models. NOTE:

●


Set X1 Shift first.

Set X1 Shift first.

Y Shift: Registration of the image on the paper from top to bottom as the paper lies in the tray.

ENWW


Sub-menu item

Sub-menu item

Description

Energy Settings

Sleep/Auto Off After

5 minutes*

Specifies the amount of idle time before the printer enters sleep mode.

1 Minute 1 Hour 30 Minutes 15 Minutes Shut Down After

Never

Set the amount of elapsed time before the printer turns itself off.

30 Minutes 1 Hour 2 Hours 4 Hours 8 Hours 24 Hours Delay Shut Down

No Delay When Ports Are Active

Select whether or not the printer delays shutting down after the presses the power button. No Delay: The printer shuts down immediately. When Ports Are Active: The printer waits until there is no I/O port activity before shutting down.

Supply Settings

Black Cartridge

Very Low Setting

Stop: The printer stops printing until you replace the print cartridge. Prompt*: The printer stops printing and prompts you to replace the print cartridge. You can acknowledge the prompt and continue printing. Continue: The printer alerts you that the print cartridge is very low, but it continues printing.

Low Threshold Store Usage Data Cartridge Policy

Select where to store the printer's usage data, either on the supplies or not on the supplies. Off Authorized HP

ENWW

Enter a percentage for the low threshold setting.

Use the Cartridge Policy feature to allow only genuine HP cartridges to be used with this printer. When someone attempts to install a cartridge that is not a genuine HP cartridge, the printer control displays a message informing that the cartridge is unauthorized, and it displays information explaining how to proceed.



Sub-menu item

Sub-menu item

Description

Cartridge Protection

Protect Cartridges

Use the Cartridge Protection feature to permanently associate toner cartridges with a specific printer so they cannot be used in other printers. When someone attempts to transfer a protected cartridge from the original printer into another printer, that printer will not print. The printer control displays a message informing that the cartridge is protected, and it displays information explaining how to proceed. After selecting Protect Cartridges, when the printer prompts to confirm, select Continue to enable the feature. NOTE: After enabling cartridge protection for the printer, all subsequent toner cartridges installed in the printer are automatically and permanently protected. To avoid protecting a new cartridge, disable the feature before installing the new cartridge. To disable the feature, select Cancel rather than Continue in this step.

istration

Product Security

On Off

Manage Stored Jobs

Quick Copy

Proof and Hold

Set the printer-security feature. If you select the On setting, you must set a . The number of copies sent are printed immediately, and then that number of copies is printed anytime the stored job is retrieved. ●

Job type: temporary

●

Job deleted after printing: no

●

PIN protection: no

The first copy is printed immediately. Additional copies are printed by using the printer control . For example, ten copies are sent to the printer. One copy prints immediately. Nine copies are printed anytime the stored job is retrieved. The job is deleted after all copies are printed.

Personal Job

Stored Job


●

Job type: temporary

●

Job deleted after printing: yes

●

PIN protection: no

The job is stored in the printer memory until it is printed, and then the job is automatically deleted. ●

Job type: temporary

●

Job deleted after printing: yes

●

PIN protection: yes (optional)

The job is stored in the printer memory until it is printed, and then the job is manually deleted, or deleted after a predetermined retention time period. ●

Job type: standard

●

Job deleted after printing: no

●

PIN protection: yes (optional)

ENWW


Sub-menu item

Sub-menu item

Inactivity Timer Courier Font

Description Set the amount of time that es before a given menu or item will close due to printer inactivity.

Regular*

Set Courier font values.

Dark

Service menu (M501) In the following table, items that have an asterisk (*) indicate the factory default setting. Table 2-20 Service menu (M501) Menu item

Sub-menu item

Sub-menu item

Cleaning Page

Description Cleans the printer when specks or other marks appear on printed output. The cleaning process removes dust and excess toner from the paper path. When selected, the printer prompts you to load plain Letter or A4 paper in Tray 1. Touch the OK button to begin the cleaning process. Wait until the process completes. Discard the page that prints.

USB Speed

High*

Sets the USB speed for the USB connection to the computer. For the printer to actually operate at high speed, it must have high speed enabled and be connected to an EHCI host controller that is also operating at high speed. This menu item does not reflect the current operating speed of the printer.

Full

Less Paper Curl

On

When printed pages are consistently curled, this option sets the printer to a mode that reduces curl.

Off* Archive Print

On

When printing pages that will be stored for a long time, this option sets the printer to a mode that reduces toner smearing and dusting.

Off*

Firmware Datecode

Displays the current firmware datecode.

Restore Defaults

Sets all settings to the factory default values.

Signature Check

Cancel if Invalid*

Validates HP firmware s.

Prompt if Invalid LaserJet Update

Check for Updates Now

Install Now

Check for printer firmware updates.

Remind Me Later Skip this Update

ENWW


Table 2-20 Service menu (M501) (continued) Menu item

Sub-menu item

Sub-menu item

Description

Manage Updates

Allow Downgrade

Manage how the printer handles firmware updates.

Check Automatically Prompt Before Install Allow Updates SMTP Comm. Report

The SMTP Communication Report contains the SMTP communication to and from the printer from the last Scan to E-mail job.

Network Setup menu (M501) In the following table, items that have an asterisk (*) indicate the factory default setting. Table 2-21 Network Setup menu (M501) Menu item

Sub-menu item

Description

Google Cloud Print

Print Claim Sheet

Press OK to send printer capabilities and model number to Google and print a sheet of registration instructions from Google.

Proxy Settings

Enter proxy information. Proxy Server Proxy Port name

IPv4 Config Method

DH BOOTP Auto IP Manual

Auto Crossover

On Off

Network Services

IPv4 IPv6

Link Speed

The printer automatically configures all the T/IP settings via DH, BootP or AutoIP. Manual: You can manually configure the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway. The control prompts you to specify values for each address section. As each address is completed, the printer prompts for address confirmation before moving to the next one. After all three addresses are set, the network reinitializes. This item is used when you are connecting the printer directly to a personal computer using an Ethernet cable (you might have to set this to On or Off depending on the computer being used). Enable or disable the IPv4 and IPv6 protocols. By default, each protocol is enabled.

Automatic*

Sets the link speed manually if needed.

10T Full

After setting the link speed, the printer automatically restarts.

10T Half 100TX Full 100TX Half 1000T Full


ENWW

Table 2-21 Network Setup menu (M501) (continued) Menu item

Sub-menu item

Description

Security

Product Security

Enable printer security. If turned on, the printer prompts you to set a . After it is set, the will be needed to change printer settings.

HTTPS Enforcement

An encrypted communication and secure identification of a network web server. Only enabled if the printer is protected.

Firewall

Enable, disable, or reset the printer firewall.

Access Control List

Enable, disable, or reset the network access control list.

Reset All Security

Reset the security settings to the factory-set default values.

Restore Defaults

Resets all network configurations to their factory defaults.

Quick Forms menu (M501) Review the following information about the Quick Forms menu for the M501 printer. Table 2-22 Quick Forms menu Menu item

Sub-menu item

Description

Notebook Paper

Narrow Rule

Prints pages that have preprinted lines.

Wide Rule Child Rule Graph Paper

1/8 inch

Prints pages that have preprinted graph lines.

5 mm Checklist

1-Column

Prints pages that have preprinted lines with check boxes.

2-Column Music Paper

Portrait

Prints pages that have preprinted lines for writing music.

Landscape

ENWW


Function specific menus (M501) Review the following information about the function specific menus for the M501 printer. ●

Apps (M501)

●

Jobs (M501)

●

Supplies Status (M501)

Apps (M501) Use the Apps menu to install HP Web Services applications. Jobs (M501) Use the Jobs menu to manage stored jobs. Requires a USB 2.0 storage device with at least 16 GB free space to be installed in the rear host USB port. Supplies Status (M501) Use the Supplies Status menu to print a supplies status page. Press Report.


ENWW

Control menus (all except M501) Review the following information about the control menus. ●

Reports menu

●

Settings menu

●

Tools menu

Reports menu Review the following information about the Reports menu. To display: At the printer control , select the Reports menu. NOTE: For the M506x/M507x and M527/E52545/M528/E52645 models, use the Print button to print the report. For all other models, use the up arrow button or down arrow button to highlight the report, and then press the OK button. Then use the up arrow button to highlight Print, and then press the OK button to print the report. In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting. Table 2-23 Reports menu First level

Second level

Values

Description


Settings Menu Map

Cancel

Shows a map of the entire control system and the selected values for each setting.

View Print Configuration/Status Pages

Current Settings Page

Cancel View Print


Configuration Page

Cancel View

Shows a summary of the current settings for the printer. This might be helpful if you plan to make changes and need a record of the present configuration. Shows the printer settings and installed accessories.

Print Configuration/Status Pages

How to Connect Page

Cancel View

Shows the network information typically needed to connect the printer to a network.

Print

ENWW


Table 2-23 Reports menu (continued) First level

Second level

Values

Description


Supplies Status Page

Cancel

Shows the approximate remaining life for the supplies; reports statistics on total number of pages and jobs processed, serial number, page counts, and maintenance information.

View Print

HP provides approximations of the remaining life for the supplies as a customer convenience. The actual remaining supply levels might be different than the approximations provided. Configuration/Status Pages

Usage Page

Cancel View Print


File Directory Page

Cancel View

Shows a count of all paper sizes that have ed through the printer; lists whether they were simplex or duplex, and reports the page count. Shows the file name and folder name for files that are stored in the printer memory.

Print Configuration/Status Pages

Web Services Status Page

Cancel View

Shows the detected Web Services for the printer.

Print Fax Reports

Fax Activity Log

Fax models only

Cancel View

Contains a list of the faxes that have been sent from or received by this printer.

Print Fax Reports

Billing Codes Report

Fax models only

Cancel View Print

Fax Reports

Blocked Fax List

Fax models only

Cancel View

Provides a list of billing codes that have been used for outgoing faxes. This report shows how many sent faxes were billed to each code. A list of phone numbers that are blocked from sending faxes to this printer.

Print Fax Reports

Speed Dial List

Fax models only

Cancel View

Shows the speed dials that have been set up for this printer.

Print Fax Reports Fax models only

Fax Call Report

Cancel View

A detailed report of the last fax operation, either sent or received.

Print


ENWW

Table 2-23 Reports menu (continued) First level

Second level

Values

Description

Other Pages

PCL Font List

Cancel

Prints the available PCL fonts.

Print Other Pages

PS Font List

Cancel

Prints the available PS fonts.

Print

ENWW


Settings menu You can perform basic printer setup by using the Settings menu. Use the HP Embedded Web Server for more advanced printer setup. To open the HP Embedded Web Server, enter the printer IP address or host name in the address bar of a Web browser. ●

General menu (all except M501)

●

Print menu (M506/E50045/M507/E50145) and Copy/Print menu (M527/E52545/M528/E52645)

●

Scan/Digital Send Settings menu (M527/E52545/M528/E52645)

●

Fax menu (M527/E52545/M528/E52645)

●

Manage Supplies menu

●

Networking menu

NOTE: Where applicable, the M527/E52545/M528/E52645 printer displays a View button. General menu (all except M501) Review the following information about the Settings menu. To display: At the printer control , select the Settings menu, and then select the General menu. In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting. Table 2-24 General menu (M506/E50045/M507/E50145, M527/E52545/M528/E52645) First level

Second level

Third level

Date/Time Settings

Date/Time Format

Date Format

Fourth level

Values

Description

DD/MMM/YYYY

Use the Date/Time Settings menu to specify the date and time and to configure date/time settings.

MMM/DD/YYYY YYYY/MMM/DD Date/Time Settings

Date/Time Format

Time Format

12 hour (AM/PM) 24 hours

Date/Time Settings

Date/Time

Time Zone

Select the time zone from a list.

Date/Time Settings

Date/Time

Date

Select the date from a pop-up calendar.

Date/Time Settings

Date/Time

Time

Select the time from a pop-up keypad.

Date/Time Settings

Date/Time

Adjust for Daylight Savings

Checkbox


Select the format that the printer uses to show the date and time, for example 12hour format or 24-hour format.

If you are in an area that uses daylight savings time, select the Adjust for Daylight Savings box.

ENWW

Table 2-24 General menu (M506/E50045/M507/E50145, M527/E52545/M528/E52645) (continued) First level

Second level

Third level

Energy Settings

Sleep Schedule

A list of scheduled events displays.

M527/E52545/M528/ E52645 printer

Fourth level

Values

Description

+ (Add)

Use to configure the printer to automatically wake up or go to sleep at specific times on specific days. Using this feature saves energy.

Edit Delete

NOTE: You must configure the date and time settings before you can use this feature. Energy Settings

Sleep Schedule


Event Type

Sleep Schedule


Event Time

Sleep Schedule


Event Days

Sleep Timer Settings

Sleep Mode/Auto Off After

M527/E52545/M528/ E52645 printer

Energy Settings M527/E52545/M528/ E52645 printer Energy Settings M527/E52545/M528/ E52645 printer Energy Settings M527/E52545/M528/ E52645 printer

Energy Settings M527/E52545/M528/ E52645 printer Energy Settings

Wake/Auto On to These Events

M506/E50045/M507/ E50145 printer

ENWW

Select whether to add or edit a Wake event or a Sleep event, and then select the time and the days for the wake or sleep event.

Sleep

Select days of the week from a list.

Range: 1 to 120 minutes Default = 60 minutes

Set the number of minutes after which the printer enters Sleep or Auto Off mode. Use the arrow buttons on the control to increase or decrease the number of minutes.

All Events* Network port Power button only

Sleep Timer Settings

Sleep/Auto Off Timer

M506/E50045/M507/ E50145 printer Energy Settings

Wake

Enabled*

Enable or disable the printer sleep or auto off function.

Disabled Sleep Timer Settings

Sleep Mode/Auto Off After

Range: 1 to 120 minutes Default = 60 minutes

Set the number of minutes after which the printer enters Sleep or Auto Off mode. Use the arrow buttons on the control to increase or decrease the number of minutes.



Second level

Third level

Display Settings

Display Brightness

A sliding bar displays with the indicator set in the middle. Use the arrow keys to select the desired brightness and then select Done.

Display Settings

System Sound

Fourth level

Values

Use to specify the intensity of the LCD control display.

On* Off

Display Settings

Language Settings

Display Settings

Display Settings

Information Screen

Inactivity Timeout

Select from a list of languages that the printer s.

Use to select a different language for control messages and specify the default keyboard layout. When you select a new language, the keyboard layout automatically changes to match the factory default for the selected language.

Keyboard Layout

Each language has a default keyboard layout. To change it, select from a list of layouts.

Select the default keyboard layout that matches the language you want to use.

Show connection information*

Use this menu item to display or hide connection information on the Home screen.

Range: 10-300 seconds Default = 60 seconds


Use to enable or disable sounds on the printer.

Language

Hide connection information Display Settings

Description

Specifies the amount of time that elapses between any activity on the control and when the printer resets to the default settings. When the timeout expires, the control display returns to the Home menu, and any signed in to the printer is signed out.

ENWW


Second level

Display Settings

Clearable Warnings

Third level

Fourth level

Values

Description

Display during job*

Use this feature to set the period that a clearable warning displays on the control . If the On setting is selected, clearable warnings appear until the Clearable Warnings button is pressed. If the Job setting is selected, clearable warnings stay on the display during the job that generated the warning and disappear from the display when the next job starts.

Display until cleared

Display Settings

Continuable Events

Auto-continue (10 seconds)* Touch OK to continue

Enable Device USB

Enabled

Enables the printer to open a file from a USB drive.

Disabled* Quiet Mode

Off* On Automatic transition Range: 10-300 pages Default = 10 pages

ENWW

Use this option to configure the printer behavior when the printer encounters certain errors. If the Auto-continue (10 seconds) option is selected, the job will continue after 10 seconds. If the Touch OK to continue option is selected, the job will stop and require the to touch the OK button before continuing.

Quiet Mode slows the printer down to reduce the noise the printer makes when printing. Automatic transition allows you to set a predetermined job size of 10 to 999 pages, and print jobs will print in Quiet Mode for all print jobs up to the predetermined page size.



Second level

Jam Recovery

Third level

Fourth level

Values

Description

Automatic*

This printer provides a jam recovery feature that reprints jammed pages. Select one of the following options:

Off On

Automatic: The printer attempts to reprint jammed pages when sufficient memory is available. This is the default setting. Off: The printer does not attempt to reprint jammed pages. Because no memory is used to store the most recent pages, performance is optimal. NOTE: When using this option, if the printer runs out of paper and the job is being printed on both sides, some pages can be lost. On: The printer always reprints jammed pages. Additional memory is allocated to store the last few pages printed. This might cause overall performance to suffer. Auto Recovery

Enabled Disabled*


If Auto Recovery is enabled and an unrecoverable error occurs in the device firmware, the device automatically turns off and turns back on to recover from the error.

ENWW

Table 2-24 General menu (M506/E50045/M507/E50145, M527/E52545/M528/E52645) (continued) First level Enable Auto Send

Second level

Third level

Fourth level

Values

Description

Disabled*

Browse to the HP Embedded Web Server AutoSend configuration page for advanced set up and the HP online Privacy Statement Information.

Enabled

Use the Enable Auto Send menu to enable or disable the AutoSend feature. The AutoSend feature enables your product to periodically send product configuration information including serial number, event logs, page usage counts and supplies status information to HP web addresses (URLs), or email addresses. Information sent to HP is used to improve products and services, and to monitor the product if you have a relationship with HP that provides you services such as proactive cartridge replacement, pay-perpage contracts, agreements, or usage tracking.

ENWW



Second level

Hold Off Print Job

Third level

Fourth level

Values

Description

Enabled*

Enable this feature if you want to prevent print jobs from starting while a is initiating a copy job from the control . Held print jobs start printing after the copy job is finished, provided that no other copy job is in the print queue.

Disabled

Reset Factory Settings

Address Book (M527/ E52545/M528/E52645 only)

Use to restore all printer settings to their factory defaults.

Copy (M527/E52545/ M528/E52645 only) Digital Send (M527/ E52545/M528/E52645 only) E-mail (M527/E52545/ M528/E52645 only) Fax (M527/E52545/M528/ E52645 only) General (M527/E52545/ M528/E52645 only) Print (M527/E52545/ M528/E52645 only) Security (M527/E52545/ M528/E52645 only) Cancel (M506/E50045/ M507/E50145 only) Reset (M506/E50045/ M507/E50145 only)

Print menu (M506/E50045/M507/E50145) and Copy/Print menu (M527/E52545/M528/E52645) Review the following information about the Print menu for the M506/E50045/M507/E50145) and the Copy/Print menu for the M527/E52545/M528/E52645 printers. To display: At the printer control , select the Settings menu, and then select the Print menu (M506/E50045/ M507/E50145) or the Copy/Print menu (M527/E52545/M528/E52645). In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.


ENWW

Table 2-25 Print menu (M506/E50045/M507/E50145) or Copy/Print menu (M527/E52545/M528/E52645) First level

Second level

Copy Settings

Image preview

Third level

M527/E52545/M528/ E52645 only Copy Settings

Values

Description

Make optional

Use this menu to configure how Copy behaves.

Require preview Disable preview Copies

1-9999

M527/E52545/M528/ E52645 only

Copy Settings

Fourth Level

Default = 1

Sides

Original Sides

M527/E52545/M528/ E52645 only

1-sided 2-sided Flip pages up

Configure the default options for copy jobs. If the does not specify the job options when creating the job, the default options are used. Use to indicate whether the original document is printed on one or both sides. For example, select Original Sides 1-sided and Output Sides 2sided when the original is printed on one side, but you want to make two-sided copies. Select Flip pages up to print the pages with long edge of the in the landscape orientation.

Copy Settings

Sides

Output Sides

M527/E52545/M528/ E52645 only

1-sided 2-sided Flip pages up

Use to indicate whether the copies should be printed on one or both sides. For example, select Original Sides 1-sided and Output Sides 2sided when the original is printed on one side, but you want to make two-sided copies. Select Flip pages up to print the pages with long edge of the in the landscape orientation.

Copy Settings

Watermark

Watermark Type

M527/E52545/M528/ E52645 only Copy Settings M527/E52545/M528/ E52645 only

None* Text

Watermark

Watermark Text

Draft Confidential

Use to set a text watermark.

Select a predefined text watermark.

Secret Top Secret Urgent

ENWW


Table 2-25 Print menu (M506/E50045/M507/E50145) or Copy/Print menu (M527/E52545/M528/E52645) (continued) First level

Second level

Third level

Copy Settings

Watermark

Text Font

M527/E52545/M528/ E52645 only

Fourth Level

Values

Description

Letter Gothic*

Select the font of the text watermark.

Antique Olive New Century Schoolbook Roman Garamond Antiqua

Copy Settings

Watermark

Text Size


30 point 40 point*

Select the font point size of the text watermark.

60 point Watermark

Darkness

M527/E52545/M528/ E52645 only

1 - (Lighter) 2

Select the darkness of the text watermark.

3* 4 5 - (Darker)

Copy Settings

Stamps

Stamp Content

M527/E52545/M528/ E52645 only

-defined value None* IP address name Product information Page number Date and time

Copy Settings

Stamps

Text Font

M527/E52545/M528/ E52645 only

Letter Gothic* Antique Olive

Use to set a stamp in any or all the following locations in the document: ●

Top Left

●

Top Center

●

Top Right

●

Bottom Left

●

Bottom Center

●

Bottom Right

Select the font of the stamp.

New Century Schoolbook Roman Garamond Antiqua

Copy Settings

Stamps

Text Size


8 point 12 point*

Select the font point size of the stamp.

20 point Stamps

M527/E52545/M528/ E52645 only


White background

Disabled* Enabled

Select the check box to enable a white background for the stamp.

ENWW


Second level

Copy Settings

Scan Mode

M527/E52545/M528/ E52645 only

Third level

Fourth Level

Values

Description

Standard document*

Use to indicate the type of original document to be scanned.

Prompt for additional pages Book 2-sided ID

Copy Settings M527/E52545/M528/ E52645 only

Reduce/Enlarge

Automatic* Include margins Manual Default=100

Select Prompt for additional pages to copy or scan an original document that has more pages than the document feeder can accommodate at one time, or to scan originals of different sizes that cannot be scanned together, and then combine these separate scan jobs into a single job. Scale the size of the document up or down. To reduce the image, select a scaling percentage that is less than 100. To enlarge the image, select a scaling percentage that is greater than 100. When Include margins is enabled, the printer reduces the image slightly to fit the entire scanned image within the printable area on the page.

ENWW



Second level

Copy Settings

Original Size

M527/E52545/M528/ E52645 only

Third level

Fourth Level

Values

Description

Automatically detect*

Specify the size of the original document.

Letter (8.5x11) Mixed Letter/Legal Legal (8.5x14) Executive (7.25x10.5) Statement (5.5x8.5) Oficio (8.5x13) 4x6 5x7 5x8 A4 (210x297 mm) A5 (148x210 mm) A6 (105x148 mm) RA4 (215x305 mm) B5 (182x257 mm) B6 (128x182 mm) 10x15cm 16K (195x270 mm) 16K (184x260 mm) 16K (197x273 mm) DPostcard JIS (148x200 mm) Oficio (216x340 mm)


ENWW


Second level

Copy Settings

Paper Selection

M527/E52545/M528/ E52645 only

Third level

Fourth Level

Values

Description

Paper Size

Match original size*

Select the size of paper to use when printing or making copies.

Letter (8.5x11) Legal (8.5x14) Executive (7.25x10.5) Statement (5.5x8.5) Oficio (8.5x13) 3x5 4x6 5x7 5x8 A4 (210x297 mm) A5 (148x210 mm) A6 (105x148 mm) RA4 (215x305 mm) B5 (182x257 mm) B6 (128x182 mm) 10x15cm 16K (195x270 mm) 16K (184x260 mm) 16K (197x273 mm) Postcard JIS (100x148 mm) DPostcard JIS (148x200 mm) Envelope #9 Envelope #10 Envelope Monarch Envelope #10 Envelope B5 Envelope C5 Envelope C6 Envelope DL Custom Oficio (216x340 mm)

ENWW



Second level

Copy Settings

Paper Selection

Third level

Fourth Level

Values

Description

Paper Type

Any Type

Select the type of paper to use when printing or making copies.

M527/E52545/M528/ E52645 only

Plain* Light 60-74g Intermediate 85-95g Mid-Weight 96-110g Heavy 111-130g Extra Heavy 131-175g Cardstock 176-220g Mono Transparency Labels Letterhead Envelope Preprinted Prepunched Colored Bond Recycled Rough HP EcoFFICIENT Light Bond

Copy Settings

Paper Selection

Paper Tray

M527/E52545/M528/ E52645 only

Automatically detect* Manually Feed

Select which tray to use when printing or making copies.

Tray 1 Tray 2

Copy Settings

Booklet

Booklet Format

Enabled


Disabled* Booklet


Booklet Format

Borders on each page

Enabled Disabled*

Content Orientation

M527/E52545/M528/ E52645 only


Portrait* Landscape

Select to have Booklet Format off or on.

Select to have borders printed on the page.

Specify the way the content of the original document is placed on the page.

ENWW


Second level

Copy Settings

Pages per Sheet

Third level


Description

One*

Select how many pages to print on one sheet.

Four Page Order

Right, then down Down, then right

Add page borders

Enabled


Values

Two


Fourth Level

Disabled*

Image Adjustment

Darkness

M527/E52545/M528/ E52645 only

1 - (Lighter) 2 3

Select to print the pages in rows or columns. Select the Add page borders checkbox to add borders to the pages. Adjust to increase or decrease the amount of white and black in the colors.

4 5* 6 7 8 9 - (Darker) Copy Settings M527/E52545/M528/ E52645 only

Image Adjustment

Contrast

1 - (Less) 2 3

Adjust to increase or decrease the difference between the lightest and darkest color on the page.

4 5* 6 7 8 9 - (More)

ENWW



Second level

Third level

Copy Settings

Image Adjustment

Background Cleanup

M527/E52545/M528/ E52645 only

Fourth Level

Values

Description

1 - (Normal)

Adjust if you are having trouble copying a faint image.

2 3* 4 5* 6 7 8 9 - (Cleaner)

Copy Settings

Image Adjustment

Sharpness

M527/E52545/M528/ E52645 only

1 - (Less) 2

Adjust to sharpen or soften the image.

3* 4 5 - (More)

Copy Settings

Optimize Text/Picture

Text

M527/E52545/M528/ E52645 only

Mixed* Printed picture

Select to optimize for the output of a particular type of content.

Photograph Copy Settings

Edge-to-Edge

Normal (recommended)

M527/E52545/M528/ E52645 only

Copy Settings

Edge-to-Edge output

Erase Edges

M527/E52545/M528/ E52645 only

Use inches

Enabled* Disabled

When the Edge-toEdge feature is enabled, the product minimizes margins and prints as close to the edge of the paper as possible. Use the Erase Edges feature to remove blemishes, such as dark borders or staple marks, by cleaning theedges of the scanned image. Disabling Use inches changes the measurements to millimeters.


ENWW


Second level

Third level

Copy Settings

Erase Edges

Front Side

M527/E52545/M528/ E52645 only

Fourth Level

Values

Description

Specify a different width for each edge

Sets the width of the edge to clean.

Apply same width to all edges* All edges value Default = 0.00

Copy Settings

Erase Edges

M527/E52545/M528/ E52645 only

Back Side

Specify a different width for each edge

Sets the width of the edge to clean.

Apply same width to all edges Mirror front side*

Copy Settings

Collate

M527/E52545/M528/ E52645 only

Copy Settings

Collate on*

When Collate on is selected, each set of copied pages are assembled in the same order as the original document.

Collate off

Multi-feed Detection

M527/E52545/M528/ E52645 only

Disabled

Use this feature to detect when multiple pages are fed simultaneously into the ADF (automatic document feeder) or sheet-feed scanner.

Enabled*

Copy Settings M527/E52545/M528/ E52645 only Enable Print from USB Drive Manage Stored Jobs

Enabled

Enables the printer to open a file from a USB drive.

Disabled* Job Sort Order

Job Name*

This option allows you list the jobs either alphabetically or chronologically.

Date*

Manage Stored Jobs

Retain Temporary Jobs

Do not retain Personal jobs only All temporary jobs

ENWW

Sets which temporary jobs will be retained in the event of a printer reboot.



Second level

Manage Stored Jobs

Temporary Job Storage Limit

Third level

Fourth Level

Values

Description

1-300

Configure global settings for jobs that are stored in the printer memory.

Default = 32

The Temporary Job Storage Limit feature specifies the number of temporary jobs that can be stored on the printer. The maximum allowed value is 300. Manage Stored Jobs

Temporary Job Storage Retention

Off 30 minutes 1 hour 4 hours 1 day 1 week

Configure global settings for temporary jobs that are stored in the printer memory. The Temporary Stored Job Retention feature specifies the amount of time temporary jobs can be stored on the printer.

4 weeks 3 days Manage Stored Jobs

Standard Stored Job Retention

Off 30 minutes 1 hour 4 hours 1 day 1 week

Configure global settings for jobs that are stored in the printer memory. The Standard Stored Job Retention feature specifies the amount of time jobs can be stored on the printer.

4 weeks 3 days Default Print Options

Number of Copies

Range: 1-32000 Default = 1

Default Print Options

Paper Selection

Paper size Paper type

Select from a list of sizes that the printer s.

Sets the default number of copies for a copy job. This default applies when the Copy function or the Quick Copy function is initiated from the printer Home screen. Configures the default paper size, type and tray used for print jobs.

Paper tray


ENWW


Second level

Third level


Default Custom Paper Size

X Dimension


Y Dimension


Use Inches




Fourth Level

Values

Description

Range: 3.00-8.50 inches

Configures the default paper size that is used when the selects Custom as the paper size for a print job.

Default = 8.5 inches

Range: 5.00-14.00 inches Default = 14 inches

Enabled* Disabled

Output Sides

1-sided*

Use to indicate whether the original document is printed on one or both sides.

2-sided


Edge-to-Edge

Normal (recommended)* Edge-to-Edge output


Resolution

FastRes 1200* ProRes 1200


Resolution

Economode

Enabled Disabled*

PCL and Postscript Settings

Courier Font


Wide A4

ENWW

Configures the default paper size that is used when the selects Custom as the paper size for a print job.

Regular* Dark

Enabled Disabled*

Use to avoid shadows that can appear along the edges of copies when the original document is printed close to the edges. Use to select the level of desired print quality. Text is printed using less toner. This setting is useful when you are printing drafts. You can turn on this option independently of other print quality settings. Select which version of the Courier font you want to use. The factory default setting is Regular, which uses an average stroke width. The Dark setting can be used if a heavier Courier font is needed. Changes the printable area of A4-size paper. If you enable this option, eighty 10-pitch characters can be printed on a single line of A4 paper.



Second level


Print PS Errors


Print PDF Errors


Personality

Third level

Fourth Level

Values

Description

Enabled

Use this feature to select whether a PostScript (PS) error page is printed when the printer encounters a PS error.

Disabled*

Enabled Disabled*

Automatic* PCL PS PDF


PCL


PCL


PCL

Font Settings

Font Source

Internal Disk resident*

Font Settings

Font Number



Font Settings

Font Pitch

Range: 0.44-99.99 Default = 10

Selects whether a PDF error page is printed when the printer encounters a PDF error. Configures the default print language or personality for the printer. Normally you should not change the printer language. If you change the setting to a specific printer language, the printer does not automatically switch from one language to another unless specific software commands are sent to it. Selects the font source for the -soft default font. The list of available options varies depending on the installed printer options. Specifies the font number for the soft default font using the source that is specified in the Font Source menu. The printer assigns a number to each font and lists it on the PCL font list. The font number displays in the Font # column of the printout. If the Font Source option and the Font Number setting indicate a contour font, then use this feature to select a default pitch (for a fixed-spaced font).

ENWW


Second level

Third level

Fourth Level

Values

Description


PCL

PCL Settings

Form Length

Range: 5-128 lines

Controls the PCL printcommand options. PCL is a set of printer commands that HP developed to provide access to printer features.

Default = 60

Use the Form Length feature to select the soft -default vertical form length. PCL and Postscript Settings

PCL


PCL

PCL Settings

Symbol Set

Select from a list of symbol sets.

Select any one of several available symbol sets from the control . A symbol set is a unique grouping of all the characters in a font. The factory default value for this option is PC-8. Either PC-8 or PC-850 are recommended for linedraw characters.


PCL

PCL Settings

Append CR to LF

Enabled

When enabled, this option appends a carriage return to each line feed encountered in backwardscompatible PCL jobs.


PCL

ENWW

PCL Settings

Orientation

Portrait*

Select the orientation that is most often used for copy or scan originals. Select the Portrait option if the short edge is at the top or select the Landscape option if the long edge is at the top.

Landscape

Disabled*

PCL Settings

Suppress Blank Pages

Enabled Disabled*

This option is for s who are generating their own PCL, which could include extra form feeds that would cause blank pages to be printed. When the On option is selected, form feeds are ignored if the page is blank.



Second level

Third level

Fourth Level

Values

Description


PCL

PCL Settings

Media Source Mapping

Standard*

Use to select and maintain input trays by number when you are not using the printer driver, or when the software program has no option for tray selection. The following options are available:

Classic

Standard: Tray numbering is based on newer HP LaserJet models. Classic: Tray numbering is based on HP LaserJet 4 and older models. Print Quality

General

Toner Density

A sliding bar appears with the indicator set in the middle between Less and More.

Lighten or darken the print on the page by changing the toner density setting.

Print Quality

General

REt

Disabled

Use this setting to enable or disable Resolution Enhancement technology (REt), which produces smoother angles, curves, and edges.

Enabled*

Print Quality

Image Registration

Tray

Tray 1 Tray 2

Specify tray to be adjusted

Tray 3 Tray 4 Tray 5 Depends upon the number of trays installed


ENWW


Second level

Third level

Print Quality

Image Registration

Front-side Horizontal Shift Front-side Vertical Shift Back-side Horizontal Shift Back-side Vertical Shift

Fourth Level

Values

Description

-5.00 mm to 5.00 mm

Shift the margin alignment to center the image on the page from top to bottom and from left to right. You can also align the image on the front with the image printed on the back. The direction that is perpendicular to the way the paper es through the printer is referred to as X. This is also known as the scan direction. X1 is the scan direction for a single-sided page or for the second side of a two-sided page. X2 is the scan direction for the first side of a twosided page. The direction that the paper feeds through the printer is referred to as Y. Y1 is the feed direction for a singlesided page or for the second side of a twosided page. Y2 is the feed direction for the first side of a two-sided page. Use the Adjust Tray <X> menu to adjust the registration settings for each tray. Before adjusting these values, print a registration test page. It provides alignment guides in the X and Y directions so you can determine which adjustments are necessary. You can adjust values for X1 Shift, X2 Shift, Y1 Shift, and Y2 Shift.

Print Quality

ENWW

Image Registration

Print Test Page

Use the Print Test Page option to print a page to test the image registration. It provides alignment guides in the X and Y directions so you can determine which adjustments are necessary.



Second level

Third level

Print Quality

Auto Sense Behavior

Tray 1

Fourth Level

Values

Description

Sense every page Sense first page Sense transparency only

Print Quality

Auto Sense Behavior

All Other Trays

Sense first page Sense transparency only

Print Quality

Print Quality

Adjust Paper types

Adjust Paper types

Select from a list of paper types that the printer s. The available options are the same for each paper type.

Print mode

Select from a list of paper types that the printer s. The available options are the same for each paper type.

Resistance mode

Select from a list of paper types Reset Paper Types

Normal* Up 1 Up 2

Changing the Print mode setting is usually the first first thing to try to resolve printquality problems. Problems can include toner not sticking well to the page, a faint image of the page repeated on the same or following page, incorrect gloss level, and so on. Use this setting to correct print quality problems in lowhumidity environments and highly resistive paper. Use the Up options to solve print quality problems that are related to faded images or scattered toner on certain paper types. The Up options raise the secondary transfer bias.

Print Quality

Print Quality

Adjust Paper types

Optimize

Select from a list of paper types that the printer s. The available options are the same for each paper type. Line Detail

Paper curl mode

Normal* Reduced

Normal* Off

Use this setting to reduce paper curl in print jobs.

Use this setting if you have scattered lines in printed pages.

Alternate Print Quality

Optimize

Moisture Control

Normal* Alternate


ENWW


Second level

Third level

Print Quality

Optimize

Envelope control

Fourth Level

Values

Description

Normal Reduced Temp

Print Quality

Optimize

Tray 1

Normal Alternate

Print Quality

Optimize

Background

Normal Alternate

Print Quality

Optimize

Uniformity Control

Normal Alternate 1 Alternate 2 Alternate 3

Print Quality

Optimize

Cac03

Off On

Print Quality

Optimize

Best Normal

Off On

Print Quality

Optimize

Tracking Control

Off On

Print Quality

Optimize

Registration

Normal Alternate

Print Quality

Optimize

Transfer Control

Normal Alternate 1

Print Quality

Optimize

Moisture Control

Normal Alternate

Print Quality

Optimize

Print Quality

Edge Control

Reset Optimize

Reset Off Light Normal* Maximum

ENWW



Second level

Manage Trays

Use Requested Tray

Third level

Fourth Level

Values

Description

Exclusively*

Controls how the printer handles jobs that have specified a specific input tray. Two options are available:

When available

Exclusively: The printer never selects a different tray when the has indicated that a specific tray should be used, even if that tray is empty. When available: The printer pulls from another tray if the specified tray is empty, even though the specific tray was indicated for the job. Manage Trays

Manually Feed Prompt

Always prompt* Prompt on mismatch

Indicate whether a prompt should appear when the type or size for a job does not match the specified tray and the printer pulls from the multipurpose tray instead. Two options are available: Always: A prompt always displays before using the multipurpose tray. Prompt on mismatch: A prompt displays only if the size or type do not match or the tray is empty.


ENWW


Second level

Manage Trays

Size/Type Prompt

Third level

Fourth Level

Values

Description

Display*

Controls whether the tray configuration message displays whenever a tray is closed. Two options are available:

Do not display

Display: Shows the tray configuration message when a tray is closed. The is able to configure the tray settings directly from this message. Do not display: Prevents the tray configuration message from automatically appearing. Manage Trays

Use Another Tray

Allow* Do not allow

Use to turn on or off the control prompt to select another tray when the specified tray is empty. Two options are available: Allow: When this option is selected the is prompted to either add paper to the selected tray or to choose a different tray. This is the factory default. Do not allow: When this option is selected, the is not given the option of selecting a different tray. The printer prompts the to add paper to the tray that was initially selected.

ENWW



Second level

Manage Trays

Alternative Letterhead Mode


Third level

Fourth Level

Values

Description

Off*

Use to load letterhead or preprinted paper into the tray the same way for all print jobs, whether you are printing to one side of the sheet or to both sides of the sheet. When this option is selected, load the paper as you would for printing on both sides. See the documentation that came with the printer for instructions about loading letterhead for printing on both sides. When this option is selected, the printer speed slows to the speed required for printing on both sides.

On

ENWW


Second level

Manage Trays

Duplex Blank Pages

Third level

Fourth Level

Values

Description

Automatic*

Controls how the printer handles twosided jobs (duplexing). Two options are available:

Always

Automatic: Choose this option to skip printing blank sides during a two-sided print job. The printer can print jobs faster when blank sides are skipped. Always: Choose this option to print all sides of a two-sided job, even if one side is blank. This might be preferable for certain jobs that use paper types such as letterhead or prepunched paper. Manage Trays

Override A4/Letter

Yes* No

Prints on letter-size paper when an A4 job is sent but no A4-size paper is loaded in the printer (or to print on A4 paper when a letter-size job is sent but no letter-size paper is loaded). This option will also override A3 with ledger-size paper and ledger with A3-size paper.

Scan/Digital Send Settings menu (M527/E52545/M528/E52645) Review the following information about the Scan/Digital Send Settings menu for M527/E52545/M528/E52645 printers. To display: At the printer control , select the Settings menu, and then select the Scan/Digital Send Settings menu. In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.

ENWW


Table 2-26 Scan/Digital Send Settings menu (M527/E52545/M528/E52645) First level

Second level

Third level

Scan to Email Settings

E-mail Setup

E-mail Setup Wizard

Scan to Network Folder Settings

NOTE: only

Fourth level

Values

Description Use to configure settings that apply to sending documents through email or saving documents to a folder on the network or on a USB multidrive.

Email Settings

Scan to USB Drive Settings NOTE: The same options are available for each of these features, except where noted.

The E-mail Setup Wizard feature configures the printer to send scanned images as email attachments. To open the printer HP Embedded Web Server and set up the email notification server, enter the printer IP address into a Web browser. Default Job Options

Image Preview

Make optional* Require preview Disable preview

Defines the default job options for each function. If you do not specify the job options when creating the job, the default options are used. For complete setup, go to the HP Embedded Web Server by typing the IP address of the printer into a Web browser. Use the Image Preview feature to scan a document and display a preview before completing the job. Select whether this feature is available on the printer. Make optional: The feature is optional, depending on the who is signed in. Require preview Previews are required for all s. Disable preview: Previews are disabled for all s.


ENWW

Table 2-26 Scan/Digital Send Settings menu (M527/E52545/M528/E52645) (continued) First level

Second level

Third level

Fourth level

Values

Description

Default File Name

[Untitled]*

The printer is shipped with a factory default file name of [Untitled] for any scanned files that are sent or saved. Use this feature to specify a different default file name. If you are saving a file to a network folder or USB storage device and a file with the default file name already exists, a number is appended to the file name, for example, [Untitled]001.

Document File Type

Select from a list of file types.

PDF provides the best overall image and text quality. JPEG is a good choice for most graphics. Most computers have a browser that can view .JPEG files. This file type produces one file per page. TIFF is a standard file format that many graphics programs . This file type produces one file per page. MTIFF: stands for multi-page TIFF. This file type saves multiple scanned pages in a single file. XPS (XML Paper Specification) creates an XAML file that preserves the original formatting of the document and s color graphics and embedded fonts. PDF/A (Archivable): provides archivable text and image quality. NOTE: OCR file types are not ed on this printer unless attached to DSS.

ENWW



Second level

Third level Optimize Text/Picture

Fourth level

Values

Description

Mixed*

Use to optimize the output for a particular type of content. You can optimize the output for text, printed pictures, or a mixture.

Text Printed picture Photograph

Mixed: Use to optimize the setting for text and for pictures. Text: Use to optimize the text portion of the copy when text and/or pictures are on the original. Printed picture: Use for line drawings and preprinted images, such as magazine clippings or pages from books. Photograph: Best suited for making copies of printed pictures. Quality and File Size

High (large file) Medium* Low (small file)

Original Sides

1-sided 2-sided


Use to select the quality for the output. Higher-quality images require a larger file size than lower-quality images. Larger files take more time to send, and some recipients might have trouble receiving larger files. Use to describe the layout for each side of the original document. First select whether the original document is printed on one side or both sides. Then touch the Orientation setting to indicate whether the original has portrait or landscape orientation. If it is printed on both sides, also select the 2-sided format that matches the original document.

ENWW


Second level

Third level

Fourth level

Values

Description

Orientation

Automatically detect

For some features to work correctly, you must specify the way the content of the original document is placed on the page. Portrait orientation means the short edge of the page is along the top. Landscape orientation means the long edge of the page is along the top. In the Orientation area, select whether the original document has a portrait or landscape orientation.

Portrait* Landscape

Resolution

600 dpi 400 dpi 300 dpi 200 dpi 150 dpi* 75 dpi

Content Orientation

Orientation

Auto Detect Portrait* Landscape

ENWW

Sets the resolution for sent documents. Higher resolution images have more dots per inch (dpi), so they show more detail. Lower resolution images have fewer dots per inch and show less detail, but the file size is smaller. Some file types, for example a file that will be processed with OCR, require a specific resolution. When these file types are selected, the Resolution setting might automatically change to a valid value. For some features to work correctly, you must specify the way the content of the original document is placed on the page. Portrait orientation means the short edge of the page is along the top. Landscape orientation means the long edge of the page is along the top. In the Orientation area, select whether the original document has a portrait or landscape orientation.



Second level

Third level Color/Black

Fourth level

Values

Description

Automatically detect color or black*

Use to enable or disable color scanning.

Automatically detect color or gray

Automatically detect color or black: When pages without color are detected, the printer creates an image of the page in 1bit black if other settings allow. If the other settings don't allow (File Type, for example), the image is in grayscale.

Color Black Black/Gray

Automatically detect color or gray: When pages without color are detected, the printer creates an image of the page in grayscale. Select this option for the best image quality for noncolor pages. Color: Scans documents in color. Black/Gray: Scans documents in grayscale. Black: Scans documents in black and white with a compressed file size. Original Size

Select from a list of ed sizes.

Use to describe the page size of the original document.

Notification

Do not notify*

Configure to receive notification about the status of a sent document.

Notify when job completes Notify only if job fails

Do not notify: Turns off this feature. Notify when job completes: Select to receive notification for this job only.


ENWW


Second level

Third level

Fourth level

Values

Description

Print

Notify only if job fails: Select to receive notification only if the job is not sent successfully.

E-mail

Print: Select to print the notification at this printer.

Image Adjustment

Include Thumbnail

NOTE: When sending an analog fax, select Include Thumbnail to receive a thumbnail image of the first page of the fax in your notification.

Notification E-mail address

E-mail: Select to receive the notification in an email. Touch the text box following Email Address, and then type the email address for the notification.

Darkness

Use to improve the overall quality of the copy. Adjust the Darkness setting to increase or decrease the amount of white and black in the colors.

Contrast

Adjust the Contrast setting to increase or decrease the difference between the lightest and darkest color on the page.

Background Cleanup

Adjust the Background Cleanup setting if you are having trouble copying a faint image.

Sharpness

Adjust the Sharpness setting to clarify or soften the image. For example, increasing the sharpness could make text appear crisper, but decreasing it could make photographs appear smoother.

Automatic Tone

ENWW



Second level

Third level

Fourth level

Values

Default

Cropping Options

Select this to make the selected Image Adjustment setting the default value. Do not crop* Crop to content Crop to paper

Erase Edges

Use Inches Back side erase Front side erase


On* Off

Blank Page Suppression


Description

Disabled* Enabled

Use this menu item to automatically crop the scan for digital sending. Use the Crop to content option to scan the smallest possible area that has detectable content. Use this menu item to remove blemishes, such as dark borders or staple marks, by cleaning the specified edges of the scanned image. In each of the text boxes enter the measurements, in millimeters or inches, for how much of the top edge, bottom edge, left edge, and right edge to clean. This setting stops the scanning process if it detects multiple-page feeds through the document feeder. Use to prevent blank pages in the original document from being included in the output document.

ENWW


Second level

Digital Send Service Setup

Allow Usage of Digital Sending Software (DSS) Server

Third level

Fourth level

Values

Description

Enabled*

Configure how the printer interacts with the HP Digital Sending Software (DSS) server. HP DSS handles digital sending tasks, such as faxing, emailing, and sending scanned documents to a network folder or USB storage device.

Disabled

Use the Allow Usage of Digital Sending Software (DSS) Server option to configure the printer to use HP DSS. Allow Transfer to New Digital Sending Software (DSS) Server

Enabled* Disabled

Use the Allow Transfer to New Digital Sending Software (DSS) Server option to specify whether DSS management of a printer is transferable to a different DSS.

Fax menu (M527/E52545/M528/E52645) Review the following information about the Fax menu for the M527/E52545/M528/E52645 printers. To display: At the printer control , select the Settings menu, and then select the Fax menu. In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting. Table 2-27 Fax menu (M527/E52545/M528/E52645) First level Internal Fax Modem Setup

Second level

Third level

Fourth level

Values

Description Configure settings for sending faxes from the printer. Use the Internal Fax Modem Setup feature to set up options for faxing. NOTE: To set up LAN fax or Internet fax, use the HP Embedded Web Server. To open the HP Embedded Web Server, type the printer network address into a Web browser. To configure the fax features, select the Fax tab.

ENWW


Table 2-27 Fax menu (M527/E52545/M528/E52645) (continued) First level

Second level

Third level

Fourth level

Values

Description

Fax Send Settings

Fax Send Setup

Fax Dialing Settings

Fax Dial Volume

Off

These settings control how the fax modem dials the outgoing fax number when faxes are sent.

Low* High Fax Send Settings

Fax Send Setup


Dialing Mode

Tone* Pulse

Fax Send Settings

Fax Send Setup


Redial Interval

1 – 5 Minutes Default = 5 minutes

Fax Send Settings

Fax Send Setup


Fax Send Speed

Fast* Medium Slow

Fax Send Settings

Fax Send Setup


Dialing Prefix

Fax Send Settings

Fax Send Setup


Detect Dial Tone

Fax Send Settings

Fax Send Setup


Redial on Error

Range: 0 – 9 Default = 2

Fax Send Settings

Fax Send Setup


Redial on No Answer


Fax Send Settings

Fax Send Setup


Redial on Busy


Fax Send Settings

Fax Send Settings

Fax Send Settings

Fax Send Setup

Fax Send Setup

Fax Send Setup


General Fax Send Settings

Fax Number Confirmation

Enabled


PC Fax Send

Enabled*


JBIG Compression

Disabled*

Disabled

Enabled* Disabled

If this feature is enabled, you must enter the fax number twice. Enables s who have the correct driver installed to send faxes through the printer from their computers. The JBIG compression reduces faxtransmission time, which can result in lower phone charges. However, using JBIG compression sometimes causes compatibility problems with older fax machines. If this occurs, turn off the JBIG compression.

ENWW


Second level

Third level

Fourth level

Values

Description

Fax Send Settings

Fax Send Setup


Error Correction Mode

Enabled*

When error-correction mode is enabled and an error occurs during fax transmission, the printer sends or receives the error portion again.


Fax Header

Billing Codes

Enable Billing Codes

Fax Send Settings

Fax Send Settings

Fax Send Setup

Fax Send Setup

Disabled

Prepend* Overlay Off On*

Use to prepend or overlay the fax header page. When billing codes are enabled, a prompt displays that asks the to enter the billing code for an outgoing fax. This prompt does not appear if the Allow s to edit billing codes check box is not checked. You can also use the billing codes report in the Reports menu to view the list of the billing codes that have been used for faxes that have been sent from the printer. The list is grouped by billing code and also shows fax details. This feature can be used for billing or usage tracking.

Fax Send Settings

Fax Send Setup

Billing Codes

Default Billing Code

Fax Send Settings

Fax Send Setup

Billing Codes

Minimum Length

Specify a default billing code for faxing. If you specify a default billing code, this code displays in the Billing Code field when the sends an outgoing fax. If this field is blank, no default billing code is provided for the . Range: 1 – 16 Default = 1

Fax Send Settings

ENWW

Fax Send Setup

Billing Codes

Allow s to edit billing codes

Specify the required length of the billing code. Billing codes can be between 1 and 16 characters long.

Off On*



Second level

Third level

Fax Send Settings

Default Job Options

Image Preview

Fourth level

Values

Description

Make optional*

Use the Image Preview feature to scan a document and display a preview before completing the job. Select whether this feature is available on the printer.

Require preview Disable preview

Make optional: The feature is optional, depending on the who is signed in. Require preview Previews are required for all s. Disable preview: Previews are disabled for all s. Fax Send Settings

Default Job Options

Resolution

Standard (100 x 200dpi)* Fine (200 x 200dpi) Superfine (300 x 300dpi)


Select the resolution for outgoing faxes. If you increase the resolution, faxes might be clearer but they could transmit more slowly. Some file types, for example a file that will be processed with OCR, require a specific resolution. When these file types are selected, the Resolution setting might be automatically changed to a valid value.

ENWW


Second level

Third level

Fax Send Settings

Default Job Options

Original Sides

Fourth level

Values

Description

1-sided*

Use to describe the layout for each side of the original document. First select whether the original document is printed on one side or both sides. Then touch the Orientation setting to indicate whether the original has portrait or landscape orientation. If it is printed on both sides, also select the 2-sided format that matches the original document.

2-sided Pages flip up

If the Pages flip up option is selected, the back side of the page is printed upside-down. This option is for print jobs that are bound along the top edge. Fax Send Settings

Default Job Options

Original Sides

Orientation

Portrait*

For some features to work correctly, you must specify the way the content of the original document is placed on the page.

Landscape

Portrait: This setting means the short edge of the page is along the top. Landscape: This setting means the long edge of the page is along the top. Fax Send Settings

Default Job Options

Notification

Do not notify* Notify when job completes Notify only if job fails

Use to receive notification about the status of a sent document. Do not notify: Turns off this feature. Notify when job completes: Select to receive notification for this job only. Notify only if job fails: Select to receive notification only if the job is not sent successfully.

ENWW



Second level

Third level

Fax Send Settings

Default Job Options

Notification

Fourth level

Values

Description

Print

Print: Select to print the notification at this printer.

E-mail

E-mail: Select to receive the notification in an email. Touch the text box following Email Address, and then enter the email address for the notification. Fax Send Settings

Default Job Options

Notification

Include Thumbnail

When sending an analog fax, select Include Thumbnail to receive a thumbnail image of the first page of the fax in your notification.

Fax Send Settings

Default Job Options

Notification


Provide the email address that will receive notifications.

Fax Send Settings

Default Job Options

Content Orientation

Orientation

Portrait* Landscape

For some features to work correctly, you must specify the way the content of the original document is placed on the page. Portrait: This setting means the short edge of the page is along the top. Landscape: This setting means the long edge of the page is along the top.

Fax Send Settings

Default Job Options

Original Size

Fax Send Settings

Default Job Options

Image Adjustment

Select from a list of sizes that the printer s. Darkness

Use to describe the page size of the original document. Use to improve the overall quality of the copy. Adjust the Darkness setting to increase or decrease the amount of white and black in the colors.

Fax Send Settings

Default Job Options


Image Adjustment

Contrast

Adjust the Contrast setting to increase or decrease the difference between the lightest and darkest color on the page.

ENWW


Second level

Third level

Fourth level

Values

Description

Fax Send Settings

Default Job Options

Image Adjustment

Background Cleanup

Adjust the Background Cleanup setting if you are having trouble copying a faint image.

Fax Send Settings

Default Job Options

Image Adjustment

Sharpness

Adjust the Sharpness setting to clarify or soften the image. For example, increasing the sharpness could make text appear crisper, but decreasing it could make photographs appear smoother.

Fax Send Settings

Default Job Options

Image Adjustment

Automatic Tone

The printer automatically adjusts the Darkness, Contrast, and Background Cleanup settings to the most appropriate for the scanned document.

Fax Send Settings

Default Job Options

Optimize Text/Picture

Manually adjust*

Optimize For Text Printed picture Photograph

Optimizes the output for a particular type of content. You can optimize the output for text, printed pictures, or a mixture. Manually adjust: Use to manually optimize the setting for text or for pictures. Text: Use to optimize the text portion of the copy where text and/or pictures are on the original. Printed picture: Use for line drawings and preprinted images, such as magazine clippings or pages from books. Photograph: Best suited for making copies of printed pictures.

Fax Send Settings

Default Job Options


Disabled Enabled*

ENWW

This setting stops the scanning process if it detects multiple-page feeds through the document feeder.



Second level

Third level

Fax Send Settings

Default Job Options

Fax Receive Settings

Fax Receive Setup

Fourth level

Values

Description

Blank Page Suppression

Disabled*

Prevents blank pages in the original document from being included in the output document.

Ringer Volume

Off

Enabled

Low*

Use to configure settings for receiving faxes.

High Fax Receive Settings

Fax Receive Setup

Rings To Answer

Range: 1–6 Default = 1


Fax Receive Setup

Fax Send Speed

Fast* Medium Slow


Fax Receive Setup

Ring Interval

Range: 220–600 ms Default = 600 ms


Fax Receive Setup

Ring Frequency

Range: 1–200 Default = 68hz


Fax Printing Schedule

Always store faxes Always print faxes* Use schedule


Fax Printing Schedule


Schedule

Add

Print incoming faxes

Touch this to set up a fax printing schedule if you selected the Use Fax Printing Schedule option.

Edit

Store incoming faxes

Delete

Time

If you have concerns about the security of private faxes, use this feature to store faxes rather than having them automatically print. Select Incoming Fax Options, and then you can choose to always store faxes, always print them, or you can set up a schedule for each day of the week. If you are using a fax printing schedule, use this menu to configure when to print faxes.

Event Days

ENWW


Second level

Third level


Blocked Fax Numbers

Fax Number to Block

Fourth level

Values

Description The blocked fax list can contain up to 30 numbers. When the printer receives a call from one of the blocked fax numbers, it deletes the incoming fax. It also logs the blocked fax in the activity log along with job-ing information. Add blocked numbers: Enter a fax number into the Fax Number to Block field, and then touch the arrow button to add a new number to the blocked fax list. To remove blocked numbers: Select a number and touch the Delete button to delete it from the blocked fax list. To clear all blocked numbers: Touch the Delete All button to clear all of the numbers from the blocked fax list. You can also use the Blocked Fax List report in the Information menu to view the list of the fax numbers that have been blocked on this printer.


Default Job Options

Notification

Do not notify* Notify when job completes Notify only if job fails

Configure to receive notification about the status of a sent document. Do not notify: Turns off this feature. Notify when job completes: Select to receive notification for this job only. Notify only if job fails: Select to receive notification only if the job is not sent successfully.

ENWW



Second level


Default Job Options

Third level

Fourth level

Values

Description

Print

E-mail: Select to receive the notification in an email. Touch the text box following Email Address, and then enter the email address for the notification.

E-mail*


Default Job Options

Include Thumbnail


Default Job Options



Default Job Options

Stamp Received Faxes

NOTE: When sending an analog fax, select Include Thumbnail to receive a thumbnail image of the first page of the fax in your notification.

Enabled Disabled*


Default Job Options

Fit to Page

Enabled* Disabled


Default Job Options

Paper Selection

Use this option to add the date, time, sender’s phone number, and page number to each page of the faxes that this printer receives. Use to shrink faxes that are larger than Letter-size or A4-size so that they can fit onto a Letter-size or A4-size page. If this feature set to Disabled, faxes larger than Letter or A4 will flow across multiple pages.

Automatic* Select from a list of the trays.


Default Job Options

Output sides

1-sided* 2-sided Pages flip up


Use to describe the layout for each side of the original document. First select whether the original document is printed on one side or both sides. Then touch the Orientation setting to indicate whether the original has portrait or landscape orientation. If it is printed on both sides, also select the 2-sided format that matches the original document.

ENWW


Second level

Fax Forwarding

Enable Fax Forwarding

Third level

Fourth level

Values

Description

Disabled*

Use to forward received faxes to another fax machine.

Enabled Fax Forwarding

Type of Fax Job to Forward

All faxes Sent faxes Received faxes

Fax Forwarding

Fax Forwarding Number

Enter the fax fowarding number.

Clear Fax Activity Log

Cancel Clear

Clears all events from the Fax Activity Log list.

Manage Supplies menu Review the following information about the Manage Supplies menu. To display: At the printer control , select the Settings menu, and then select the Manage Supplies menu. In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting. Table 2-28 Manage Supplies menu First level

Second level

Low Warning Thresholds

Black Cartridge


Document Feeder Kit

1-100%

M527/E52545/M528/ E52645 only

Default = 10%


Maintenance Kit

1-100%

M506/E50045/M507/ E50145 only

Default = 10%

Low Warning Threshold Message

ENWW

Third level

Fourth level

Values

Description

1-100%

Set the estimated percentage at which the printer notifies you when a toner cartridge is very low.

Default = 4%

On* Off

Set the estimated percentage at which the printer notifies you when the document feeder kit is very low. Set the estimated percentage at which the printer notifies you when the maintenance kit is very low. Displays a message on the control when a cartridge is very low.


Table 2-28 Manage Supplies menu (continued) First level

Second level

Low Behavior

Third level

Fourth level

Values

Description

Continue*

Use one of these options to specify the action for the device to take when a supply reaches a low condition.

Stop

Stop: Stops the current print job. Continue: Completes the current print job. Very Low Behavior

Black Cartridge

Stop Continue* Prompt to continue

Use one or more of these options to specify the action for the device to take when a supply reaches a very low condition. Stop: Stops the current print job. Continue: Completes the current print job. Prompt to continue: Allows the to decide whether or not to finish printing.

Very Low Behavior

Document Feeder Kit

Stop

M527/E52545/M528/ E52645 only

Continue Prompt to continue*

Use one or more of these options to specify the action for the device to take when a supply reaches a very low condition. Stop: Stops the current print job. Continue: Completes the current print job. Prompt to continue: Allows the to decide whether or not to finish printing.


ENWW

Table 2-28 Manage Supplies menu (continued) First level

Second level

Very Low Behavior

Third level

Fourth level

Values

Description

Maintenance Kit

Stop

M506/E50045/M507/ E50145 only

Continue

Use one or more of these options to specify the action for the device to take when a supply reaches a very low condition.

Prompt to continue*

Stop: Stops the current print job. Continue: Completes the current print job. Prompt to continue: Allows the to decide whether or not to finish printing. Store Usage Data

On supplies* Not on supplies

Cartridge Protection

Off* Protect cartridges

Cartridge Policy

Off* Authorized HP

Reset Supplies

Document Feeder Kit (M527/E52545/M528/ E52645 only) Maintenance Kit (M506/E50045/M507/ E50145 only)

Reset Cancel

Store Usage Data provides a way to suppress the toner cartridges from storing most of the information gathered exclusively for the purpose of understanding the usage of the printer. Select the On supplies setting to store the data on the toner cartridge memory chip. Select the Not on supplies setting to suppress the information from being stored on the memory chip. Select to permanently protect cartridges so that they can be used only in this product or fleet of products. Set Authorized HP to allow only genuine HP cartridges to be used in this printer. Select this option if you have installed a new document feeder kit (M527/E52545/M528/ E52645) or maintenance kit (M506/ E50045/M507/ E50145).

Networking menu Review the following information about the Networking menu. ENWW


To display: At the printer control , select the Settings menu, and then select the Networking menu. In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting. Table 2-29 Networking menu First level

Second level

Third level

Ethernet

Information

Print Security Report

Fourth level

Values

Description

Yes

Yes: Prints a page that contains the current security settings on the HP Jetdirect print server.

No*

No: A security settings page is not printed. Ethernet

T/IP

Host Name

Use the arrow buttons to edit the host name. NPIXXXXXX*


An alphanumeric string, up to 32 characters, used to identify the printer. This name is listed on the HP Jetdirect configuration page. The default host name is NPIxxxxxx, where xxxxxx is the last six digits of the LAN hardware (MAC) address.

ENWW

Table 2-29 Networking menu (continued) First level

Second level

Third level

Fourth level

Values

Description

Ethernet

T/IP

IPV4 Settings

Config Method

Bootp

Specifies the method that T/IPv4 parameters will be configured on the HP Jetdirect print server.

DH* Auto IP Manual

Bootp (Bootstrap Protocol): Use for automatic configuration from a BootP server. DH (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol): Use for automatic configuration from a DHv4 server. If selected and a DH lease exists, the DH Release menu and the DH Renew menu are available to set DH lease options. Auto IP: Use for automatic link-local IPv4 addressing. An address in the form 169.254.x.x is assigned automatically. If you set this option to the Manual setting, use the Manual Settings menu to configure T/IPv4 parameters.

ENWW



Second level

Third level

Fourth level

Values

Description

Ethernet

T/IP

IPV4 Settings

Default IP

Auto IP*

Specify the IP address to default to when the print server is unable to obtain an IP address from the network during a forced T/IP reconfiguration (for example, when manually configured to use BootP or DH).

Legacy

NOTE: This feature assigns a static IP address that might interfere with a managed network. Auto IP: A link-local IP address 169.254.x.x is set. Legacy: The address 192.0.0.192 is set, consistent with older HP Jetdirect printers. Ethernet

T/IP

IPV4 Settings

DH Release

Yes No*

Ethernet

T/IP

IPV4 Settings

DH Renew

Yes No*

Ethernet

T/IP

IPV4 Settings

Primary DNS

Range: 0-255 Default = xxx.xxx.xx.xx

Ethernet

T/IP

IPV4 Settings

Secondary DNS

Range: 0-255 Default = 0.0.0.0

Ethernet

T/IP

IPV6 Settings

Enable

Off On*

Specify the IP address (n.n.n.n) of a Primary Domain Name System (DNS) Server. Specify the IP address (n.n.n.n) of a Secondary DNS Server. Use this item to enable or disable IPv6 operation on the print server. Off: IPv6 is disabled. On: IPv6 is enabled.

Ethernet

T/IP

IPV6 Settings

Address

Manual Settings Enable Address


Use this item to enable and manually configure a T/IPv6 address.

ENWW


Second level

Third level

Fourth level

Values

Description

Ethernet

T/IP

IPV6 Settings

DHV6 Policy

Router Specified

Router Specified: The stateful autoconfiguration method to be used by the print server is determined by a router. The router specifies whether the print server obtains its address, its configuration information, or both from a DHv6 server.

Router Unavailable* Always

Router Unavailable: If a router is not available, the print server should attempt to obtain its stateful configuration from a DHv6 server. Always: Whether a router is available, the print server always attempts to obtain its stateful configuration from a DHv6 server. Ethernet

T/IP

IPV6 Settings

Primary DNS


Ethernet

T/IP

IPV6 Settings

Secondary DNS


Ethernet

T/IP

Proxy Server

Select from a provided list.

Specify the IP address (n.n.n.n) of a Primary Domain Name System (DNS) Server. Specify the IP address (n.n.n.n) of a Secondary DNS Server. Specifies the proxy server to be used by embedded applications in the printer. A proxy server is typically used by network clients for Internet access. It caches Web pages, and provides a degree of Internet security for those clients. To specify a proxy server, enter its IPv4 address or fullyqualified domain name. The name can be up to 255 octets. For some networks, you might need to your Internet Service Provider (ISP) for the proxy server address.

ENWW



Second level

Third level

Ethernet

T/IP

Proxy Port

Fourth level

Values

Description

Range: 1-65535

Enter the port number used by the proxy server for client . The port number identifies the port reserved for proxy activity on your network, and can be a value from 0 to 65535.

Default = 00080

Ethernet

T/IP

Idle Timeout


Wi-Fi Direct

Status

The time period, in seconds, after which an idle T print data connection is closed (default is 270 seconds, 0 disables the timeout).

On* Off

Wi-Fi Direct

Wi-Fi Direct Name

DIRECT-xx-HP [printer model]*

Displays the Wi-Fi Direct printer name.

xx represents two unique characters to help identify the printer.


ENWW


Second level

Wi-Fi Direct

Channel

Third level

Fourth level

Values

Description

1

Displays the available channels.

2* 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 36 40 44 48 149 153 157 161 165 Wi-Fi Direct

Connection Method

Automatic* Manual

Automatic: A mobile device can automatically connect to the printer and print a document. Manual: You must acknowledge the connection by touching the printer display when prompted or by entering a PIN code, provided by the printer, into the mobile device.

Wi-Fi Direct

ENWW

Wi-Fi Direct

12345678*

Displays the Wi-Fi Direct for the printer.



Second level

Third level

Wireless

Information

Print Security Report

Fourth level

Values

Description

Yes

Yes: Prints a page that contains the current security settings on the HP Jetdirect print server.

No*

No: A security settings page is not printed. Wireless

Wireless Station

Status

Wireless

Wireless Station

SSID

Wireless

Wireless Station

Authentication

Wireless

Wireless Station

Reset 802.11

Wireless

Wireless Station

Wi-Fi Protected Setup

Wireless

T/IP

Host Name

NPIXXXXXX* Edit the host name as needed.


An alphanumeric string, up to 32 characters, used to identify the printer. This name is listed on the HP Jetdirect configuration page. The default host name is NPIxxxxxx, where xxxxxx is the last six digits of the LAN hardware (MAC) address.

ENWW


Second level

Third level

Fourth level

Values

Description

Wireless

T/IP

IPV4 Settings

Config Method

Bootp

Specifies the method that T/IPv4 parameters will be configured on the HP Jetdirect print server.

DH* Auto IP Manual

Bootp (Bootstrap Protocol): Use for automatic configuration from a BootP server. DH (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol): Use for automatic configuration from a DHv4 server. If selected and a DH lease exists, the DH Release menu and the DH Renew menu are available to set DH lease options. Auto IP: Use for automatic link-local IPv4 addressing. An address in the form 169.254.x.x is assigned automatically. If you set this option to the Manual setting, use the Manual Settings menu to configure T/IPv4 parameters.

ENWW



Second level

Third level

Fourth level

Values

Description

Wireless

T/IP

IPV4 Settings

Default IP

Auto IP*

Specify the IP address to default to when the print server is unable to obtain an IP address from the network during a forced T/IP reconfiguration (for example, when manually configured to use BootP or DH).

Legacy

NOTE: This feature assigns a static IP address that might interfere with a managed network. Auto IP: A link-local IP address 169.254.x.x is set. Legacy: The address 192.0.0.192 is set, consistent with older HP Jetdirect printers. Wireless

T/IP

IPV4 Settings

DH Release

Yes No*

Wireless

T/IP

IPV4 Settings

DH Renew

Yes No*

Wireless

T/IP

IPV4 Settings

Primary DNS


Wireless

T/IP

IPV4 Settings

Secondary DNS


Wireless

T/IP

IPV6 Settings

Enable

Off On*

Specify the IP address (n.n.n.n) of a Primary Domain Name System (DNS) Server. Specify the IP address (n.n.n.n) of a Secondary DNS Server. Use this item to enable or disable IPv6 operation on the print server. Off: IPv6 is disabled. On: IPv6 is enabled.

Wireless

T/IP

IPV6 Settings

Address

Manual Settings Enable Address


Use this item to enable and manually configure a T/IPv6 address.

ENWW


Second level

Third level

Fourth level

Values

Description

Wireless

T/IP

IPV6 Settings

DHV6 Policy

Router Specified

Router Specified: The stateful autoconfiguration method to be used by the print server is determined by a router. The router specifies whether the print server obtains its address, its configuration information, or both from a DHv6 server.

Router Unavailable* Always

Router Unavailable: If a router is not available, the print server should attempt to obtain its stateful configuration from a DHv6 server. Always: Whether a router is available, the print server always attempts to obtain its stateful configuration from a DHv6 server. Wireless

T/IP

IPV6 Settings

Primary DNS


Wireless

T/IP

IPV6 Settings

Secondary DNS


Wireless

T/IP

Proxy Server

Select from a provided list.

Specify the IP address (n.n.n.n) of a Primary Domain Name System (DNS) Server. Specify the IP address (n.n.n.n) of a Secondary DNS Server. Specifies the proxy server to be used by embedded applications in the printer. A proxy server is typically used by network clients for Internet access. It caches Web pages, and provides a degree of Internet security for those clients. To specify a proxy server, enter its IPv4 address or fullyqualified domain name. The name can be up to 255 octets. For some networks, you might need to your Internet Service Provider (ISP) for the proxy server address.

ENWW



Second level

Third level

Wireless

T/IP

Proxy Port

Fourth level

Values

Description

Range: 1-65535

Enter the port number used by the proxy server for client . The port number identifies the port reserved for proxy activity on your network, and can be a value from 0 to 65535.

Default = 80

Wireless

T/IP

Idle Timeout


Wireless

Security

Secure Web

The time period, in seconds, after which an idle T print data connection is closed (default is 270 seconds, 0 disables the timeout).

HTTPS Required* HTTPS Optional

Wireless

Security

IPSEC

Keep Disable*

Wireless

Security

802.1X

Reset Keep*

Wireless

Security

Announcement Agent

Enable* Disable

Wireless

Security

Reset Security

Yes No*

I/O Timeout

Range: 5 – 300 sec Default = 10


Use to set the I/O timeout period in seconds. I/O timeout refers to the elapsed time before a print job fails. If the stream of data that the printer receives for a print job gets interrupted, this setting indicates how long the printer will wait before it reports that the job has failed.

ENWW

Tools menu The menus under the Tools menu contain the options for maintaining the printer and troubleshooting printer problems. Learn about these menus and settings.

ENWW

●

Maintenance menu (all except M501)

●

Troubleshooting menu


Maintenance menu (all except M501) Review the following information about the Maintenance menu for the M506/E50045/M507/E50145 and M527/ E52545/M528/E52645 printers. ●

Backup/Restore menu (all except M501)

●

Calibration/Cleaning menu (all except M501)

●

USB Firmware Upgrade menu (all except M501)

●

Service menu (all except M501)

Backup/Restore menu (all except M501) Review the following information about the Backup/Restore menu for the M506/E50045/M507/E50145 and M527/E52545/M528/E52645 printers. To display: At the printer control , select the Tools menu, select the Maintenance menu, and then select the Backup/Restore menu. In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting. Table 2-30 Backup/Restore menu (all except M501) First level

Second level

Third level

Values

Back up Data

Enable Scheduled Backups

Backup Time

Enter a time

Days Between Backups

Enter the number of days

Description

Back up Now Export Last Backup Restore Data

Insert a USB drive that contains the backup file.

Calibration/Cleaning menu (all except M501) Review the following information about the Calibration/Cleaning menu for the M506/E50045/M507/E50145 and M527/E52545/M528/E52645 printers. To display: At the printer control , select the Tools menu, select the Maintenance menu, and then select the Calibration/Cleaning menu. In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.


ENWW

Table 2-31 Calibration/Cleaning menu (all except M501) First level

Values

Description

Cleaning Page

Automatic Cleaning Interval

Use this menu to configure the settings for the product to automatically print a cleaning page.

Off* 1000 pages 2000 pages 5000 pages 10000 pages 20000 pages

Select Off to disable automatic cleaning. Select a cleaning interval to set the number of pages to be printed before an automatic cleaning page is printed. Touch Print to manually print a cleaning page. NOTE: Cleaning pages print on the default paper size configured for the printer.

Calibrate Scanner

Done

(M527/E52545/M528/E52645 only)

Start

Clean Document Feeder Rollers

Set cleaning reminder interval

(M527/E52545/M528/E52645 only)

Range: 0 – 100%

Touch Start to calibrate the device scanner. Messages on the control display will lead you through the calibration process. Configure cleaning settings for the document feeder rollers.

Default = 10% Done Clean Now

USB Firmware Upgrade menu (all except M501) Review the following information about the USB Firmware Upgrade menu for the M506/E50045/M507/E50145 and M527/E52545/M528/E52645 printers. To display: At the printer control , select the Tools menu, select the Maintenance menu, and then select the USB Firmware Upgrade menu. Insert a USB storage device with a firmware upgrade bundle into the USB port, and follow the on-screen instructions. Service menu (all except M501) Review the following information about the Service menu for the M506/E50045/M507/E50145 and M527/ E52545/M528/E52645 printers. To display: At the printer control , select the Tools menu, and then select the Service menu. The Service menu is locked and requires a PIN for access. This menu is intended for use by authorized service personnel. See the Service mode function section in the printer troubleshooting manual. Troubleshooting menu Review the following information about the Troubleshooting menu.

ENWW


To display: At the printer control , select the Tools menu, and then select the Troubleshooting menu. In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting. Table 2-32 Troubleshooting menu First level

Second level

Reports


Third level

Fourth level

Values

Description

Settings Menu Map

Select the desired report and then select the print icon

Current Settings Page Configuration Page

to print the page.

Supplies Status Page Usage Page Paper Path Page File Directory Page Web Services Status Page PCL Font List PS Font List Event Log Warning Log Page T.30 Protocol Trace PQ Troubleshooting Pages Paper Path Test Reports

Fax Reports

Fax Activity Log Billing Codes Report

Select the desired report and then select the print icon to print the

Blocked Fax List Fax Call Report Reports

Other Pages

PCL Font List PS Font List

page. Select the desired report and then select the print icon to print the page.


ENWW

Table 2-32 Troubleshooting menu (continued) First level

Second level

Fax Tools

Fax T.30 Trace Report

Third level

Fourth level

Values

Description

Never automatically print*

Use to print or configure the fax T.30 trace report. T.30 is the standard that specifies handshaking, protocols, and error correction between fax machines.

Print after every fax Print only after fax send jobs Print only after received faxes Print only after fax send errors Print only after fax receive errors Print after any fax error

ENWW

Fax Tools (Fax models only)

Fax V.34

Enable*

Use to disable V.34 modulations if several fax failures have occurred or if phone line conditions require it.


JBIG Compression


Fax Speaker Mode


Fax Service Log

Print

The standard fax cludes basic information such as the time and whether the fax was successful. The detailed fax log shows the intermediate results of the redial process not shown in the standard fax log.

Print Quality Pages

PQ Troubleshooting Pages

Print

Use to print pages that help you resolve problems with print quality.

Disable

On Off* Normal* Diagnostic

Used by a technician to evaluate and diagnose fax issues by listening to the sounds of fax modulations



Second level

Third level

Fourth level

Values

Event Log

Description Prints the 50 most recent events in the Event Log. For each event, the printed log shows the error number, page count, error code, and description or personality.

Paper Path Page

Print

Shows how many pages were printed from each tray.

Continue

Use this diagnostic test to print internal pages or send an external job to the printer when the toner cartridge is removed or exchanged. Supply errors are ignored while the printer is in this mode.

Diagnostic Tests

Disable Cartridge Check

Diagnostic Tests

Paper Path Test

Source Tray

Select from a list of the available trays.

Generates a test page for testing paper handling features. You can define the path that is used for the test in order to test specific paper paths

Diagnostic Tests

Paper Path Test

Number of Copies

Range: 1–500

Sets the default number of copies for a copy job. This default applies when the Copy or Quick Copy function is initiated from the printer Home screen. The factory default setting is 1.

Default = 1

Diagnostic Tests

Paper Path Test

Diagnostic Tests

Print/Stop Test

Diagnostic Tests

Paper Path Sensor Test


Test Duplex Path

Enable

(Duplex models only)

Disable*

Prints on both sides of the paper.

Specify the length of time in milliseconds (0-60,000). Select from a list of the printer sensors.

Initiates a test of the paper path sensors.

ENWW


Second level

Diagnostic Tests

Manual Sensor Test

Third level

Fourth level

Values

Description

Select from a list of available components

Test the printer sensors and switches for correct operation. Each sensor is displayed on the control- screen, along with its status. Manually trip each sensor and watch for it to change on the screen. Press the Stop button to abort the test.

Reset

Diagnostic Tests

Tray/Bin Manual Sensor Test

Select from a list of available components Reset

Diagnostic Tests

Component Test

Select from a list of available components.

Diagnostic Tests

Continuous Scan (M527/E52545/ M528/E52645 only)

2-sided

Diagnostic Tests

Scanner Tests (M527/E52545/ M528/E52645 only)

Sensors

Generate Debug Data

ENWW

Test the printer sensors and switches for correct operation. Each sensor is displayed on the control- screen, along with its status. Manually trip each sensor and watch for it to change on the screen. Press the Stop button to abort the test. Use to exercise individual parts independently to isolate noise, leaking, or other issues. To start the test, select one of the components. The test will run the number of times specified by the Repeat option. You might be prompted to remove parts from the printer during the test. Press the Stop button to abort the test.

Start


Table 2-32 Troubleshooting menu (continued) First level Retrieve Diagnostic Data

Second level

Third level

Fourth level

Values

Description

Create device data file

Create files that contain information about the printer that can help identify the cause of problems.

Create zipped debug information file Include crash dump files Clean up debug information Send to E-mail Export to USB Retrieve Fax Diagnostic Data

Create device data file Create zipped debug information file Include crash dump files

Create files that contain information about the printer that can help identify the cause of problems.

Clean up debug information Send to E-mail Export to USB


ENWW

Error code and control message troubleshooting overview Error codes and control- messages display on the printer control to indicate the current printer status or situations that might require action. ●

Error codes

●

How to search for printer documentation

Error codes Error codes indicate the current printer status or situations that might require action. Error codes are numerical, or alphanumerical, and have a set structure with six characters (example: 13.WX.YZ). ●

The first two characters are numeric and represent the system component that is causing the error. For example, in error code 10.22.15, 10 = Supplies for HP LaserJets.

●

The remaining four characters (WX, Y, and Z values) further define the error.

HP LaserJet and HP PageWide Enterprise error codes are documented in the control message document (MD) for each printer The MD is a comprehensive list of error codes, diagnostic and troubleshooting steps to clear or resolve the error, and other helpful information such as service mode pins and part numbers. The MD is continually updated and republished with the latest information for the following error codes. Table 2-33 Error codes: The first two characters

ENWW

Error code

System component

System error description

10.WX.YZ

Supplies (LaserJet)

Supply error or supply memory error

11.WX.YZ

Real-time clock

Internal error with the clock on the formatter.

13.WX.YZ

Jam (LaserJet)

Paper jam or open door jam error.

15.WX.YZ

Jam (PageWide)

Paper jam or open door jam error.

17.WX.YZ

Supplies (PageWide)

Supply error or supply memory error.

20.WX.YZ

Printer memory

Insufficient memory or buffering error.

21.WX.YZ

Page

Page complexity causing a decompression error when trying to process job.

30.WX.YZ

Scanner

Flatbed scanner error occurring inside the unit.

31.WX.YZ

Document feeder

Document feeder, scanner, or jam error.

32.WX.YZ

Backup, restore, or reset

Backup, restore, or reset notification or error.

33.WX.YZ

Security

Backup, Disk, EFI BIOS, Firmware integrity (SureStart), or error.

40.WX.YZ

Input/Output (I/O)

Partition manager, secure erase, or USB accessory error.


Table 2-33 Error codes: The first two characters (continued) Error code

System component


41.WX.YZ

F, Laser scanner, or Paper path

Miscellaneous error including general and misprint or mismatch errors typically involving (but not limited to) the f, the laser scanner, or the paper path.

42.WX.YZ

Firmware

Firmware failure involving the Event Log, Shell, System Manager, or other component.

44.WX.YZ

Firmware

Firmware failure involving a digital sending component.

45.WX.YZ

OXPd/Web Kit (PageWide)

Informational notifications involving the OXPd Web Kit (communications log).

46.WX.YZ

Engine (LaserJet)

Engine communication error.

47.WX.YZ

Firmware

Job parser or printer calibration error.

48.WX.YZ

Firmware

PJA job ing, job management, or job pipeline error.

49.WX.YZ

Firmware

Firmware communication error.

50.WX.YZ

F (LaserJet)

F error.

51.WX.YZ

Laser scanner (LaserJet)

Laser scanner beam error.

52.WX.YZ

Laser scanner (LaserJet)

Laser scanner startup error.

54.WX.YZ

Sensor

Sensor error (not jam related).

55.WX.YZ

DC controller (LaserJet)

DC controller communication error.

56.WX.YZ

Paper handling (LaserJet)

Paper input/output or accessory error.

57.WX.YZ

Fan

Fan error.

58.WX.YZ

Sensor

Engine sensor failure.

59.WX.YZ

Motor (LaserJet)

Motor error.

60.WX.YZ

Tray motor error (LaserJet)

Tray lifting or pick up error.

61.WX.YZ

Engine (PageWide and LaserJet)

Print engine error with the 8–bit data package.

62.WX.YZ

System (LaserJet)

LaserJet internal system error.

Print bar (PageWide)

PageWide print system error.

63.WX.YZ

Engine (LaserJet)

General engine error (electrical, communication, etc.).

65.WX.YZ

Connector

Output accessory connection error.

66.WX.YZ

Output accessory

Output accessory error.

67.WX.YZ

Input accessory

Input accessory connection error.

69.WX.YZ

Duplexer

Duplexer error.

70.WX.YZ

DC controller (LaserJet)

DC controller firmware error.

80.WX.YZ

Managed device

Embedded Jetdirect error.


ENWW

Table 2-33 Error codes: The first two characters (continued) Error code

System component


81.WX.YZ

Near Field Communication (NFC)

Wireless, Bluetooth or internal EIO error.

82.WX.YZ

Memory (hard disk, EMMC, etc.)

Disk hardware error.

90.WX.YZ

Internal diagnostics

Internal test of systems (i.e. disk, B, display) or interconnection error.

98.WX.YZ

Hard disk

Hard disk partition error.

99.WX.YZ

Firmware installer

Remote Firmware Upgrade (RFU), firmware install (engine or accessory), or disk error

How to search for printer documentation Find printer documentation using the internal HP portals. The MD, error codes, and other documentation for each printer is found on the internal HP portals GCSN and WISE (formerly SAW). GCSN is available to HP channel partners and WISE is available to call agents, service technicians, and other HP internal s. The level of detail available will depend on your access credentials. How to search WISE for printer documentation These instructions are for HP internal use by call agents, service technicians, and other internal s. View a video of how to find content in WISE. To view a list of control message documents per printer in WISE, enter document ID c05048451, to locate MD list. Go to WISE and enter this document ID c05791539 for written instructions. How to search GCSN for printer documentation These instructions are for internal use by HP Channel Partners. View a video of how find content in GCSN, or follow the steps below. 1.

ENWW

On the Home screen in GCSN, open Technical information using one of the following two methods: –

Type TINF in the Speedcode field found in the upper right corner and press Enter, or

–

On the Home page, click Technical information in the left pane.


Figure 2-81 GCSN home page

2.

Under Product Search, select the Type, Category, Family, and Series that match your product model (leave the Model field as blank or the default). NOTE: Make sure to to GCSN using your service-qualified credentials to access the most comprehensive content list available. To find out how to become service-qualified, your HP representative. Figure 2-82 Sample product search criteria (GCSN)


ENWW

3.

Click Add Favorites and then click Add to add the printer to your Favorites list and allow you to by the Product Search fields next time for that particular model (optional). Figure 2-83 Add favorites (GCSN)

4.

Clear all of the high-level check boxes. Figure 2-84 Clear search criteria (GCSN)

5.

Select the check boxes for the document types for which you want to search. NOTE: Select only the high-level Manuals and Guides search option if you are not sure in which type of manual or guide the content might be listed. Figure 2-85 Select search criteria (GCSN)

ENWW

6.

Select Submit.

7.

–

If needed, click Back To selection Criteria and narrow your search (the maximum allowed search result is 100 documents).


NOTE: Do not select the Top Issue option unless you only want to view top issues for that model. All other available content is filtered out. Table 2-34 Information type selections Technical information type

Select this checkbox

Control message document (MD)

MD-Map

List of all MDs per product

Information

Installation Guide or Hardware Install Guide

Maintenance/Service Guide or Install Guide

Service cost document

Install Guide or Service Guide/Manual

Service guide or Service manual

Service Guide/Manual

Self-solve or troubleshooting document

Information

manual or guide

Guide

Warranty and Legal Guide

Warranty Statement


ENWW

Resolve print-quality problems Use the information below to troubleshoot print-quality problems, including issues with image quality and color quality. ●

Introduction

●

Resolving print quality problems

Introduction Use the information below to troubleshoot print-quality problems, including issues with image quality. The troubleshooting steps can help resolve the following defects:

ENWW

●

Blank pages

●

Black pages

●

Curled paper

●

Dark or light bands

●

Dark or light streaks

●

Fuzzy print

●

Gray background or dark print

●

Light print

●

Loose toner

●

Missing toner

●

Scattered dots of toner

●

Skewed images

●

Smears

●

Streaks

Resolve print-quality problems 295

Resolving print quality problems To resolve print-quality issues, try these steps in the order presented. ●

Print from a different software program

●

Check the paper-type setting for the print job

●

Check toner-cartridge status

●

Print a cleaning page

●

Visually inspect the toner cartridge or cartridges

●

Check paper and the printing environment

●

Try a different print driver

●

Troubleshoot image defects

To troubleshoot specific image defects, see Troubleshoot Image Defects.

Print from a different software program Try printing from a different software program. If the page prints correctly, the problem is with the software program from which you were printing.


ENWW

Check the paper-type setting for the print job Check the paper type setting when printing from a software program and the printed pages have smears, fuzzy or dark print, curled paper, scattered dots of toner, loose toner, or small areas of missing toner. ●

Check the paper type setting on the printer

●

Check the paper type setting (Windows)

●

Check the paper type setting (macOS)

Check the paper type setting on the printer Check the paper type setting on the printer control , and change the setting as needed. 1.

Open the tray.

2.

that the tray is loaded with the correct type of paper.

3.

Close the tray.

4.

Follow the control instructions to confirm or modify the paper type settings for the tray.

Check the paper type setting (Windows) Check the paper type setting for Windows, and change the setting as needed. 1.

From the software program, select the Print option.

2.

Select the printer, and then click the Properties or Preferences button.

3.

Click the Paper/Quality tab.

4.

From the Paper Type drop-down list, click the More... option.

5.

Expand the list of Type is: options.

6.

Expand the category of paper types that best describes your paper.

7.

Select the option for the type of paper you are using, and click the OK button.

8.

Click the OK button to close the Document Properties dialog box. In the Print dialog box, click the OK button to print the job.

Check the paper type setting (macOS) Check the paper type setting for macOS, and change the setting as needed.

ENWW

1.

Click the File menu, and then click the Print option.

2.

In the Printer menu, select the printer.

3.

Click Show Details or Copies & Pages.

4.

Open the menus drop-down list, and then click the Paper/Quality menu.

5.

Select a type from the Media Type drop-down list.

6.

Click the Print button.


Check toner-cartridge status Follow these steps to check the estimated life remaining in the toner cartridges and if applicable, the status of other replaceable maintenance parts. ●

Step one: Print the Supplies Status Page

●

Step two: Check supplies status

Step one: Print the Supplies Status Page The supplies status page indicates the cartridge status. 1.

From the Home screen on the printer control , select the Reports menu.

2.

Select the Configuration/Status Pages menu.

3.

Select Supplies Status Page, and then select Print to print the page.

Step two: Check supplies status Check the supplies status report as follows. 1.

Look at the supplies status report to check the percent of life remaining for the toner cartridges and, if applicable, the status of other replaceable maintenance parts. Print quality problems can occur when using a toner cartridge that is at its estimated end of life. The supplies status page indicates when a supply level is very low. After an HP supply has reached the very low threshold, HP’s protection warranty on that supply has ended. The toner cartridge does not need to be replaced now unless the print quality is no longer acceptable. Consider having a replacement available to install when print quality is no longer acceptable. If you determine that you need to replace a toner cartridge or other replaceable maintenance parts, the supplies status page lists the genuine HP part numbers.

2.

Check to see if you are using a genuine HP cartridge. A genuine HP toner cartridge has the word “HP” on it, or has the HP logo on it. For more information on identifying HP cartridges go to www.hp.com/go/learnaboutsupplies.

Print a cleaning page During the printing process paper, toner, and dust particles can accumulate inside the printer and can cause print-quality issues such as toner specks or spatter, smears, streaks, lines, or repeating marks. Follow these steps to clean the printer paper path: 1.

From the Home screen on the printer control , select the Tools menu.

2.

Select the following menus:


ENWW

3.

a.

Maintenance

b.

Calibration/Cleaning

c.

Cleaning Page

Select Print to print the page. A Cleaning... message displays on the printer control . The cleaning process takes a few minutes to complete. Do not turn the printer off until the cleaning process has finished. When it is finished, discard the printed page.

Visually inspect the toner cartridge or cartridges Follow these steps to inspect each toner cartridge: 1.

Remove the toner cartridge from the printer, and that the sealing tape has been removed.

2.

Check the memory chip for damage.

3.

Examine the surface of the green imaging drum. CAUTION: Do not touch the imaging drum. Fingerprints on the imaging drum can cause print-quality problems.

ENWW

4.

If you see any scratches, fingerprints, or other damage on the imaging drum, replace the toner cartridge.

5.

Reinstall the toner cartridge and print a few pages to see if the problem has resolved.


Check paper and the printing environment Use the following informtion to check the paper selection and the printing environment. ●

Step one: Use paper that meets HP specifications

●

Step two: Check the environment

●

Step three: Set the individual tray alignment

Step one: Use paper that meets HP specifications Some print-quality problems arise from using paper that does not meet HP specifications. ●

Always use a paper type and weight that this printer s.

●

Use paper that is of good quality and free of cuts, nicks, tears, spots, loose particles, dust, wrinkles, voids, staples, and curled or bent edges.

●

Use paper that has not been previously printed on.

●

Use paper that does not contain metallic material, such as glitter.

●

Use paper that is designed for use in laser printers. Do not use paper that is designed only for use in Inkjet printers.

●

Use paper that is not too rough. Using smoother paper generally results in better print quality.

Step two: Check the environment The environment can directly affect print quality and is a common cause of print-quality or paper-feeding issues. Try the following solutions: ●

Move the printer away from drafty locations, such as open windows or doors, or air-conditioning vents.

●

Make sure the printer is not exposed to temperatures or humidity outside of printer specifications.

●

Do not place the printer in a confined space, such as a cabinet.

●

Place the printer on a sturdy, level surface.

●

Remove anything that is blocking the vents on the printer. The printer requires good air flow on all sides, including the top.

●

Protect the printer from airborne debris, dust, steam, grease, or other elements that can leave residue inside the printer.

Step three: Set the individual tray alignment Follow these steps when text or images are not centered or aligned correctly on the printed page when printing from specific trays. 1.

From the Home screen on the printer control , select the Settings menu.

2.

Select the following menus:


ENWW

a.

Copy/Print or Print

b.

Print Quality

c.

Image Registration

3.

Select Tray, and then select the tray to adjust.

4.

Select Print Test Page, and then follow the instructions on the printed pages.

5.

Select Print Test Page again to the results, and then make further adjustments if necessary.

6.

Select Done to save the new settings.

Try a different print driver Try a different print driver when printing from a software program and the printed pages have unexpected lines in graphics, missing text, missing graphics, incorrect formatting, or substituted fonts. any of the following drivers from the HP Web site: http://www.hp.com//ljM501 or http://www.hp.com//ljM506 or http://www.hp.com//ljE50045 or http://www.hp.com// ljM507 or http://www.hp.com//ljE50145 or http://www.hp.com//ljM527mfp or http://www.hp.com//ljE52545mfp or http://www.hp.com//ljM528mfp or http://www.hp.com/ /E52645mfp. Table 2-35 Print drivers Driver

Description

HP PCL.6 driver

If available, this printer-specific print driver s older operating systems like Windows XP and Windows Vista. For a list of ed operating systems, go to www.hp.com/go/ .

HP PCL 6 driver

This printer-specific print driver s Windows 7 and newer operating systems that version 3 drivers. For a list of ed operating systems, go to www.hp.com/go/ .

HP PCL-6 driver

This product-specific print driver s Windows 8 and newer operating systems that version 4 drivers. For a list of ed operating systems, go to www.hp.com/go/ .

HP UPD PS driver

●

Recommended for printing with Adobe software programs or with other highly graphics-intensive software programs

●

Provides for printing from Postscript emulation needs, or for Postscript flash font

●

Recommended for printing in all Windows environments

●

Provides the overall best speed, print quality, and printer feature for most s

●

Developed to align with Windows Graphic Device Interface (GDI) for best speed in Windows environments

●

Might not be fully compatible with third-party and custom software programs that are based on PCL 5

HP UPD PCL 6

Troubleshoot image defects Review examples of image defects and steps to resolve these defects.

ENWW


Table 2-36 Image defects table quick reference Sample

Description

Possible solutions

Table 2-43 Light print on page 307

Table 2-41 Gray background or dark print on page 306

Table 2-39 Blank page — No print on page 304

Table 2-38 Black page on page 304

Table 2-37 Banding defects on page 303

Table 2-45 Streak defects on page 309

Table 2-40 Fixing/f defects on page 305

Table 2-42 Image placement defects on page 306

Table 2-44 Output defects on page 308


ENWW

Image defects, no matter the cause, can often be resolved using the same steps. Use the following steps as a starting point for solving image defect issues. 1.

Reprint the document. Print quality defects can be intermittent in nature or can go away completely with continued printing.

2.

Check the condition of the cartridge or cartridges. If a cartridge is in a Very Low state (it has ed the rated life), replace the cartridge.

3.

Make sure that the driver and tray print mode settings match the media that is loaded in the tray. Try using a different ream of media or a different tray. Try using a different print mode.

4.

Make sure that the printer is within the ed operating temperature/humidity range.

5.

Make sure that the paper type, size, and weight are ed by the printer. See .hp.com for a list of the ed paper sizes and types for the printer.

NOTE:

The term “fusing” refers to the part of the printing process where toner is affixed to paper.

The following examples depict letter-size paper that has ed through the printer short edge first. Table 2-37 Banding defects Sample

Description Dark or light lines which repeat down the length of the page, and are wide-pitch and/or impulse bands. They might be sharp or soft in nature. The defect displays only in areas of fill, not in text or sections with no printed content.

ENWW

Possible solutions 1.

Reprint the document.

2.

Try printing from another tray.

3.

Replace the cartridge.

4.

Use a different paper type.

5.

Enterprise models only: From the Home screen on the printer control , go to the Adjust Paper Types menu, and then choose a print mode that is designed for a slightly heavier media than what you are using. This slows the print speed and might improve the print quality.

6.

If the issue persists, go to .hp.com.


Table 2-38 Black page Sample

Description The entire printed page is black.


Visually inspect the cartridge to check for damage.

2.

Make sure that the cartridge is installed correctly.

3.


4.


Table 2-39 Blank page — No print Sample


Description

Possible solutions

The page is completely blank and contains no printed content.

1.

Make sure that the cartridges are genuine HP cartridges.

2.


3.

Print with a different cartridge.

4.

Check the paper type in the paper tray and adjust the printer settings to match. If necessary, select a lighter paper type.

5.


ENWW

Table 2-40 Fixing/f defects Sample

Description

Possible solutions

Slight shadows or offsets of the image are repeated down the page. The repeated image might fade with each recurrence.

1.


2.


3.


1.


2.

Check the paper type in the paper tray and adjust the printer settings to match. If necessary, select a heavier paper type.

3.

Enterprise models only: From the printer control , go to the Edgeto-Edge menu and then select Normal. Reprint the document.

4.

Enterprise models only: From the printer control , select Auto Include Margins and then reprint the document.

5.


Toner rubs off along either edge of the page. This defect is more common at the edges of high-coverage jobs, and on light media types, but can occur anywhere on the page.

ENWW


Table 2-41 Gray background or dark print Sample

Description

Possible solutions

The image or text is darker than expected and/or the background is gray.

1.

Make sure that the paper in the trays has not already been run through the printer.

2.


3.


4.

Mono models only: From the Home screen on the printer control , go to the Adjust Toner Density menu, and then adjust the toner density to a lower level.

5.

Make sure that the printer is within the ed operating temperature and humidity range.

6.


7.


Table 2-42 Image placement defects Sample

Description The image is not centered, or is skewed on the page. The defect occurs when the paper is not positioned properly as it is pulled from the tray and moves through the paper path.




2.

Remove the paper and then reload the tray. Make sure that all the paper edges are even on all sides.

3.

Make sure that the top of the paper stack is below the tray-full indicator. Do not overfill the tray.

4.

Make sure that the paper guides are adjusted to the correct size for the paper. Do not adjust the paper guides tightly against the paper stack. Adjust them to the indentations or markings in the tray.

5.


ENWW

Table 2-43 Light print Sample

ENWW

Description

Possible solutions

The printed content is light or faded on the entire page.

1.


2.

Remove the cartridge, and then shake it to redistribute the toner.

3.

Mono models only: Make sure that the EconoMode setting is disabled, both at the printer control and in the print driver.

4.


5.

Print a Supplies Status Page and check the life and usage of the cartridge.

6.


7.



Table 2-44 Output defects Sample

Description

Possible solutions

Printed pages have curled edges. The curled edge can be along the short or long side of the paper. Two types of curl are possible:

1.


2.

Positive curl: From the printer control , select a heavier paper type. The heavier paper type creates a higher temperature for printing.

●

Positive curl: The paper curls toward the printed side. The defect occurs in dry environments or when printing high-coverage pages.

●

Negative curl: The paper curls away from the printed side. The defect occurs in high-humidity environments or when printing low-coverage pages.

The paper does not stack well in the output tray. The stack might be uneven, skewed, or the pages might be pushed out of the tray and onto the floor. Any of the following conditions can cause this defect:


Negative curl: From the printer control , select a lighter paper type. The lighter paper type creates a lower temperature for printing. Try storing the paper in a dry environment prior to use, or use freshly opened paper. 3.

Print in duplex mode.

4.


1.


2.

Extend the output bin extension.

3.

If the defect is caused by extreme paper curl, refer to the troubleshooting steps for "Output curl."

●

Extreme paper curl

●

The paper in the tray is wrinkled or deformed

4.


●

The paper is a non-standard paper type, such as envelopes

5.

Use freshly opened paper.

●

The output tray is too full

6.

Remove the paper from the output tray before the tray gets too full.

7.


ENWW

Table 2-45 Streak defects Sample

Description Light vertical streaks that usually span the length of the page. The defect displays only in areas of fill, not in text or sections with no printed content.



2.


3.


NOTE: Both light and dark vertical streaks can occur when the printing environment is outside the specified range for temperature or humidity. Refer to your printer's environmental specifications for allowable temperature and humidity levels. Dark vertical lines which occur down the length of the page. The defect might occur anywhere on the page, in areas of fill or in sections with no printed content.

ENWW

1.


2.


3.

Print a cleaning page.

4.

Check the toner level in the cartridge.

5.



Print quality troubleshooting guide Review the following information about print quality troubleshooting. ●

Image defects table

●

Product specific image defects

Image defects table Image defects, no matter what their cause, can often be resolved using the same steps. Use the following steps as a starting point for solving image defect issues. 1.

Reprint the document. Print quality defects can be intermittent in nature or can go away completely with continued printing.

2.

Check the condition of your cartridge(s). If it is in a Very Low state (it has ed the rated life), replace your cartridge(s).

3.

Check that the driver/tray print mode settings match the media that is loaded in a given tray. Try using a different ream of media or a different tray. Try using a different print mode.

4.

that your printer is in within its ed operating temperature/humidity range.

5.

the paper type, size and weight are ed by the printer. See the printer page at www.hp.com/ for a list of the ed paper sizes and types for your printer.

NOTE: The term “fusing” refers to the part of the printing process where toner is affixed to paper. The following examples depict letter-size paper that has ed through the printer short-edge first. Table 2-46 Image defect examples Description

Sample

Possible solutions

Banding Repetitive wide-pitch banding and impulse bands: Dark or light lines which repeat down the length of the page. They might be sharp or soft in nature. The defect displays only in areas of fill, not in text or sections with no printed content.

1.


2.

Try printing from another tray.

3.


4.


5.

Enterprise models only: From the Home screen on the printer control , go to the Adjust Paper Types menu, and then choose a print mode that is designed for a slightly heavier media than what you are using. This slows the print speed and might improve the print quality.

6.

If the problem persists, go to www.hp.com/.

Streaks


ENWW

Table 2-46 Image defect examples (continued) Description Light vertical streaks: Light streaks that usually span the length of the page. The defect displays only in areas of fill, not in text or sections with no printed content.

Sample



2.


3.


Both light and dark vertical streaks can occur when the printing environment is outside the specified range for temperature or humidity. Refer to your printer's environmental specifications for allowable temperature and humidity levels. Dark vertical streaks and ITB cleaning streaks (color models only): Dark lines which occur down the length of the page. The defect might occur anywhere on the page, in areas of fill or in sections with no printed content.

1.


2.


3.

Print a cleaning page.

4.

Check the toner level in the toner cartridge(s).

5.


1.


2.


3.


Fixing/f Hot f offset (shadow): Slight shadows, or offsets, of the image repeated down the page. The repeated image might fade with each recurrence.

ENWW

Print quality troubleshooting guide 311

Table 2-46 Image defect examples (continued) Description Poor fusing: Toner rubs off along either edge of page. This defect is more common at the edges of high-coverage jobs and on light media types but can occur anywhere on the page.

Sample



2.

Check the paper type in the paper tray and adjust the printer settings to match. If necessary, select a heavier paper type.

3.

Enterprise models only: From the printer control , go to the Edgeto-Edge menu and then select Normal. Reprint the document.

4.

Enterprise models only: From the printer control , select Auto Include Margins and then reprint the document.

5.


Margins and skew

1.


The image is not centered, or is skewed on the page. The defect occurs when the paper is not positioned properly as it is pulled from the tray and moves through the paper path.

2.

Remove the paper and then reload the tray. Make sure that all the paper edges are even on all sides.

3.

Make sure that the top of the paper stack is below the tray full indicator. Do not overfill the tray.

4.

Make sure that the paper guides are adjusted to the correct size for the paper. Do not adjust the paper guides tightly against the paper stack. Adjust them to the indentations or markings in the tray.

5.


Color plane registrations (color models only)

1.


One or more color of the planes is not aligned with the other color planes. The primary error will typically occur with yellow.

2.

From the printer control , calibrate the printer.

3.

If a cartridge has reached a Very Low state or the printed output is severely faded, replace the cartridge.

4.

From the printer control use the Restore Calibration feature to reset the printer's calibration settings to the factory defaults.

5.


Image placement

Color plane registrations

Output


ENWW

Table 2-46 Image defect examples (continued) Description

Possible solutions

Output curl

1.


Printed paper has curled edges. The curled edge can be along the short or long side of the paper. Two types of curl are possible:

2.

Positive curl: From the printer control , select a heavier paper type. The heavier paper type creates a higher temperature for printing.

●

●

ENWW

Sample

Positive curl: The paper curls toward the printed side. The defect occurs in dry environments or when printing high coverage pages. Negative curl: The paper curls away from the printed side. The defect occurs in high-humidity environments or when printing low coverage pages.

Negative curl: From the printer control , select a lighter paper type. The lighter paper type creates a lower temperature for printing. Try storing the paper in a dry environment prior or use freshly opened paper. 3.

Print in duplex mode.

4.


Output stacking

1.


The paper does not stack well in the output tray. The stack might be uneven, skewed, or the pages might be pushed out of the tray and onto the floor. Any of the following conditions can cause this defect:

2.

Flip out the output bin extension.

3.

If the defect is caused by extreme paper curl, complete the troubleshooting steps for Output curl.

●

Extreme paper curl

4.


●

The paper in the tray is wrinkled or deformed

5.

Use freshly opened paper.

6.

●

The paper is a non-standard paper type, such as envelopes

Remove the paper from the output tray before the tray gets too full.

7.

●

The output tray is too full



Product specific image defects Review the following information about product specific image defects. ●

Repetitive image defect ruler

●

Print-quality troubleshooting


ENWW

Repetitive image defect ruler Review the following information about a repetitive image defect ruler. ●

Use a ruler to measure between repetitive defects

When troubleshooting the source of some print image defects, one solution is to identify if it is a repetitive defect (does the print quality defect appear multiple times on the printed page?). If this is the case, use a ruler to measure occurrences of repetitive image defects to help solve image-quality problems. For more information, see Use a ruler to measure between repetitive defects on page 316. Use a ruler to measure occurrences of repetitive image defects to help solve image-quality problems. Place the ruler next to the first occurrence of the defect on the page. Find the distance between identical defects and use the table below to identify the component that is causing the defect. IMPORTANT: Do not use solvents or oils to clean rollers. Instead, rub the roller with a lint-free cloth. If dirt is difficult to remove, rub the roller with a lint-free cloth that has been dampened with water. NOTE: Defects on the tray pickup rollers or the Tray 1 pickup roller do not cause a repetitive defect. Defects on these rollers cause a defect to appear only on the leading edge of the image. TIP: To make a printer specific repetitive defect ruler, use a metric ruler to transfer the measurements in Table 2-47 Repetitive defects on page 315 to a transparency or the edge of a piece of paper—clearly label each ruler mark with the associated defective assembly. Table 2-47 Repetitive defects Assembly

Distance between defects

Developer roller (toner cartridge)1

27.8 mm (1.09 in)

Charge roller (toner cartridge)

28.3 mm (1.11 in)

Face down roller

36.9 mm (1.45 in)

Transfer roller

39 mm (1.53 in)

Duplex feed roller

40.3 mm (1.58 in)

Registration roller

43.3 mm (1.70 in)

1

Middle feed roller (cassette) Middle feed roller (optional input feeder) Switchback roller

43.4 mm (1.70 in)

Feed roller cassette)

47.4 mm (1.87 in)

Feed roller (optional input feeder) Pick roller (cassette)

49.7 mm (1.95 in)

Pickup roller (optional input feeder) Pressure roller2 (f)

63.5 mm (2.50 in)

Photosensitive drum1 (OPC drum; toner cartridge)

75.4 mm (2.96 in)

F sleeve2 (f)

ENWW


Table 2-47 Repetitive defects (continued) Assembly

Distance between defects

Pick roller (Tray 1)

78.7 mm (3.09 in)

1

2

The primary charging roller and photosensitive drum cannot be cleaned because they are internal assemblies in the toner cartridge. If one of these assemblies is causing the defect, replace the toner cartridge. The primary f sleeve unit or pressure roller cannot be cleaned because they are internal assemblies in the f. If one of these assemblies is causing the defect, replace the f.

Use a ruler to measure between repetitive defects The figures in this section show color repetitive defect pages. However, the process for measuring repetitive defects is valid for mono pages. 1.

Identify a repetitive defect on the page. TIP:

Print a cleaning page to see if that resolves the defect.

NOTE:

These are examples only, other types of repetitive defects might appear on a page.

●

Lines (callout 1)

●

Smudges (callout 2)

●

Dots or spots (callout 3)


ENWW

Figure 2-86 Examples of repetitive defects

1

2

3

ENWW


2.

Position a metric ruler on the page with the “zero” ruler mark at one occurrence of the defect (callout 1). Figure 2-87 Place the ruler on the page

1

3.

Locate the next occurrence of the defect (callout 1). Figure 2-88 Locate the next repetitive defect

1


ENWW

4.

Measure the distance (in millimeters) between the two occurrences (callout 1), and then use the Repetitive defects table to determine the defective assembly. TIP: Always measure from and to the same point on the defects. For example, if the ruler is “zeroed” at the top edge of a defect, measure to the top edge of the next occurrence of that defect. Figure 2-89 Determine the defective assembly

1

ENWW


Print-quality troubleshooting Review the folloiwng information about print-quality troubleshooting. ●

Image defect events

●

Image defect (developmental) events

●

Other events

NOTE: The image defects described in this section are printer-specific image defects.


ENWW

Image defect events Review the following information about image defect events. ●

Graininess

●

Streaks

●

Banding

NOTE: The image defects described in this section are defects that occurred during development and that could not be fully eliminated. Customers might observe these defects.

ENWW


Graininess Review the following information about graininess image defect events. ●

Graininess/fixing mottle


ENWW

Graininess/fixing mottle Review the following information about the graininess/fixing mottle image defect event. ●

Description of the defect

●

Conditions that can cause the defect

●

Solutions for the defect

●

Parts related to the defect

Figure 2-90 Graininess/fixing mottle

Description of the defect This defect is large areas of fill that appear blotchy, grainy, non-uniform, or mottled (marked with spots or smears of color). The graininess/fixing mottle defect is caused by how the toner (dot) is pressed or melted and the severity of the defect depends on the paper roughness. This leads to the density variance or uneven gloss. Graininess/fixing mottle is caused by inconsistently melted toner. Conditions that can cause the defect The defect appears in large areas of fill and is more severe in low temperature and humidity environments. Solutions for the defect Use the following steps to solve the defect. ●

ENWW

M501: From the printer control , change the print mode from plain to intermediate (this slows the print speed).


1.

Open the following menus: ○

Setup

○

System Setup

○

Paper Setup

○

Tray <X> NOTE:

○ 2. ●

Paper Type

Select Intermediate 85–95g.

M506/E50045 and M527/E52545: From the printer control , change the print mode from plain to intermediate (this slows the print speed). 1.

2. ●


Trays

○

Tray

○

Modify




Trays

○

Tray <X> NOTE:

○ 2. ●

Select the tray you want to configure.


Type


Try using a smoother paper.

Parts related to the defect The following item(s) might need to be repaired or replaced to prevent this defect form occurring. ●

Media

●

Toner cartridge

●

F


ENWW

Streaks Review the following information about streak image defect events. ●

ENWW

Vertical streaks - high temperature/humidity


Vertical streaks - high temperature/humidity Review the following information about the vertical streaks - high temperature/humidity image defect event. ●


●


●


●


Figure 2-91 Vertical streaks - high temperature/humidity

Description of the defect Light streaks can appear and they usually span the length of the page. This problem is caused by toner clumping at the developer blade which reduces the amount of toner available for transfer at that page location. There is a stirring shaft inside the toner cartridge to reduce the severity of this defect. This defect appears in areas of fill, not in text.


ENWW

Conditions that can cause the defect This defect primarily occurs in high temperature and high humidity environments. Solutions for the defect Use the following steps to solve the defect. ●

Resend the print job.

●

If the defect does not improve within two to three print jobs, remove the toner cartridge and gently rock it back and forth from side to side (this distributes the toner evenly in the toner cartridge).

●

If the toner cartridge has reached the Very Low state, replace it.

●

If the defect persists, replace the toner cartridge.


ENWW

Toner cartridge


Banding Review the following information about banding image defect events. ●

Dark streaks (early in toner cartridge life)

●

Fine-pitch banding

●

Wide-pitch banding 27.8 mm1.09 in

●

AC banding 4.6 mm0.18 in

●

OPC sharp bands at 75mm2.95 in pitch (version 1)

●

OPC sharp bands at 75 mm2.95 in pitch (version 2)

●

Impulse band 49-50 mm1.92-1.96 in from the leading edge

●

Impulse band 75-82 mm2.95-3.22 in from the trailing edge

●

Impulse band 102 mm4.01 in from the trailing edge


ENWW

Dark streaks (early in toner cartridge life) Review the following information about the dark streaks early in toner cartridge life image defect event. ●


●


●


●


Figure 2-92 Dark streaks (early in toner cartridge life)

Description of the defect Smeared dark streaks come and go down the page, and are more common at the right and left edges of the page.

ENWW


This issue is caused by grease from toner cartridge stirring system contaminating the supply hopper which then causes the toner to cluster and results in dark streaks on the page. Countermeasures include optimizing grease: amount, position, and stickiness. This defect appears in areas of fill, not in text. Conditions that can cause the defect This defect occurs when using a new toner cartridge and usually decreases over toner cartridge life. Solutions for the defect Use the following steps to solve the defect. ●


●


●



Toner cartridge


ENWW

Fine-pitch banding Review the following information about the fine-pitch banding image defect event. ●


●


●


●


Figure 2-93 Fine-pitch banding

Description of the defect This defect appears as alternating light and dark (evenly spaced) repetitive horizontal lines. The 0.93 mm (0.03 in) fine-pitch banding is caused by the main drive motor gear tooth engagement. This defect appears in areas of fill, not in text.

ENWW


Conditions that can cause the defect The alignment of the motor gear and drum drive gear is the important factor for this banding and specifically the accuracy of the motor installed surface and accuracy of the bearing shaft position at the both sides of the drum drive gear shaft. Solutions for the defect Use the following steps to solve the defect. ●

Try using a smoother paper.

●

M501: From the printer control , change the print mode from plain to intermediate (this slows the print speed). 1.


Setup

○

System Setup

○

Paper Setup

○

Tray <X> NOTE:

○ 2. ●

Paper Type



2. ●



Trays

○

Tray

○

Modify

○

Next




Trays

○

Tray <X> NOTE:

○ 2.


Type



ENWW

Parts related to the defect The following item(s) might need to be repaired or replaced to prevent this defect form occurring.

ENWW

●

Toner cartridge

●

Printer engine (whole unit replacement)


Wide-pitch banding 27.8 mm (1.09 in) Review the following information about the wide-pitch banding (27.8 mm (1.09 in)) image defect event. ●


●


●


●


Figure 2-94 Wide-pitch banding

27.8 mm (1.09 in)

Description of the defect This defect appears as soft, gradual bands can be seen over a constant density area. It appears as slight gradients which repeat at approximately a 27.8 mm (1.09 in) pitch. This defect appears in areas of fill, not in text.


ENWW

Conditions that can cause the defect This defect is a density variation which appears on the PQ due to the gap variation between the OPC and the developer sleeve. This gap varies due to the accuracy of the OPC, developer sleeve, and the spacer placed between the OPC and the developer sleeve. Solutions for the defect Use the following steps to solve the defect. ●


●



ENWW

Toner cartridge


AC banding 4.6 mm (0.18 in) Revew the following information about the AC banding (4.6 mm (0.18 in)) image defect event. ●


●


●


●


Figure 2-95 AC banding

Description of the defect This defect appears as alternating light and dark bands that repeat at 4.6 mm (0.18 in) pitch might be visible starting midway down the page in high-temperature and high-humidity environments.


ENWW

This defect is caused by the transfer current getting pulled into the fusing area through the paper from the f heater voltage supply. The transfer banding occurs at the power supply voltage frequency. A capacitor was added to the transfer front guide to improve the level as a countermeasure during development. Conditions that can cause the defect This defect usually occurs when printing in Plain print mode in high-humidity environments on fully acclimated (low resistivity) paper, which makes the transfer current flow to the fusing area more easily. The defect occurs more often with 220V units, which have higher impressed voltage to the f heater. This defect appears in areas of fill, not in text. Solutions for the defect Use the following steps to solve the defect. ●

Try printing the job on a newly opened supply of paper.

●

Cool the printer environment, and then resend the print job.

●



Setup

○

System Setup

○

Paper Setup

○

Tray <X> NOTE:

○ 2. ●

2.



Trays

○

Tray

○

Modify

○

Next



ENWW

Paper Type


●




○

Trays

○

Tray <X> NOTE:

○ 2.


Type



Media

●

F


ENWW

OPC sharp bands at 75mm (2.95 in) pitch (version 1) Review the following information about the OPC sharp bands at 75mm (2.95 in) pitch (version 1) image defect event. ●


●


●


●


Figure 2-96 OPC sharp bands (version 1)

Description of the defect This defect appears as sharp bands which repeat at a 75mm (2.95 in) pitch down the page as a light/dark line. Waste products (for example, toner or paper) accumulate at the position between the C-blade and the OPC. When the OPC stops, the waste material can form a light attachment to the OPC. When the OPC begins to

ENWW


turn again, the material removal can affect the OPC charge for several rotations. This defect appears in areas of fill, not in text. NOTE: This defect is also called C-blade blur and is common to many color and mono products. This defect looks similar to OPC sharp bands version 2, but appears to be light/dark. Conditions that can cause the defect This defect might occur any time the toner cartridge is idle for long periods of time. Solutions for the defect Use the following steps to solve the defect. ●

Resend the print job. The defect should fade with subsequent printed pages.

●

If the defect persists, replace the toner cartridge


Toner cartridge


ENWW

OPC sharp bands at 75 mm (2.95 in) pitch (version 2) Review the following information about the OPC sharp bands at 75mm (2.95 in) pitch (version 2) image defect event. ●


●


●


●


Figure 2-97 OPC sharp bands (version 2)

Description of the defect This defect appears as sharp bands which repeat at a 75 mm (2.95 in) pitch down the page as a dark line. The OPC drum is rubbed by the cleaning blade or charge roller due to vibration or impact. The rubbing effects the OPC charge but the defect fades with usage and time. This defect appears in areas of fill, not in text.

ENWW


NOTE: This defect looks similar to OPC sharp bands version 1, but appears to be dark. Conditions that can cause the defect This defect can occur at the beginning of toner cartridge use, or if the cartridge is subject to vibration (for example, transportation). Solutions for the defect Use the following steps to solve the defect. ●

Resend the print job. The defect should fade with subsequent printed pages.

●

If the defect persists, replace the toner cartridge


Toner cartridge


ENWW

Impulse band 49-50 mm (1.92-1.96 in) from the leading edge Review the following information about the impulse band 49-50 mm (1.92-1.96 in) from the leading edge image defect event. ●


●


●


●


Figure 2-98 Impulse band (leading edge)

Description of the defect This defect appears as a dark and usually sharp band and occurs 49-50 mm (1.92-1.96 in) from the leading edge of the page. This impulse band is caused by the trailing edge of the previous page touching the OPC as it leaves the transfer area, which causes a memory charge disturbance. This defect appears in areas of fill, not in text.

ENWW


Conditions that can cause the defect This defect only occurs during continuous printing, on the second and subsequent pages of a job. Solutions for the defect Use the following steps to solve the defect. ●

Resend the print job. Impulse bands can be variable.

●

M501: If the defect appears during continuous printing, from the printer control enable the Less Paper Curl print mode. NOTE: This mode adds a rotation of the OPC drum to the inter-page gap timing that conditions the drum and minimizes the defect. 1.

2. ●


Setup

○

Service

○

Less Paper Curl

Select On.

M506/E50045 and M527/E52545: From the printer control , change the print mode to Paper Curl Mode. NOTE: This mode adds a rotation of the OPC drum to the inter-page gap timing that conditions the drum and minimizes the defect. 1.

2. ●


istration

○

General Settings

○

Print Quality

○

Adjust Paper Types

Select Paper Curl Mode.

M507/E50145 and M528/E52645: change the print mode to Paper Curl Mode. NOTE: This mode adds a rotation of the OPC drum to the inter-page gap timing that conditions the drum and minimizes the defect. 1.


Settings

○

Copy/Print


ENWW

○

Print Quality

○

Adjust Paper Types

2.

Select the appropriate paper type for the paper used.

3.



ENWW

●

Media

●

Toner cartridge


Impulse band 75-82 mm (2.95-3.22 in) from the trailing edge Review the following information about the impulse band 75-82 mm (2.95-3.22 in) from the trailing edge image defect event. ●


●


●


●


Figure 2-99 Impulse band (trailing edge)

Description of the defect This defect appears as a dark band and occurs 75-82 mm (2.95-3.22 in) from the trailing edge of the page. This impulse band is a development blur which occurs when the paper trailing edge goes through the registration roller. This defect appears in areas of fill, not in text.


ENWW

Conditions that can cause the defect During the print job, the transfer top guide might be vibrating. Solutions for the defect Use the following steps to solve the defect. ●


●



Setup

○

System Setup

○

Paper Setup

○

Tray <X> NOTE:

○ 2. ●

Paper Type



2. ●


Trays

○

Tray

○

Modify

○

Next




Trays

○

Tray <X> NOTE:

○ 2.

ENWW



Type




Media

●



ENWW

Impulse band 102 mm (4.01 in) from the trailing edge Review the following information about the impulse band 102 mm (4.01 in) from the trailing edge image defect event. ●


●


●


●


Figure 2-100 Impulse band (trailing edge)

102 mm (4.01 in)

Description of the defect This defect appears as a soft dark band and occurs 102 mm (4.01 in) from the trailing edge of the page. The cause of this defect is poor sliding performance of the transfer bearing (TR bearing) and transfer roller shaft.

ENWW


Conditions that can cause the defect This defect is more likely to occur in low temperature/low humidity environments and at cold start conditions. Solutions for the defect Use the following steps to solve the defect. ●


●

Try using a different media type.

●



Setup

○

System Setup

○

Paper Setup

○

Tray <X> NOTE:

○ 2. ●

Paper Type



2. ●



Trays

○

Tray

○

Modify

○

Next




Trays

○

Tray <X> NOTE:

○ 2.


Type



ENWW


ENWW

●

Media

●

Transfer roller


Image defect (developmental) events Review the following information about image defect (developmental) events. ●

Cleaning defect events

●

Part/assembly defect events

●

Transfer bias defect events

●

Toner leak defect events

●

Paper path impulse defect events

●

F/fixing defect events

●

Miscellaneous defect events

NOTE: The image defects described in this section are defects that occurred during printer development, and HP implemented a solution to eliminate them. Customers should not observe these defects. These defects are included for the unlikely event that they reoccur.


ENWW

Cleaning defect events Review the following information about cleaning image defect (developmental) events.

ENWW

●

Rain-toner attached to the OPC

●

Developer defect repeats at 27.8 mm1.09 in pitch

●

Random missing toner


Rain-toner attached to the OPC Review the following information about the rain-toner attached to the OPC cleaning defect event. ●


●


●


●


NOTE: This defect occurred at some point during printer development. HP has implemented a solution to the problem. This defect is included in the image defects section for the unlikely event that it reoccurs. Figure 2-101 Rain-toner attached to the OPC


ENWW

Description of the defect This defect appears as very small white voids which appear in solid black areas. This issue occurs when toner attached to the OPC cannot be removed by the cleaning blade. This defect appears in areas of solid fill, not in text. Conditions that can cause the defect This defect is likely to occur in the later stages of toner cartridge life. Solutions for the defect Use the following step to solve the defect. ●

that the toner is within the expected life. If not, replace the toner cartridge.


ENWW

Toner cartridge


Developer defect repeats at 27.8 mm (1.09 in) pitch Review the following information about the developer defect repeats at 27.8 mm (1.09 in) pitch cleaning defect event. ●


●


●


●


NOTE: This defect occurred at some point during printer development. HP has implemented a solution to the problem. This defect is included in the image defects section for the unlikely event that it reoccurs. Figure 2-102 Developer defect


ENWW

Description of the defect This defect appears as a soft white spot which repeats at 27.8 mm (1.09 in) (developer roller) pitch. This defect appears in areas of solid fill, not in text. Conditions that can cause the defect This defect is caused by a cartridge cleaning performance issue caused by contamination. Solutions for the defect Use the following steps to solve the defect. ●

Resend the print job (the defect should fade with subsequent printed pages).

●



ENWW

Toner cartridge


Random missing toner Review the following information about the random missing toner cleaning defect event. ●


●


●


●


NOTE: This defect occurred at some point during printer development. HP has implemented a solution to the problem. This defect is included in the image defects section for the unlikely event that it reoccurs. Figure 2-103 Random missing toner

Description of the defect This defect appears as white spots which appear in solid black areas (sometimes with a tail). This defect appears in areas of solid fill, not in text.


ENWW

Conditions that can cause the defect This defect is caused by contaminants attaching to the OPC. If the contaminant is large, the size of missing toner will be large. Solutions for the defect Use the following steps to solve the defect. ●

Resend the print job. This defect is highly variable.


ENWW

Toner cartridge


Part/assembly defect events Review the following information about part/assembly image defect (developmental) events. ●

OPC gear slip

●

OPC wide-pitch banding


ENWW

OPC gear slip Review the following information about the OPC gear slip part/assembly defect event. ●


●


●


●


NOTE: This defect occurred at some point during printer development. HP has implemented a solution to the problem. This defect is included in the image defects section for the unlikely event that it reoccurs. Figure 2-104 OPC gear slip

Description of the defect This defect appears as severe banding. This defect is caused by OPC gear slip (a failed connection between the OPC gear and the drum).

ENWW


Conditions that can cause the defect This defect is not dependent on environmental conditions. Solutions for the defect Use the following steps to solve the defect. ●


●



Toner cartridge


ENWW

OPC wide-pitch banding Review the following information about the OPC wide-pitch banding part/assembly defect event. ●


●


●


●


NOTE: This defect occurred at some point during printer development. HP has implemented a solution to the problem. This defect is included in the image defects section for the unlikely event that it reoccurs. Figure 2-105 OPC wide-pitch banding

Description of the defect This defect appears as overlapping sets of wide-pitch bands (repeating at 75 mm (2.95 in)).

ENWW


Conditions that can cause the defect This defect is caused by OPC deformation during the assembly process. Solutions for the defect Use the following steps to solve the defect. ●

Resend the print job (the defect should fade with subsequent printed pages).

●



Toner cartridge


ENWW

Transfer bias defect events Review the following information about the transfer bias image defect (developmental) events.

ENWW

●

Leading edge - mid-page toner scatter

●

Density change at 75 mm2.95 in from the leading edge

●

Transfer issue - random voids


Leading edge - mid-page toner scatter Review the following information about the leading edge - mid-page toner scatter transfer bias defect event. ●


●


●


●


NOTE: This defect occurred at some point during printer development. HP has implemented a solution to the problem. This defect is included in the image defects section for the unlikely event that it reoccurs. Figure 2-106 Leading edge - mid-page toner scatter

Description of the defect This defect appears as a non-uniform or smear that might appear in the middle of the page at the top of a page. This occurs when the toner scatters at transfer in the area where the media rubs the pick roller and the middle roller. This defect is more likely to occur when media with high resistivity is used. The static charge eliminator (metal brush) on the transfer guide keeps this defect from occurring.


ENWW

Conditions that can cause the defect This defect might occur in low temperature/low humidity environments and in cold start conditions. Solutions for the defect Use the following steps to solve the defect. ●

Resend the print job (the defect should fade with subsequent printed pages as the printer warms up).

●



ENWW

●

Media

●

Printer engine (whole unit replacement)


Density change at 75 mm (2.95 in) from the leading edge Review the following information about the density change at 75 mm (2.95 in) from the leading edge transfer bias defect event. ●


●


●


●


NOTE: This defect occurred at some point during printer development. HP has implemented a solution to the problem. This defect is included in the image defects section for the unlikely event that it reoccurs. Figure 2-107 Density change


ENWW

Description of the defect This defect appears as a light image in the first 75 mm (2.95 in) of the page. This defect is created by a charge ghost due to the lack of charge current. Conditions that can cause the defect This defect happens when there is high print coverage across the longitudinal direction and charging is not able to reach the target potential due to the lack of current that charges OPC in the area and the density becomes high at the next OPC rotation. This shows up in areas of fill, not in text. Solutions for the defect Use the following steps to solve the defect. ●



ENWW

No parts are related to this defect.


Transfer issue - random voids Review the following information about the transfer issue - random voids transfer bias defect event. ●


●


●


●


NOTE: This defect occurred at some point during printer development. HP has implemented a solution to the problem. This defect is included in the image defects section for the unlikely event that it reoccurs. Figure 2-108 Transfer issue - random voids

Description of the defect This defect appears as very small sections of missing toner in random locations on the page. The transfer bias was too strong and caused the missing toner.


ENWW


All except M501: If the defect is persistent, reprint your document with a lower transfer bias setting. 1.

2. ●


istration

○

General Settings

○

Print Quality

○

Adjust Paper Types

Select Resistance Mode.

M507/E50145 and M528/E52645: If the defect is persistent, reprint your document with a lower transfer bias setting. 1.


Settings

○

Copy/Print

○

Print Quality

○

Adjust Paper Types

2.


3.

Select Resistance Mode.


ENWW

No parts are related to this defect.


Toner leak defect events Review the following information about the toner leak image defect (developmental) events. ●

Right to left fade and banding

●

Cartridge fine pitch (1.5 mm0.05 in) banding

●

382 mm15.03 in + IPG repeating defect


ENWW

Right to left fade and banding Review the following information about the right to left fade and banding toner leak defect event. ●


●


●


●


NOTE: This defect occurred at some point during printer development. HP has implemented a solution to the problem. This defect is included in the image defects section for the unlikely event that it reoccurs. Figure 2-109 Right to left fade and banding

Description of the defect This defect appears as fading and banding at an edge and occurs when the cartridge seals leak allowing toner into the gap between the OPC drum and the SD roller/sleeve. This appears in areas of fill, not in text

ENWW


Conditions that can cause the defect This defect is likely to occur in the later stages of toner cartridge life. Solutions for the defect Use the following steps to solve the defect. ●


●

that the toner is within the expected life, if not replace the toner cartridge.

●



Toner cartridge


ENWW

Cartridge fine pitch (1.5 mm (0.05 in)) banding Review the following information about the cartridge fine pitch (1.5 mm (0.05 in)) banding toner leak defect event. ●


●


●


●


NOTE: This defect occurred at some point during printer development. HP has implemented a solution to the problem. This defect is included in the image defects section for the unlikely event that it reoccurs. Figure 2-110 Cartridge fine pitch banding

ENWW


Description of the defect This defect appears as alternating light and dark, evenly spaced, repetitive horizontal lines at a 1.5 mm (0.05 in) pitch. This defect is caused by toner leaking in the drive gear area of the toner cartridge. This appears in areas of fill, not in text. Conditions that can cause the defect This defect is likely to occur in the later stages of toner cartridge life. Solutions for the defect Use the following steps to solve the defect. ●


●

that the toner is within the expected life, if not replace the toner cartridge.

●



Toner cartridge


ENWW

382 mm (15.03 in) + IPG repeating defect Review the following information about the 382 mm (15.03 in) + IPG repeating toner leak defect event. ●


●


●


●


NOTE: This defect occurred at some point during printer development. HP has implemented a solution to the problem. This defect is included in the image defects section for the unlikely event that it reoccurs.

ENWW


Figure 2-111 IPG repeating defect

Description of the defect This defect appears as a dark crescent moon shape defect and it appears in non-print areas of the page. The defect occurs when the toner is thrown outside the toner cartridge at the stirring pitch due to the waviness of the blow out seal. The waviness creates a gap between sleeve and blow out seal. The cause of the blow out seal waviness is that the edge of blow out seal s with the edge of the sleeve/drum spacer. 378 Chapter 2 Solve problems

ENWW



●


●



ENWW

Toner cartridge


Paper path impulse defect events Review the following information about paper path impulse image defect (developmental) events. ●

Impulse band 15 mm0.59 in from the leading edge

●

Toner in the leading edge margin (f slap)

●

6-7 mm0.23-0.27 in wide-pitch banding


ENWW

Impulse band 15 mm (0.59 in) from the leading edge Review the following information about the impulse band 15 mm (0.59 in) from the leading edge paper path impulse defect event. ●


●


●


●


NOTE: This defect occurred at some point during printer development. HP has implemented a solution to the problem. This defect is included in the image defects section for the unlikely event that it reoccurs. Figure 2-112 Impulse band leading edge

ENWW


Description of the defect This defect appears as a dark and usually sharp band occurs 15 mm (0.59 in) from the leading edge of the page. This band shows up in areas of fill, not in text. Conditions that can cause the defect The defect occurs when the paper leading edge goes into the transfer area. Solutions for the defect Use the following steps to solve the defect. ●


●



Setup

○

System Setup

○

Paper Setup

○

Tray <X> NOTE:

○ 2.


Paper Type


●


●


2. ●


Trays

○

Tray

○

Modify

○

Next





ENWW

○

Trays

○

Tray <X> NOTE:

○ 2.


Type



ENWW

●

Media

●



Toner in the leading edge margin (f slap) Review the following information about the toner in the leading edge margin (f slap) paper path impulse defect event. ●


●


●


●


NOTE: This defect occurred at some point during printer development. HP has implemented a solution to the problem. This defect is included in the image defects section for the unlikely event that it reoccurs. Figure 2-113 Toner in the leading edge margin (f slap)


ENWW

Description of the defect This defect appears as scattered toner which occurs at the leading edge of the page. This defect occurs when the page enters the f and the page touches the f film which rubs the image on the page. Conditions that can cause the defect This defect is not dependent on environmental conditions, but is more likely to occur on pages with small top margins or when using curled media. Solutions for the defect Use the following steps to solve the defect. ●

Resend the print job. This defect can be variable.

●


●

M501: From the printer control , increase the leading edge margin. Before beginning, use the Print Test Page option to print a registration test page. This page provides alignment guides in the X and Y directions. 1.


Setup

○

System Setup

○

Print Quality

○

Adjust Alignment

○

Adjust Tray <X> NOTE:

2.

Adjust the Y Shift setting. NOTE:

●


Adjust the “Y” value in .25 mm increments.

M506/E50045 and M527/E52545: From the printer control , increase the leading edge margin. Before beginning, use the Print Test Page option to print a registration test page. This page provides alignment guides in the X and Y directions. 1.

ENWW


istration

○

General Settings

○

Print Quality

○

Image Registration

○

Adjust Tray <X>


NOTE: 2.

Adjust the Y1 Shift (simplex pages) and/or Y2 Shift (duplex pages) settings. NOTE:

●


Adjust the “Y” values in .25 mm increments.

M507/E50145 and M528/E52645: From the printer control , increase the leading edge margin. Before beginning, use the Print Test Page option to print a registration test page. 1.


Settings

○

Copy/Print

○

Print Quality

○

Image Registration

2.


3.

Adjust the Front-side Vertical Shift (simplex pages) and/or Back-side Vertical Shift (duplex pages). Adjust the Vertical Shift values in .25 mm increments.


Media

●

F


ENWW

6-7 mm (0.23-0.27 in) wide-pitch banding Review the following information about the 6-7 mm (0.23-0.27 in) wide-pitch banding paper path impulse defect event. ●


●


●


●


NOTE: This defect occurred at some point during printer development. HP has implemented a solution to the problem. This defect is included in the image defects section for the unlikely event that it reoccurs. Figure 2-114 Wide-pitch banding

6-7 mm (.23-.27 in)

Description of the defect This defect appears as soft bands that repeat at 6-7 mm (0.23-0.27 in).

ENWW


This banding occurs when the transfer top guide vibrates, which is conveyed to the page as well as the page at the transfer area, causing the uneven density. The left and right edges of the back side of transfer top guide with the positioning guide at the transfer frame by the spring at the right edge of the pivot shaft. Since the spring is used only at the right edge, the left side of the alignment feature receives smaller pressing force. When the pressing force is small, the sheet metal vibrates easily. This band shows up in areas of fill, not in text. Conditions that can cause the defect During the print job, the transfer top guide might be vibrating. Solutions for the defect Use the following steps to solve the defect. ●


●



Setup

○

System Setup

○

Paper Setup

○

Tray <X> NOTE:

○ 2. ●

Paper Type



2. ●



Trays

○

Tray

○

Modify

○

Next





ENWW

○

Trays

○

Tray <X> NOTE:

○ 2.


Type



ENWW

●

Media

●

Transfer assembly


F/fixing defect events Review the following information about the f/fixing image defect (developmental) events. ●

F blisters

●

Hot f offset

●

Poor edge fixing - within the image assurance area

●

Poor edge fixing - outside the image assurance area


ENWW

F blisters Review the following information about the f blisters f/fixing defect event. ●


●


●


●


NOTE: This defect occurred at some point during printer development. HP has implemented a solution to the problem. This defect is included in the image defects section for the unlikely event that it reoccurs. Figure 2-115 F blisters

Description of the defect This defect appears as repeating print defects visible in the image at the f pitch of 75.4 mm (2.96 in). These defects were caused by contamination between the films on the f.

ENWW


Figure 2-116 Contaminated f film

Conditions that can cause the defect A defect similar in appearance could occur if a page with sharp objects (for example, staples) is put through the printer. Solutions for the defect Use the following steps to solve the defect. ●


●

If the defect persists, replace the f.


F


ENWW

Hot f offset Review the following information about the hot f offset f/fixing defect event. ●


●


●


●


NOTE: This defect occurred at some point during printer development. HP has implemented a solution to the problem. This defect is included in the image defects section for the unlikely event that it reoccurs. Figure 2-117 Hot f offset

ENWW


Description of the defect This defect appears as slight offset of the image that repeats down the page spaced approximately 75.0 mm (2.95 in) apart. This defect occured when the f thermistor detection temperature did not follow the target temperature. Conditions that can cause the defect This defect is likely to occur in the later stages of f life. Solutions for the defect Use the following steps to solve the defect. ●

Resend the print job and use a lighter f mode.

●

If the defect persists, replace the f.


F


ENWW

Poor edge fixing - within the image assurance area Review the following information about the poor edge fixing - within the image assurance area f/fixing defect event. ●


●


●


●


NOTE: This defect occurred at some point during printer development. HP has implemented a solution to the problem. This defect is included in the image defects section for the unlikely event that it reoccurs. Figure 2-118 Poor edge fixing - within the image assurance area

Description of the defect This defect appears as missing toner inside the 6 mm (0.23 in) image assurance area. Toner rubs off the page. The f temperature is too cold.

ENWW


NOTE: The image assurance area is 5 mm (0.19 in) from the top and bottom edge of the page and 5 mm (0.19 in) from the edge on each side of the page. Conditions that can cause the defect This defect is not dependent on environmental conditions, but is more common at the edges of high-coverage print jobs. Solutions for the defect Use the following steps to solve the defect. ●



Setup

○

System Setup

○

Paper Setup

○

Tray <X> NOTE:

○ 2.


Paper Type


●

M506/M507/E50145 and M527/M528/E52645: Confirm that the correct print mode is selected for the media being used. Use a print mode for a heavier media type.

●


2. ●


Trays

○

Tray

○

Modify

○

Next





ENWW

○

Trays

○

Tray <X> NOTE:

○ 2.


Type



ENWW

F


Poor edge fixing - outside the image assurance area Review the following information about the poor edge fixing - outside the image assurance area f/fixing defect event. ●


●


●


●


NOTE: This defect occurred at some point during printer development. HP has implemented a solution to the problem. This defect is included in the image defects section for the unlikely event that it reoccurs. Figure 2-119 Poor edge fixing - outside the image assurance area


ENWW

Description of the defect This defect appears as missing toner outside the 6 mm (0.23 in) image assurance area. Toner rubs off the page. Poor edge fixing might occur when the printer is using Edge to Edge print mode and the image extends past the 5 mm (0.19 in) image assurance area. NOTE: The image assurance area is 5 mm (0.19 in) from the top and bottom edge of the page and 5 mm (0.19 in) from the edge on each side of the page. Conditions that can cause the defect This defect is not dependent on environmental conditions, but is more common at the edges of high-coverage print jobs. Solutions for the defect Use the following steps to solve the defect. ●

M506/E50045 and M527/E52545: Resend the print job with Edge to Edge mode set to Normal. From the printer control , change the print mode from plain to intermediate (this slows the print speed). 1.

2. ●

○

istration

○

Default print options

○

Edge to Edge

Select Normal.

M507/E50145 and M528/E52645: Resend the print job with Edge to Edge mode set to Normal. 1.

2. ●



Settings

○

Copy/Print

○


○

Edge-to-Edge

Select Normal.

M501: Resend the print job with increased side margins. From the printer control , adjust the page margins. Before beginning, use the Print Test Page option to print a registration test page. This page provides alignment guides in the X and Y directions. 1.

ENWW


Setup

○

System Setup

○

Print Quality


○

Adjust Alignment

○


2.

Adjust the X1 Shift and X2 Shift settings. NOTE:

●


Adjust the “X” values in .25 mm increments.

M506/E50045 and M527/E52545: Resend the print job with increased side margins. From the printer control , adjust the page margins. Before beginning, use the Print Test Page option to print a registration test page. This page provides alignment guides in the horizontal and vertical directions. 1.


istration

○

General Settings

○

Print Quality

○

Image Registration

○


2.

Adjust the X1 Shift (simplex pages) and/or X2 Shift (duplex pages). NOTE:

●


Adjust the “X” values in .25 mm increments.

M507/E50145 and M528/E52645: Resend the print job with increased side margins. From the printer control , adjust the page margins. Before beginning, use the Print Test Page option to print a registration test page. This page provides alignment guides in the horizontal and vertical directions. 1.

●


Settings

○

Copy/Print

○

Print Quality

○

Image Registration

2.


3.

Adjust the Front-side Horizontal Shift (simplex pages) and/or Back-side Horizontal Shift (duplex pages). Adjust the Horizontal Shift values in .25 mm increments.




ENWW

○

Setup

○

System Setup

○

Paper Setup

○

Tray <X> NOTE:

○ 2. ●

Paper Type

Select Intermediate 85–95g


2. ●



Trays

○

Tray

○

Modify

○

Next




Trays

○

Tray <X> NOTE:

○ 2.


Type



ENWW

F


Miscellaneous defect events Review the following information about miscellaneous image defect (developmental) events. ●

Uneven density - across the page

●

Water drop (condensation)


ENWW

Uneven density - across the page Review the following information about the uneven density - across the page image defect (developmental) event. ●


●


●


●


NOTE: This defect occurred at some point during printer development. HP has implemented a solution to the problem. This defect is included in the image defects section for the unlikely event that it reoccurs. Figure 2-120 Uneven Density - across the page

ENWW


Description of the defect This defect appears as areas of varying (light/dark) density across the page. This is caused by variation in the position of the stirring system at initial cartridge assembly resulting in toner material attached to the D-blade. Uneven attachment of toner component to D-blade is caused by uneven toner coating on the sleeve during initial sequence. This banding shows up in areas of fill, not in text. Conditions that can cause the defect This defect is likely to occur in the later stages of toner cartridge life. Solutions for the defect Use the following steps to solve the defect. ●


●


●



Toner cartridge


ENWW

Water drop (condensation) Review the following information about the water drop (condensation) image defect (developmental) event. ●


●


●


●


NOTE: This defect occurred at some point during printer development. HP has implemented a solution to the problem. This defect is included in the image defects section for the unlikely event that it reoccurs. Figure 2-121 Water drop (condensation)

ENWW


Description of the defect This defect appears as short, soft, light streaks at the top of a page. Condensation collects on the f exit guide ribs and transfers to the trailing (unprinted side) of the first page of a duplex job. When the duplexed page is printed, the condensation affects the transfer of the toner and causes the defect. Conditions that can cause the defect This defect might occur in low temperature high humidity environments and in cold start conditions. Solutions for the defect Use the following steps to solve the defect. ●

Resend the print job. This defect can be variable.

●

M506/E50045 and M527/E52545: If the defect does not improve within two to three print jobs, change the print mode Moisture Control from Normal to Alternate. 1.

2. ●


istration

○

General Settings

○

Print Quality

○

Optimize

○

Moisture Control

Select Alternate.

M507/E50145 and M528/E52645: If the defect does not improve within two to three print jobs, change the print mode Moisture Control from Normal to Alternate. 1.

2.


Settings

○

Copy/Print

○

Print Quality

○

Optimize

○

Moisture Control

Select Alternate.


Media

●

F


ENWW

Other events Review the following information about other print-quality events. ●

F contamination

●

Image placement - margins and skew

●

Output curl

●

Sticky output

●

Output stacking

●

Paper handling - misprints

●

Paper handling - multifeeds

●

Paper handling - jams

NOTE: The examples in this section describe other printer events that can occur. Customers might observe these problems.

ENWW


F contamination Review the following information about the f contamination event. ●


●


●


●


Figure 2-122 F contamination

Description of the defect This defect appears as dark globs of toner observed on the front or back of the page. Toner builds up on the f sleeve and pressure roller and comes off on subsequent pages. This defect can be either repeating at 75 mm (2.95 in) or does not repeat.


ENWW

Conditions that can cause the defect This defect might occur in the following conditions: ●

Inappropriate media type print mode is selected (f too cold)

●

F jams were observed on the previous jobs

●

Narrow media was printed for extended periods of time

Solutions for the defect Use the following steps to solve the defect. ●

M501: From the printer control , process a cleaning page to remove the contamination in the f. NOTE: If a repeating defect does not disappear after processing multiple cleaning pages, a permanent defect might be present on the f sleeve. –


Setup

○

Service

○

Cleaning Page NOTE: Touch the OK button to begin the cleaning process. Wait until the process completes. Discard the page that prints.

●

M506/E50045 and M527/E52545: From the printer control , process a cleaning page to remove the contamination in the f. NOTE: If a repeating defect does not disappear after processing multiple cleaning pages, a permanent defect might be present on the f sleeve. 1.

2.


Device Maintenance

○


○

Cleaning Page

Select Print. NOTE:

●

The process takes up to 1.5 minutes.

M507/E50145 and M528/E52645: From the printer control , process a cleaning page to remove the contamination in the f. NOTE: If a repeating defect does not disappear after processing multiple cleaning pages, a permanent defect might be present on the f sleeve. 1.

ENWW


Tools

○

Maintenance


2.

○


○

Cleaning Page

Select Print. NOTE:

The process takes up to 1.5 minutes.


F


ENWW

Image placement - margins and skew Review the following information about the image placement - margins and skew event. ●


●


●


●


Figure 2-123 Image placement - margins and skew

Description of the defect This defect appears as image that is not centered or skewed on the page. The media is not positioned properly as it is pulled from the tray and goes through the paper path.

ENWW


Conditions that can cause the defect This defect might occur if the IPA is off in any environment and from any tray. Solutions for the defect Use the following steps to solve the defect. ●

Before loading paper in the tray, hold the stack of paper, and then tap the bottom edge on a flat surface so that the stack is even on all sides.

●

Make sure that the paper guides are adjusted to the correct size for the selected paper and do not overfill the tray. that the top of the stack is below the tray full indicator.

●

Do not adjust the paper guides tightly against the paper stack. Adjust them to the indentations or markings in the tray.

●

M501: Before beginning, use the Print Test Page option to print a registration test page. This page provides alignment guides in the X and Y directions. 1.


Setup

○

System Setup

○

Print Quality

○

Adjust Alignment

○


2.

NOTE: ○


Adjust the “X” and “Y” values in .25 mm increments.

X1 Shift NOTE: Registration of the image on the paper from side to side, as the paper lies in the tray. For duplex models, this side is the second side (back) of the paper.

○

X2 Shift NOTE: Registration of the image on the paper from side to side, as the paper lies in the tray, for the first side (front) of a duplexed page. This item appears only on duplex models.

○

Y Shift NOTE:

●

Registration of the image on the paper from top to bottom as the paper lies in the tray.

M506/E50045 and M527/E52545: For image placement defects do the following. Resend the print job. If the error persists, change the image placement settings for the tray that the defect occurs. From the printer control , process a cleaning page to remove the contamination in the f. Before beginning, use the Print Test Page option to print a registration test page. This page provides alignment guides in the X and Y directions. 1.



ENWW

○

istration

○

General Settings

○

Print Quality

○

Registration

○


2.

●

NOTE:


Adjust the “X” and “Y” values in .25 mm increments.

○

X1 (horizontal; simplex)

○

X2 (vertical; simplex)

○

Y1 (horizontal; duplex)

○

Y2 (vertical; duplex)

M507/E50145 and M528/E52645: For image placement defects do the following. Resend the print job. If the error persists, change the image placement settings for the tray that the defect occurs. From the printer control , process a cleaning page to remove the contamination in the f. Before beginning, use the Print Test Page option to print a registration test page. This page provides alignment guides in the X and Y directions. 1.


Settings

○

Copy/Print

○

Print Quality

○

Image Registration

2.


3.

Adjust the appropriate margin settings. Front-side settings are for simplex pages, and back-side settings are for duplex pages. Adjust the Vertical and Horizontal Shift values in .25 mm increments.


ENWW

●

Media

●

Tray guides

●


●

Feed rollers


Output curl Review the following information about the output curl event. ●


●


●


●


Figure 2-124 Output curl

Description of the defect This defect appears as printed pages are curled. Two types of curl are possible: ●

Positive curl: paper curls toward the printed side

●

Negative curl: paper curls away from printed side

This defect is caused by uneven drying conditions for the two sides of the paper and f location close to the paper output.


ENWW

Conditions that can cause the defect Positive curl occurs in dry environments or when printing high coverage pages. Negative curl occurs in high humidity environments when printing low coverage pages. Solutions for the defect Use the following steps to solve the defect. General curl defect solutions ●

Resend the print job. Use the duplex option in the printer driver.

●

Do not adjust the paper guides tightly against the paper stack. Adjust them to the indentations or markings in the tray.

●

M501: From the printer control , enable the Paper Curl print mode option. 1.

2. ●

2.

Setup

○

Service

○

Less Paper Curl

Select On.


istration

○

General Settings

○

Print Quality

○

Optimize

○

Paper Curl

Select Reduced.

M507/E50145 and M528/E52645: From the printer control , change the print mode Paper Curl from Normal to Reduced. 1.

2.

ENWW

○

M506/E50045 and M527/E52545: From the printer control , change the print mode Paper Curl from Normal to Reduced. 1.

●



Settings

○

Copy/Print

○

Print Quality

○

Adjust Paper Types



3.


4.

Select Reduced.

Specific curl defect solutions ●

Positive curl: Use a higher temperature media type (heavier weight) mode which will increase the negative curl tendency reducing the positive curl. Also, more fusing could be selected in the extended print modes for the selected paper type.

●

Negative curl: Use a lower temperature media type (lighter weight) mode or select a reduced paper curl or lower fusing temperature setting in extended print modes. If possible, try storing media in a dry environment prior to printing or use freshly opened paper (non-acclimated).


Media

●

F


ENWW

Sticky output Review the following information about the sticky output event. ●


●


●


●


Figure 2-125 Sticky output

Description of the defect This defect appears as output pages that stick together when printing heavy coverage images in duplex mode. When printing large jobs the output stack retains enough heat that the toner on the top page does not cool sufficiently and can be tacky in heavy coverage areas. When the next page is output if there is heavy coverage that lands on the top page in the stack, the toner-to-toner might stick. Conditions that can cause the defect This defect might occur in the following conditions: ●

Large jobs greater than 25 pages (50 Images)

●

Plain f mode

●

Back-to-back images with heavy (greater than 80% density) coverage

●

More severe on smooth heavy media

Solutions for the defect Use the following steps to solve the defect.

ENWW

●

Confirm that the correct print mode is selected for the paper being used.

●

Flex the output stack before separating pages.


●

Print smaller jobs and remove the output before sending the next job.

●

Use the Intermediate F mode which slows the printing and allows more time for cooling.

●

Try printing in Quiet mode which lowers the f temperature and slows the output. M501: From the printer control , enable the Quiet Print Mode option. 1.

2.


Setup

○

System Setup

○

Quiet Print Mode

Select On.


Media

●

F


ENWW

Output stacking Review the following information about the output stacking event. ●


●


●


●


Figure 2-126 Output stacking

Description of the defect This defect appears as output pages that do not stack properly in the output bin. The stack may be uneven or skewed or pages could be pushed out of the tray and onto the floor. Conditions that can cause the defect Poor stacking can occur when there is significant paper curl present, if the paper being used is wrinkled or deformed, if using non-standard media types such as envelopes, or if the output bin gets too full. Causes for this

ENWW


defect vary depending on the type of media being used. If paper curl is present, the cause can be attributed to uneven drying of the media in the f. Solutions for the defect Use the following steps to solve the defect. ●

Use the output bin extension.

●

If applicable, use the solutions in "Output curl" in the Troubleshooting Manual.

●

Use different paper that meets HP specifications for this printer.

●

Use freshly opened paper (non-acclimated).

●

Remove paper from the output tray before the stack becomes too large.


Media

●

F


ENWW

Paper handling - misprints Review the following information about the paper handling - misprints event. ●


●


●


●


Description of the defect This defect appears as media in the paper path that does not behave as the printer expects. The control displays a 41.XX.XX error. A sensor is triggered at an unexpected timing and displays an error message. Conditions that can cause the defect Misprints occur in any environment. Solutions for the defect Use the following steps to solve the defect. ●

Make sure that the size of the paper loaded in a specified tray matches the control setting.

●

Make sure that the paper guides in the tray are adjusted correctly for the size of paper and the rear door is fully closed.

●

Make sure that the input tray and output bin are not overfilled.

●

Try using a new supply of paper or a different type of paper.


ENWW

●

Media

●

Tray guides

●


●

Feed rollers


Paper handling - multifeeds Review the following information about the paper handling - multifeeds event. ●


●


●


●


Description of the defect This defect appears as one (or many) pages feed through the paper path together. Sheets of paper stick together (physically or statically) and the separation pressure from the pick roller is unable to separate the sheets. Conditions that can cause the defect The multifeed defect can occur in any environment, but occurs more frequently in HH and NN (as opposed to LL), on glossy media (as opposed to plain media) and with freshly opened (as opposed to fully acclimated) paper. Solutions for the defect Use the following steps to solve the defect. ●

Make sure that the input tray is not overfilled.

●

Make sure that the paper guides in the tray are adjusted correctly for the size of paper.

●

Remove the stack of paper from the tray, flex it, rotate it 180 degrees and then flip it over. Insert the media in a new orientation.

●

Load a smaller stack of media in the input tray.

●

Fan the media.

●

Try a new supply of paper or a different type of paper.


Media

●

Tray guides

●


●

Feed rollers


ENWW

Paper handling - jams Review the following information about the paper handling - jams event. ●


●


●


●


Description of the defect This defect appears as media stuck in the paper path. The control displays a 13.XX.XX error. Media does not enter, through, or exit the paper path correctly. Conditions that can cause the defect Jams occur in any environment. Solutions for the defect Use the following steps to solve the defect. ●

Clear the jam (input tray, rear door, bottom duplex tray, or output bin).

●

Make sure that the paper guides in the tray are adjusted correctly for the size of paper and the rear door is fully closed.

●

Make sure that the input tray and output bin are not overfilled.

●

Load a smaller stack of media in the input tray.

●

Try a new supply of paper or a different type of paper.


ENWW

●

Media

●

Tray guides

●


●

Feed rollers


Clean the printer Review the following information about cleaning the printer. ●

Clean the paper path

●

Print a cleaning page

●

Enable and configure auto cleaning (M527/E52545/M528/E52645)

●

Check the scanner glass for dirt and smudges (M527/E52545/M528/E52645)

●

Clean the pickup rollers and separation pad in the document feeder (M527/E52545/M528/E52645)

●

Clean the Tray 1 roller and separation pad

●

Clean the Tray 2-X rollers

NOTE: To clean the printer exterior, use a soft, water-moistened cloth.

Clean the paper path Over time, particles of toner and paper accumulate inside the printer. This can cause print-quality problems during printing. Cleaning the paper path eliminates or reduces these problems. Clean the paper path and toner-cartridge areas every time that the toner cartridge is changed or whenever printquality problems occur. As much as possible, keep the printer free from dust and debris.


ENWW

Print a cleaning page Use the following procedures to print a cleaning page. ●

Print the cleaning page from a LCD control (M501)

●

Print the cleaning page from a LCD control (M506/E50045/M507/E50145)

●

Print the cleaning page from a touchscreen control (M527/E52545/M528/E52645)

Print the cleaning page from a LCD control (M501) Use the following procedure to print the cleaning page from a LCD control on an M501 printer. 1.

From the printer control , press the OK button.

2.


3.

Use the arrow keys to select the Cleaning mode option, and then press the OK button. The printer prints the first side and then prompts you to remove the page from the output bin and reload it in Tray 1, keeping the same orientation. Wait until the process is complete. Discard the page that prints.

Print the cleaning page from a LCD control (M506/E50045/M507/E50145) Use the following procedure to print the cleaning page from a LCD control on an M506/E50045/M507/ E50145 printer. FutureSmart 3 1.



2.

Use the down arrow

3.

If necessary, use the down arrow page.

4.

Follow the instruction on the printed cleaning page to finish the cleaning page process.

button to scroll to Calibration/Cleaning, and then press the OK button. button to scroll to Cleaning, and then press the OK button to print the

FutureSmart 4

ENWW

1.


2.

Use the down arrow

button to scroll to Maintenance, and then press the OK button.

3.

Use the down arrow

button to scroll to Calibration/Cleaning, and then press the OK button.

4.


5.

Use the down arrow

6.

Follow the instruction on the printed cleaning page to finish the cleaning page process.

7.

A Cleaning... message displays on the printer control . The cleaning process takes a few minutes to complete. Do not turn the printer off until the cleaning process has finished. When it is finished, discard the printed page.

button to scroll to Cleaning page, and then press the OK button to print the page.

Clean the printer 425

Print the cleaning page from a touchscreen control (M527/E52545/M528/E52645) Use the following procedure to print the cleaning page from a touchscreen control (M527/E52545/M528/ E52645). 1.

From the Home screen on the printer control , scroll to and touch the Device Maintenance button (FutureSmart 3), or scroll to and touch the Tools button (FutureSmart 4).

2.


Maintenance (FutureSmart 4)

●


3.

Touch Cleaning Page, and then press the OK button (FutureSmart 3) or the Print button (FutureSmart 4) to print the page.

4.

The cleaning process can take several minutes. When it is finished, discard the printed page.

Enable and configure auto cleaning (M527/E52545/M528/E52645) Use the procedure in this section to enable and configure the automatic cleaning function from a touchscreen control . 1.


2.


Maintenance (FutureSmart 4)

●


●

Auto Cleaning (FutureSmart 3) or Cleaning Page (FutureSmart 4).

3.

FutureSmart 3: Select the Enable item, and then touch the Save button.

4.

FutureSmart 4: Under Automatic Cleaning Interval, select the desired page interval when the printer should automatically print a cleaning page, and then touch the Done button.

Check the scanner glass for dirt and smudges (M527/E52545/M528/E52645) Over time, specks of debris might collect on the scanner glass and white plastic backing, which can affect performance. Use the following procedure to clean the scanner if the printed pages have streaks, unwanted lines, black dots, poor print quality, or unclear text.


ENWW

1.

Press the power button to turn the printer off, and then disconnect the power cable from the electrical outlet.

2.

Open the scanner lid.

3.

Clean the scanner glass, the document feeder strips, and the white plastic backing with a soft cloth or sponge that has been moistened with nonabrasive glass cleaner. CAUTION: Do not use abrasives, acetone, benzene, ammonia, ethyl alcohol, or carbon tetrachloride on any part of the printer; these can damage the printer. Do not place liquids directly on the glass or platen. They might seep and damage the printer. NOTE: If you are having trouble with streaks on copies when you are using the document feeder, be sure to clean the small strip of glass on the left side of the scanner.

4.

Dry the glass and white plastic parts with a chamois or a cellulose sponge to prevent spotting.

5.

Connect the power cable to an outlet, and then press the power button to turn the printer on.

ENWW


Clean the pickup rollers and separation pad in the document feeder (M527/E52545/ M528/E52645) Use the following procedure to clean the pickup rollers and separation pad in the document feeder for the M527/ E52545/M528/E52645 printer. 1.

Lift the document-feeder latch.

2.

Open the document-feeder cover.


ENWW

3.

Remove any visible lint or dust from each of the feed rollers and the separation pad using compressed air or a clean lint-free cloth moistened with warm water. NOTE: Lift up the roller assembly to access and clean the second roller.

4.

Close the document-feeder cover. If the error persists, install a document feeder maintenance kit (B5L52-67903).

ENWW


Clean the Tray 1 roller and separation pad Use the following procedure to clean the Tray 1 roller and separation pad. ●

Step 1: Remove the roller

●

Step 2: Remove the separation pad assembly

●

Step 3: Clean the Tray 1 roller and separation pad

●

Step 4: Install the separation pad assembly

●

Step 5: Install the roller

NOTE: The figures in this section show the M506x. However, the procedure is correct for all M506/E50045/ M507/E50145 models and the M501 and M527/E52545/M528/E52645 printers.

Step 1: Remove the roller Use the following procedure to remove the roller. 1.

Open the toner-cartridge door. Figure 2-127 Open the toner-cartridge door


ENWW

2.

Release two tabs between the roller collar and roller (callout 1), and then rotate the top of the roller out and away from the printer (callout 2). TIP:

Pushing down on the top of the roller might make it easier to release the tabs.

Figure 2-128 Release two tabs

2 1

3.

1

Remove the roller. Figure 2-129 Remove the roller

Step 2: Remove the separation pad assembly Use the following procedure to remove the separation pad assembly. 1.

ENWW

Open the toner-cartridge door.


Figure 2-130 Open the toner-cartridge door

2.

Release two tabs between the roller collar and roller (callout 1), and then rotate the top of the roller out and away from the printer (callout 2). TIP:

Pushing down on the top of the roller might make it easier to release the tabs.

Figure 2-131 Release two tabs

2 1


1

ENWW

3.

Remove the roller. Figure 2-132 Remove the roller

Step 3: Clean the Tray 1 roller and separation pad Use the following procedure to clean the Tray 1 roller and separation pad. ▲

Use a damp, lint-free cloth to gently clean the rollers. CAUTION: When handling the roller and pad, avoid touching the spongy surfaces. Skin oils and fingerprints on a roller surface can cause print-quality problems. Figure 2-133 Clean the rollers and pad

Step 4: Install the separation pad assembly Use the following procedure to install the separation pad assembly. CAUTION: Do not touch the black rubber portion of the pad assembly. Skin oils on the pad can cause paper handling problems. HP recommends washing your hands before handling the assembly.

ENWW


1.

Install the spring (callout 1) from the discarded separation pad assembly (or use the one supplied in this kit) on to the replacement assembly (callout 2). Figure 2-134 Install the spring

1

2

2.

Align the slots in the assembly (callout 1) with the rails on the holder (callout 2). Figure 2-135 Align the assembly with the holder

1

2


ENWW

3.

Install the pad assembly into the holder. Reinstallation tip: The separation pad should freely move up and down on the spring when correctly installed. If the pad does not freely move, remove it, check the spring, and then reinstall it. Figure 2-136 Install the pad assembly

4.

Slide the roller carriage back to the center of the shaft (the locking tab snaps into place). NOTE:

Slightly depress the separation pad so that the roller carriage can slide over it.

Figure 2-137 Slide the roller carriage to the left

Step 5: Install the roller Use the following procedure to install the roller.

ENWW


CAUTION: Do not touch the gray spongy portion of the replacement roller. Skin oils on the roller can cause paper handling problems. HP recommends washing your hands before handling the assembly. 1.

Place the pins on the under-side of the pickup roller in the slots on the holder, and then rotate the top of the roller up and toward the printer. NOTE: In this step, you start with the roller upside down, and then rotate it up and into its final installed position. Figure 2-138 Install the roller

2.

Continue to rotate the top of the roller toward the printer until two tabs snap into place. Figure 2-139 Engage two tabs

2 1


1

ENWW

3.

Close the toner-cartridge door. NOTE:

If the toner cartridge was removed, do not forget to reinstall it.

Figure 2-140 Close the toner-cartridge door

ENWW


Clean the Tray 2-X rollers Use the following procedures to clean the Tray 2-X rollers. ●

Step 1: Remove the tray

●

Step 2: Remove the roller assembly

●

Step 3: Clean the Tray 2-X rollers

●

Step 4: Install the roller assembly

●

Step 5: Install the tray

NOTE: The figures in this section show the M506x and M527. However, the procedure is correct for all M506/ E50045/M507/E50145 models, and the M501 and the M527/E52545/M528/E52645 printers.

Step 1: Remove the tray Use the following procedure to remove the tray. 1.

Pull the tray straight out of the printer until it stops. Figure 2-141 Pull the tray out until it stops


ENWW

2.

Lift the front of the tray, and then pull it out of the printer to remove it. Figure 2-142 Release and remove the tray

Step 2: Remove the roller assembly Use the following procedure to remove the roller assembly. CAUTION: When handling the roller assembly, do not touch the gray spongy portion of the rollers. Skin oils on the rollers can cause paper handling problems. HP recommends washing your hands before handling the assembly. NOTE: The figures in this section show the M506 and M527 Tray 2. However, the procedure is correct for replacing the Tray 2 pickup and feed roller and separation roller assemblies in the M501, as well as the optional Tray 3, Tray 4, and Tray 5 accessories. 1.

Look up into the tray cavity to locate the roller assembly. Figure 2-143 Locate the roller assembly

ENWW


2.

Grasp the white tab on the roller holder (callout 1), and then slide the roller assembly to the left to compress the spring loaded shaft (callout 2). Figure 2-144 Compress the spring-loaded shaft

1

3.

With the spring loaded shaft depressed, rotate the right side of the roller assembly down and towards you to release it. Figure 2-145 Remove the roller assembly

Step 3: Clean the Tray 2-X rollers Use the following procedure to clean the Tray 2-X rollers. ▲

Use a damp, lint-free cloth to gently clean the rollers. CAUTION: When handling the rollers, avoid touching the spongy surfaces. Skin oils and fingerprints on a roller surface can cause print-quality problems.


ENWW

Figure 2-146 Clean the rollers

Step 4: Install the roller assembly Use the following procedure to install the roller assembly. CAUTION: When handling the roller assembly, do not touch the gray spongy portion of the rollers. Skin oils on the rollers can cause paper handling problems. HP recommends washing your hands before handling the assembly. NOTE: The figures in this section show the M506 and M527 Tray 2. However, the procedure is correct for replacing the Tray 2 pickup and feed roller and separation roller assemblies in the M501, as well as the optional Tray 3, Tray 4, and Tray 5 accessories. 1.

When the assembly is installed, the actuator pin (callout 1) on the roller assembly must be installed in the slot (callout 2) in the actuator arm. Figure 2-147 Check the pin on the assembly

2

1

ENWW


2.

Position the left end of the assembly on the spring loaded shaft and push it left to compress the shaft (callout 1), keep the roller holder parallel to the underside of the printer, and then rotate the right end up and into the printer (callout 2). Figure 2-148 Install the roller assembly

3.

Slowly release the depressed spring loaded shaft to allow the right end of the roller assembly to engage with the right-side drive shaft. Make sure that the right side of the assembly is fully engaged with the right-side drive shaft. Figure 2-149 Decompress the spring-loaded shaft

1


ENWW

4.

To check the installation, repeatedly push up and release, the tray actuator (callout 1) and observe the roller assembly. If the assembly is correctly installed, it moves up and down (callout 2). NOTE: If the assembly does not properly move, remove it and then reinstall it, making sure that the pin on the assembly is installed in the slot in the actuator arm. See Figure 2-147 Check the pin on the assembly on page 441. Figure 2-150 Check the installation

1 2

Step 5: Install the tray Use the following procedure to install the tray. 1.

With the tray at a slight angle, align the sides of the tray with the rails in the accessory, and then partially slide the tray into the printer. Figure 2-151 Install the tray

ENWW


2.

Push the tray straight into the accessory to close it. Figure 2-152 Close the tray


ENWW

Solve paper handling problems Review the following information to solve paper handling problems. ●

Printer feeds incorrect page size

●

Printer pulls from incorrect tray

●

Printer will not duplex or duplexes incorrectly

●

Paper does not feed from Tray 2-X

●

Output is curled or wrinkled

●

Printer does not pick up paper or misfeeds

Printer feeds incorrect page size Review the following information when the printer feeds an incorrect page size. Table 2-48 Printer feeds incorrect page size Cause

Solution

The correct size paper is not loaded in the tray.

Load the correct size paper in the tray.

The correct size paper is not selected in the software program or printer driver.

Confirm that the settings in the software program and printer driver are correct, because the software program settings override the printer driver and control settings, and the printer driver settings override the control settings.

The correct size paper for the tray is not selected in the printer control .

From the control , select the correct size paper for the tray.

The paper size is not configured correctly for the tray.

Print a configuration page to determine the paper size for which the tray is configured.

The guides in the tray are not against the paper.

that the paper guides are touching the paper.

Printer pulls from incorrect tray Review the following information when the printer pulls from an incorrect tray. Table 2-49 Printer pulls from incorrect tray Cause

Solution

A driver for a different printer is in use.

Use a driver for this printer.

The specified tray is empty.

Load paper in the specified tray.

The paper size is not configured correctly for the input tray.

Print a configuration page or use the control to determine the paper size for which the tray is configured.


that the guides are touching the paper.

Printer will not duplex or duplexes incorrectly Review the following information when the printer will not duplex or duplexes incorrectly.

ENWW

Solve paper handling problems 445

Table 2-50 Printer will not duplex (print 2-sided jobs) or duplexes incorrectly Cause

Solution

The duplex job is trying to use uned paper.

that the paper is ed for duplex printing.

The printer driver is not set up for duplex printing.

Set up the printer driver to enable duplex printing.

The first page is printing on the back of preprinted forms or letterhead.

Load preprinted forms and letterhead in Tray 1 with the letterhead or printed side down, with the top of the page leading into the printer. For Tray 2-X, load the paper printed side up with the top of the page toward the right of the printer.

The printer model does not automatic 2-sided printing.

The printer model does not automatic 2-sided printing.

Paper does not feed from Tray 2-X Review the following information when the paper does not feed from Tray 2-X. Table 2-51 Paper does not feed from Tray 2-X Cause

Solution

The correct size paper is not loaded.

Load the correct size paper.

The input tray is empty.

Load paper in the input tray.

The correct paper type for the input tray is not selected in the printer control .

From the printer control , select the correct paper type for the input tray. Trays configured for a paper type with a specific weight range will not match a print job that specifies an exact weight, even if the specified weight is within the weight range.

Paper from a previous jam has not been completely removed.

Open the printer and remove any paper in the paper path. Closely inspect the f area for jams.

None of the optional trays appear as input tray options.

The optional trays only display as available if they are installed. that any optional trays are correctly installed. that the printer driver has been configured to recognize the optional trays.

An optional tray is incorrectly installed.

Print a configuration page to confirm that the optional tray is installed. If not, that the tray is correctly attached to the printer.




that the guides are touching the paper.

Output is curled or wrinkled Review the following information when the output is curled or wrinkled. Table 2-52 Output is curled or wrinkled Cause

Solution

Paper does not meet the specifications for this printer.

Use only paper that meets the HP paper specifications for this printer.


ENWW

Table 2-52 Output is curled or wrinkled (continued)

ENWW

Cause

Solution

The correct paper type for the input tray is not selected in the printer control .

From the printer control , select the correct paper type for the input tray. Trays configured for a paper type with a specific weight range will not match a print job that specifies an exact weight, even if the specified weight is within the weight range.

Paper is damaged or in poor condition.

Remove paper from the input tray and load paper that is in good condition.

The printer is operating in an excessively humid environment.

that the printing environment is within humidity specifications.

The print job consist of large, solid-filled areas.

Large, solid-filled areas can cause excessive curl. Try using a different pattern.

Paper used was not stored correctly and might have absorbed moisture.

Remove paper and replace it with paper from a fresh, unopened package.

Paper has poorly cut edges.

Remove paper, flex it, rotate it 180 degrees or turn it over, and then reload it into the input tray. Do not fan paper. If the problem persists, replace the paper.

The specific paper type was not configured for the tray or selected in the software.

Configure the software for the paper (see the software documentation). Configure the tray for the paper.

The paper has previously been used for a print job.

Do not re-use paper.


Printer does not pick up paper or misfeeds Use the following procedures if the printer will not pick up paper or misfeeds paper. ●

The printer does not pick up paper

●

The printer picks up multiple sheets of paper

●

The document feeder jams, skews, or picks up multiple sheets of paper (M527/E52545/M528/E52645)

●

Paper does not feed automatically

The printer does not pick up paper If the printer does not pick up paper from the tray, try these solutions. NOTE: Tray 1 and Tray 2 are optimal for paper pickup when using special paper or media other than 20lb plain paper. For Tray 1 and Tray 2 the printer increases the number of attempts to pick up a page, which increases the reliability of successfully picking the page from the tray and decreases the possibility of a mispick jam. HP recommends using Tray 1 or Tray 2 if the printer is experiencing excessive or reoccurring jams from trays other than Tray 1 and Tray 2, or for print jobs that require media other than 20lb plain paper. 1.

Open the printer and remove any jammed sheets of paper.

2.

Load the tray with the correct size of paper for the job.

3.

Make sure the paper size and type are set correctly on the printer control .

4.

Make sure the paper guides in the tray are adjusted correctly for the size of paper. Adjust the guides to the appropriate indentation in the tray.

5.

Check the printer control to see if the printer is waiting for an acknowledgment to the feed the paper manually prompt. Load paper, and continue.

6.

The rollers above the tray might be contaminated. Clean the rollers with a lint-free cloth dampened with warm water.

The printer picks up multiple sheets of paper If the printer picks up multiple sheets of paper from the tray, try these solutions. 1.

Remove the stack of paper from the tray and flex it, rotate it 180 degrees, and flip it over. Do not fan the paper. Return the stack of paper to the tray.

2.

Use only paper that meets HP specifications for this printer.

3.

Use paper that is not wrinkled, folded, or damaged. If necessary, use paper from a different package.

4.

Make sure the tray is not overfilled. If it is, remove the entire stack of paper from the tray, straighten the stack, and then return some of the paper to the tray.

5.

Make sure the paper guides in the tray are adjusted correctly for the size of paper. Adjust the guides to the appropriate indentation in the tray.

6.

Make sure the printing environment is within recommended specifications.


ENWW

The document feeder jams, skews, or picks up multiple sheets of paper (M527/E52545/M528/E52645) Review the following information when the document feeder jams, skews, or picks up multiple sheets of paper. ●

Check to see if there are areas on the page that might have had staples removed. This can cause jams and/or mispicks.

●

The original might have something on it, such as staples or self-adhesive notes that must be removed.

●

Check that all rollers are in place and correctly installed.

●

Make sure that the top document-feeder cover is closed.

●

The pages might not be placed correctly. Straighten the pages and adjust the paper guides to center the stack.

●

The paper guides must be touching the sides of the paper stack to work correctly. Make sure that the paper stack is straight and the guides are against the paper stack.

●

The document feeder input tray or output bin might contain more than the maximum number of pages. Make sure the paper stack fits below the guides in the input tray, and remove pages from the output bin.

●

that there are no pieces of paper, staples, paper clips, or other debris in the paper path.

●

Clean the document-feeder rollers and the separation pad. Use compressed air or a clean, lint-free cloth moistened with warm water. If misfeeds still occur, replace the rollers.

Paper does not feed automatically Review the following information when the paper does not feed automatically. Table 2-53 Paper does not feed automatically

ENWW

Cause

Solution

Manual feed is selected in the software program.

Load Tray 1 with paper, or, if the paper is loaded, press the OK button.

The correct size paper is not loaded.

Load the correct size paper.

The input tray is empty.

Load paper into the input tray.

Paper from a previous jam has not been completely removed.

Open the printer and remove any paper in the paper path.




that the rear and width paper guides are touching the paper.


Clear paper jams Use the following information and procedures to clear paper jams. ●

Paper path jam sensor locations

●

Auto-navigation for clearing jams

●

Experiencing frequent or recurring paper jams?

●

Clear paper jams in the document feeder

●

Clear paper jams in Tray 1

●

Clear paper jams in Tray 2 and the 550-sheet trays

●

Clear paper jams in the toner-cartridge area

●

Clear paper jams in the rear door and the f area

●

Clear paper jams in the output bin

●

Clear paper jams in the duplexer

●

Change jam recovery (all except M501)

Paper path jam sensor locations Use the figures below to identify the locations of sensors where reoccurring jams are found.


ENWW

Figure 2-153 Jam sensors Simplex paper path Duplex paper path

PS13 PS1a PS2

PS11

PS2a

PS432

Table 2-54 Jam sensors

1 2

Sensor

Description

Sensor

Description

SR2

TOP sensor

SR2a

Duplex feed sensor1

SR1a

Media-width sensor

SR11

Registration sensor

SR13

F output sensor

SR432

Paper feeder feed sensor2

Duplex models only. 550-sheet paper feeder accessory.

Auto-navigation for clearing jams The auto-navigation feature assists you in clearing jams by providing step-by-step instructions on the control . When you complete a step, the product displays instructions for the next step until you have completed all steps in the procedure.

ENWW

Clear paper jams 451

Experiencing frequent or recurring paper jams? To reduce the number of paper jams, try these solutions. 1.

Use only paper that meets HP specifications for this product.

2.

Use paper that is not wrinkled, folded, or damaged. If necessary, use paper from a different package.

3.

Use paper that has not previously been printed or copied on.

4.

Make sure the tray is not overfilled. If it is, remove the entire stack of paper from the tray, straighten the stack, and then return some of the paper to the tray.

5.

Make sure the paper guides in the tray are adjusted correctly for the size of paper. Adjust the guides so they are touching the paper stack without bending it.

6.

Make sure that the tray is fully inserted in the product.

7.

If you are printing on heavy, embossed, or perforated paper, use the manual feed feature and feed sheets one at a time.

8.

Open the Trays menu on the product control . that the tray is configured correctly for the paper type and size.

9.

Make sure the printing environment is within recommended specifications.

Clear paper jams in the document feeder The following information describes how to clear paper jams in the document feeder. When a jam occurs, the control displays an animation that assists in clearing the jam. 1.

Lift the latch to release the document-feeder cover.


ENWW

2.

Open the document-feeder cover.

3.

Remove any jammed paper.

ENWW


4.

Lift the document-feeder input tray.

5.



ENWW

6.

Lower the document-feeder input tray.

7.

Close the document-feeder cover. NOTE: that the latch on the top of the document-feeder cover is completely closed.

NOTE: To avoid jams, make sure the guides in the document-feeder input tray are adjusted against the document, without bending the document. To copy narrow documents, use the flatbed scanner. Remove all staples and paper clips from original documents. NOTE: Original documents that are printed on heavy, glossy paper can jam more frequently than originals that are printed on plain paper.

Clear paper jams in Tray 1 Use the following procedure to clear paper jams in Tray 1. When a jam occurs, the control displays an animation that assists in clearing the jam.

ENWW


1.

If most of the sheet of paper is visible in the tray, slowly pull the jammed paper out of the printer. Make sure that the entire sheet is removed. If it tears, continue with the following steps to find the remnants. If most of the sheet of paper has been pulled inside the printer, continue with the following steps.

2.

Press the top-cover-release button on the left side of the printer.

3.

Open the front door.

4.

Remove the toner cartridge.


ENWW

5.

Lift the jam-access cover and slowly remove any jammed paper. Be careful not to tear the paper.

6.

Reinsert the toner cartridge.

7.

Close the front door.

ENWW


Clear paper jams in Tray 2 and the 550-sheet trays Use the following procedure to check for paper in all possible jam locations related to Tray 2 and the 550-sheet trays. When a jam occurs, the control displays an animation that assists in clearing the jam. 1.

Remove the tray from the printer.

2.

Remove the paper from the tray, and discard any damaged paper.

3.

that the rear paper guide is adjusted to the indentation for the correct paper size. If necessary, pinch the release and move the rear paper guide to the correct position. It should click into place.

14 LGL 11 LTR B5


ENWW

4.

Load the paper into the tray. Make sure that the stack is flat at all four corners and that the top of the stack is below the maximum-height indicators.

5.

Reinsert and close the tray.

6.


ENWW


7.


8.


9.



ENWW

10. Reinsert the toner cartridge.

11. Close the front door.

Clear paper jams in the toner-cartridge area Use the following procedure to check for paper in all possible jam locations in the toner-cartridge area. When a jam occurs, the control displays an animation that assists in clearing the jam. 1.


ENWW


2.


3.


4.



ENWW

5.

Reinsert the toner cartridge.

6.

Close the front door.

Clear paper jams in the rear door and the f area Use the following procedure to clear paper jams in the rear door and f area. When a jam occurs, the control displays an animation that assists in clearing the jam. NOTE:

ENWW

The f is hot while the printer is in use. Wait for the f to cool before clearing jams.


1.

Open the rear door.

2.


3.

Close the rear door

Clear paper jams in the output bin Use the following procedure to check for paper in all possible jam locations in the output bin.


ENWW

When a jam occurs, the control displays an animation that assists in clearing the jam. 1.

If paper is visible in the output bin, grasp the leading edge and remove it.

Clear paper jams in the duplexer Use the following procedure to check for paper in all possible jam locations in the automatic duplexer. When a jam occurs, the control displays an animation that assists in clearing the jam. 1.

Remove Tray 2 from the printer.

2.

Pull forward on the green tab inside the tray area to release the duplex pan.

ENWW


3.


4.

Close the duplex pan.

5.

Reinsert and close the tray.


ENWW

6.

Open the rear door.

7.


8.

Close the rear door

ENWW


9.


10. Open the front door.

11. Remove the toner cartridge.


ENWW

12. Lift the jam-access cover and slowly remove any jammed paper. Be careful not to tear the paper.

13. Reinsert the toner cartridge.

14. Close the front door.

ENWW


Change jam recovery (all except M501) This printer provides a jam recovery feature that reprints jammed pages. ●

Change jam recovery from a touchscreen control

●

Change jam recovery from a LCD control

Change jam recovery from a touchscreen control Use the following procedure to change jam recovery from a touchscreen control . 1.


2.

Open the General Settings menu (FutureSmart 3) or the Settings menu (FutureSmart 4), and then open the Jam Recovery menu.

3.

Select one of the following options: ●

Automatic — The printer attempts to reprint jammed pages when sufficient memory is available. This is the default setting.

●

Off — The printer does not attempt to reprint jammed pages. Because no memory is used to store the most recent pages, performance is optimal. NOTE: Some pages can be lost if the printer runs out of paper while printing a duplex job with Jam Recovery set to Off.

●

On — The printer always reprints jammed pages. Additional memory is allocated to store the last few pages printed.

Change jam recovery from a LCD control Use the following procedure to change jam recovery from a LCD control . FutureSmart 3 1.


button to scroll to

2.

Use the down arrow

button to scroll to General Settings, and then press the OK button.

3.

Use the down arrow

button to scroll to Jam Recovery, and then press the OK button.

4.

Use the down arrow

button to scroll to an option, and then press the OK button to select it.

●

Automatic — The printer attempts to reprint jammed pages when sufficient memory is available. This is the default setting.

●


●



ENWW

FutureSmart 4 1.

From the Home screen on the printer control , use the arrow keys to navigate to Settings, and then press the OK button.

2.

Use the down arrow

button to scroll to General, and then press the OK button.

3.

Use the down arrow

button to scroll to Jam Recovery, and then press the OK button.

4.

Use the down arrow

button to scroll to an option, and then press the OK button to select it.

–

Auto — The printer attempts to reprint jammed pages when sufficient memory is available. This is the default setting.

–


–

ENWW



Solve performance problems Review the following information and procedures to solve performance problems. ●

Factors affecting print performance

●

Print speeds

●

The printer does not print or it prints slowly

NOTE: Tray 1 and Tray 2 are optimal for paper pickup when using special paper or media other than 20lb plain paper. For Tray 1 and Tray 2 the printer increases the number of attempts to pick up a page, which increases the reliability of successfully picking the page from the tray and decreases the possibility of a mis-pick jam. HP recommends using Tray 1 or Tray 2 if the printer is experiencing excessive or reoccurring jams from trays other than Tray 1 and Tray 2, or for print jobs that require media other than 20lb plain paper.

Factors affecting print performance Review the following information about factors affecting print performance. Table 2-55 Solve performance problems Problem

Cause

Solution

Pages print but are totally blank.

The document might contain blank pages.

Check the original document to see if content is present on all of the pages.


The printer might be malfunctioning.

To check the printer, print a Configuration page.


Make sure that the printer is not feeding multiple pages (especially if very thin paper is used).

Make sure that the paper meets HP specifications for this printer.

Pages print very slowly.

For a complete list of specific HP-brand paper that this printer s, go to http://www.hp.com//ljM501 or http://www.hp.com//ljM506 or http://www.hp.com//ljE50045 or http://www.hp.com//ljM507 or http://www.hp.com//ljE50145 or http://www.hp.com//ljM527mfp or http://www.hp.com//ljE52545mfp or http://www.hp.com//ljM528mfp or http://www.hp.com//E52645mfp.

Heavier paper types can slow the print job.

Print on a different type of paper.

Complex pages can print slowly.

Proper fusing might require a slower print speed to ensure the best print quality.

Large batches, narrow paper, and special paper such as gloss, transparency, cardstock, and HP Tough Paper can slow the print job.

Print in smaller batches, on a different type of paper, or on a different size of paper.

The printer might not be pulling paper correctly.

Make sure paper is loaded in the tray correctly.

NOTE: Some software programs process print jobs slowly. Pages print very slowly. NOTE: Some software programs process print jobs slowly. Pages print very slowly. NOTE: Some software programs process print jobs slowly. Pages did not print.


ENWW

Table 2-55 Solve performance problems (continued) Problem

Cause

Solution

Pages did not print.

The paper is jamming in the printer.

Clear the jam.


The USB cable might be defective or incorrectly connected.

●

Disconnect the USB cable at both ends and reconnect it.

●

Try printing a job that has printed in the past.

●

Try using a different USB cable.


Other devices are running on the host computer.

The printer might not share a USB port. If an external hard drive or network switchbox is connected to the same port as the printer, the other device might be interfering with the printer. To connect and use the printer, disconnect the other device or use two USB ports on the host computer.


The print job might not have arrived at the printer.

Check the printer status queue. Also, the Printing message should appear on the control display.

Print speeds Print speed is the number of pages that print in one minute. Print speed depends on different engine-process speeds or operational pauses between printed pages during normal printer operation. Factors that determine the print speed of the printer include the following: ●

Page formatting time The printer must pause for each page to be formatted before it prints. Complex pages take more time to format, resulting in reduced print speed. However, most jobs print at full engine speed.

●

Media size Legal-size media reduces print speed because it is longer than the standard Letter- or A4–size media. A reduce print speed is used when printing on narrow media to prevent the edges of the f from overheating.

●

Media mode Some media types require a reduced print speed to achieve maximum print quality on that media. For example, glossy, heavy, and specialty media (for example, envelopes or photos) require a reduced print speed. To maximize the print speed for special media types, make sure that the correct media type in the print driver is selected.

●

Printer temperature To prevent printer damage, print speed is reduced if the printer reaches a specific internal temperature (thermal slow down). The starting temperature of the printer, ambient environment temperature, and the print job size effect the number of pages that can be printed before the printer reduces the print speed. Thermal slow down reduces print speed by printing four pages and then pausing for an amount of time before printing continues.

●

ENWW

Other print speed reduction factors

Solve performance problems 473

Other factors (especially during large print jobs) that can cause reduced print speeds include: –

Density control sequence; occurs every 150 pages and takes about 120 seconds


ENWW

The printer does not print or it prints slowly Use the following procedures when the printer does not print or it prints slowly. ●

The printer does not print

●

The printer prints slowly

The printer does not print If the printer does not print at all, try the following solutions. 1.

Make sure the printer is turned on and that the control indicates it is ready. ●

If the control does not indicate the printer is ready, turn the printer off and then on again.

●

If the control indicates the printer is ready, try sending the job again.

2.

If the control indicates the printer has an error, resolve the error and then try sending the job again.

3.

Make sure the cables are all connected correctly. If the printer is connected to a network, check the following items: ●

Check the bottom LED next to the network connection on the printer. If the network is active, the light is green.

●

Make sure that a network cable and not a phone cord is used to connect to the network.

●

Make sure the network router, hub, or switch is turned on and that it is working correctly.

4.

Install the HP software for the printer. Using generic printer drivers can cause delays clearing jobs from the print queue.

5.

From the list of printers on your computer, right-click the name of this product, click Properties, and open the Ports tab. ●

If a network cable is used to connect to the network, make sure the printer name listed on the Ports tab matches the one on the printer configuration page.

●

If a USB cable is used, and the printer is connected to a wireless network, make sure the box is checked next to Virtual printer port for USB.

6.

If a personal firewall system on the computer is used, it might be blocking communication with the printer. Try temporarily disabling the firewall to see if it is the source of the problem.

7.

If the host computer or the printer is connected to a wireless network, low signal quality or interference might be delaying print jobs.

The printer prints slowly If the printer prints, but it seems slow, try the following solutions. 1.

ENWW

Make sure the computer meets the minimum specifications for this printer. For a list of specifications, go to this Web site: http://www.hp.com//ljM501 or http://www.hp.com//ljM506 or http://www.hp.com//ljE50045 or http://www.hp.com//ljM507 or http://www.hp.com/

Solve performance problems 475

/ljE50145 or http://www.hp.com//ljM527mfp or http://www.hp.com//ljE52545mfp or http://www.hp.com//ljM528mfp or http://www.hp.com//E52645mfp. 2.

When the printer is configured to print on some paper types, such as heavy paper, the printer prints more slowly so it can correctly fuse the toner to the paper. If the paper type setting is not correct for the type of paper you are using, change the setting to the correct paper type.

3.

If the host computer or the printer is connected to a wireless network, low signal quality or interference might be delaying print jobs.


ENWW

Solve connectivity problems Review the following information and procedures to solve connectivity problems. ●

Solve USB connection problems

●

Solve wired network problems

Solve USB connection problems If you have connected the product directly to a computer, check the cable.

ENWW

●

that the cable is connected to the computer and to the product.

●

that the cable is not longer than 2 m (6.65 ft). Try using a shorter cable.

●

that the cable is working correctly by connecting it to another product. Replace the cable if necessary.

Solve connectivity problems 477

Solve wired network problems Review the following information and procedures to solve wired network problems. ●

Introduction

●

Poor physical connection

●

The computer is using the incorrect IP address for the printer

●

The computer is unable to communicate with the printer

●

The printer is using incorrect link and duplex settings for the network

●

New software programs might be causing compatibility problems

●

The computer or workstation might be set up incorrectly

●

The printer is disabled, or other network settings are incorrect

Introduction Check the following items to that the printer is communicating with the network. Before beginning, print a configuration page from the printer control and locate the printer IP address that is listed on this page.

Poor physical connection Use the following procedure when the printer has a poor physical connection. 1.

that the printer is attached to the correct network port using a cable of the correct length.

2.

that cable connections are secure.

3.

Look at the network port connection on the back of the printer, and that the amber activity light and the green link-status light are lit.

4.

If the problem continues, try a different cable or port on the hub.

The computer is using the incorrect IP address for the printer Use the following procedure when the computer is using the incorrect IP address for the printer. 1.

Open the printer properties and click the Ports tab. that the current IP address for the printer is selected. The printer IP address is listed on the printer configuration page.

2.

If you installed the printer using the HP standard T/IP port, select the box labeled Always print to this printer, even if its IP address changes.

3.

If you installed the printer using a Microsoft standard T/IP port, use the hostname instead of the IP address.

4.

If the IP address is correct, delete the printer and then add it again.

The computer is unable to communicate with the printer Use the following procedure when the computer is unable to communicate with the printer. 1.

Test network communication by pinging the network.


ENWW

a.

2.

Open a command-line prompt on your computer. ●

For Windows, click Start, click Run, type cmd, and then press Enter.

●

For OS X, go to Applications, then Utilities, and open Terminal.

b.

Type ping followed by the IP address for your printer.

c.

If the window displays round-trip times, the network is working.

If the ping command failed, that the network hubs are on, and then that the network settings, the printer, and the computer are all configured for the same network.

The printer is using incorrect link and duplex settings for the network HP recommends leaving these settings in automatic mode (the default setting). If you change these settings, you must also change them for your network.

New software programs might be causing compatibility problems that any new software programs are correctly installed and that they use the correct print driver.

The computer or workstation might be set up incorrectly Use the following procedure when the computer or workstation might be set up incorrectly. 1.

Check the network drivers, print drivers, and the network redirection settings.

2.

that the operating system is configured correctly.

The printer is disabled, or other network settings are incorrect Use the following procedure when the printer is disabled, or other network settings are incorrect.

ENWW

1.

Review the configuration page to check the status of the network protocol. Enable it if necessary.

2.

Reconfigure the network settings if necessary.

Solve connectivity problems 479

Service mode functions (M501) Review the following information about service mode functions on an M501 printer. ●

Service menu (M501)

●

Service menu settings

●

Restore the factory-set defaults

●

Secondary service menu (M501)

●

Printer resets (M501)

Service menu (M501) Use the control Service menu to troubleshoot printer problems.

Service menu settings The Service menu is used to adjust print settings, restore factory default settings, and clean the print paper path. The following Service menu items are available: ●

Cleaning Page—used to remove dust and toner from the print paper path.

●

USB Speed—used to set the USB speed to high or full.

●

Less Paper Curl—used to put the printer into a mode that reduces paper curl.

●

Archive Print—used to put the printer into a mode that produces output less susceptible to toner smearing and dusting for preservation and archival.

●

Firmware Date—used to display the product's firmware date code.

●

Restore Defaults—used to reset all customer-accessible menu settings back to the factory default settings (except language) via the control or software. NOTE: This Service menu item does not reset factory-settable settings, including formatter number, page counts, factory paper settings, language, and so on.

●

Signature Check—used to configure how the printer proceeds when a firmware upgrade file does not have a valid signature.

●

LaserJet Update—used to manually update the firmware or to set up automatic firmware updates.


ENWW

Restore the factory-set defaults Use the following procedure to restore the factory-set defaults. ●

Restore the factory-set defaults from a LCD control (M501)

Restore the factory-set defaults from a LCD control (M501) Use the following procedure to restore the factory-set defaults from a LCD control on an M501 printer. 1.

On the printer control , press the OK button to open the menus.

2.


Service

●

Restore Defaults

The printer automatically restarts.

ENWW

Service mode functions (M501) 481

Secondary service menu (M501) Use the secondary service menu to print service-related reports and to run special tests. Customers do not have access to this menu. ●

Open the secondary service menu (M501)

●

Secondary service menu structure (M501)


ENWW

Open the secondary service menu (M501) Use the following procedure to open the secondary service menu on an M501 printer. ●

Open the secondary service menu from a LCD control (M501)

Open the secondary service menu from a LCD control (M501) Use the following procedure to open the secondary service menu from a LCD control on an M501 printer. 1.

Make sure the printer is in the Ready state.

2.

From the printer control , press the setup

3.

Press and the down arrow

4.

Press the setup

5.

Press the OK button to open the 2ndary Service menu. NOTE:

button to open the main menu.

button, and then quickly press the Cancel

button.

button. The message 2ndary Service appears on the control display.

Use the arrow buttons to scroll though the 2ndary Service menu.

Secondary service menu structure (M501) Review the following information about the secondary service menu structure on an M501 printer. Table 2-56 Secondary Service menu (M501) Menu item

Sub-menu item

Description

Service Reports

Cont-Self Test

Print a continuous configuration page.

Service Reports

Error Report

Print an error report.

Service Reports

Extended key map

10-key pad values for job storage.

Speed

Use this item to toggle between high and low.

Default settings

Taylor system defaults (IT managed or self-managed).

Location

A list of available locations appears

This item sets certain printer parameters that are dependent on the location, such as the default paper size and the symbol set. Scroll to the appropriate location and select Yes to set the location. The printer automatically restarts after you change the location.

Line Frequency

This item allows the refresh rate of the touchscreen control to be changed between 50 and 60 Hz.

LED Test

This item allows the testing of the different LED Displays

Display Test

Use this test to that the LEDs and characters on the control- display function correctly. At the beginning of the test, each of the LEDs is turned on one-at-time. Press the OK button to continue to the next LED. After the LED test is complete, the character test begins by testing the pixels on each line. Then, each of the 255 characters is displayed in groups of 16. Press the OK button to continue to the next group of 16 characters. You can cancel the test at any time by pressing the Cancel button.

Button Test

ENWW

Use this test to that the control- buttons function correctly. The display prompts you to press each button.


Table 2-56 Secondary Service menu (M501) (continued) Menu item

Sub-menu item

Description

FW Version

This item shows the current date code of the firmware.

NAND Reset

This item allows the NAND to be reset.

Permanent Config

Allow or prevent the action to be performed.


ENWW

Printer resets (M501) Review the following information about printer resets on an M501 printer. ●

NVRAM initialization (M501)

NVRAM initialization (M501) Use the following procedure to perform an NVRAM initialization on an M501 printer. CAUTION: All HP Jetdirect settings are also reset. Be sure to print a configuration page before performing an NVRAM initialization. Make note of the IP address that is listed on the Jetdirect configuration page. You need to restore the IP address after performing an NVRAM initialization. An NVRAM initialization erases all data stored in the unprotected NVRAM sections. Performing an NVRAM initialization resets the following settings and information: ●

All menu settings are reset to factory default values.

●

All localization settings, including language and country/region, are reset.

After performing an NVRAM initialization, reconfigure any computers that print to this printer so that the computers can recognize the printer.

ENWW

1.

Turn the printer off.

2.

Simultaneously press and hold the up arrow depressed as you turn the printer on.

3.

When the Permanent Storage Init. message appears on the display, release the buttons.

4.

When the printer has finished the NVRAM initialization, it returns to the Ready state.

button and the Cancel

button. Keep these buttons


Service mode functions (all except M501) Review the following information about service mode functions. ●

Service menu (all except M501)

●

Printer resets (all except M501)

●

Format Disk and Partial Clean functions (all except M501)


ENWW

Service menu (all except M501) The Service menu is PIN-protected for added security. Only authorized service people have access to the Service menu. When selecting Service from the list of menus, the printer prompts the to enter an eight-digit personal identification number (PIN). ●

Open the service menu from a touchscreen control

●

Open the service menu from a LCD control

●

Service menu items

NOTE: The printer automatically exits the Service menu after about one minute if no items are selected or changed.

Open the service menu from a touchscreen control Use the following procedure to open the service menu from a touchscreen control . 1.


2.


3.


4.

Enter the following service access code for the printer: ●

10050615 (M506/E50045/M507/E50145)

●

11052715 (M527/E52545/M528/E52645)

Open the service menu from a LCD control Use the following procedure to open the service menu from a LCD control . FutureSmart 3 1.


2.

Use the down arrow

button to scroll to Service, and then press the OK button to select it.

3.

Use the down arrow

button to scroll to Service Access Code, and then press the OK button to select it.

4.

Enter the following service access code for the printer: NOTE:


After entering the PIN, press the OK button.

●

10050615 (M506/E50045/M507/E50145)

●

11052715 (M527/E52545/M528/E52645)

FutureSmart 4

ENWW

1.


2.


Service mode functions (all except M501) 487

3.

Navigate to Service, and then select OK.

4.

Enter the following service access code for the printer: NOTE:

After entering the PIN, select Sign In.

–

10050615 (M506/E50045/M507/E50145)

–

11052715 (M527/E52545/M528/E52645)

Service menu items The following menu items appear in the Service menu. Table 2-57 Service menu (all except M501) First level

Second level

Event Log

Print

Print or view the event log.

Clear Event Log

Clear

Use this item to clear the printer event log.

Cycle Counts

Total Engine Cycles

Set the page count that was stored in NVRAM prior to installing a new formatter.

Cycle Counts

Refurbish Cycle Count

Use this item to record the page count when the printer was refurbished.

Cycle Counts

Document (M527/E52545/ M528/E52645 only)

Total number of pages since the document feeder kit was replaced.

Cycle Counts

Document Feeder Kit Interval (M527/E52545/M528/E52645 only)

Use this item to set the interval that causes the printer to prompt the customer to replace document feeder maintenance kit.

Cycle Counts

Clean Rollers Count (M527/ E52545/M528/E52645 only)

Total number of pages since the document feeder rollers were cleaned.

Cycle Counts

Clean Rollers Interval (M527/ E52545/M528/E52645 only)

Use this item to set the interval that causes the printer to prompt the customer to clean the document feeder rollers and separation pad.

Cycle Counts

ADF Count (M527/E52545/ M528/E52645 only)

Set the total pages fed through the document feeder.

Cycle Counts

Flatbed Count (M527/E52545/ M528/E52645 only)

Set the total pages scanned from the flatbed.

Cycle Counts

ADF Simplex Count (M527/ E52545/M528/E52645 only)

Set the total single-sided pages fed through the document feeder.

Cycle Counts

ADF Duplex Count (M527/ E52545/M528/E52645 only)

Set the total two-sided pages fed through the document feeder.


Value

Description

ENWW

Table 2-57 Service menu (all except M501) (continued) First level

Second level

Value

Cycle Counts

Copy Scan Count (M527/ E52545/M528/E52645 only)

Set the total copy pages that have been scanned.

Cycle Counts

Send Scan Count (M527/ E52545/M528/E52645 only)

Set the number of scanned pages sent to email.

Cycle Counts

Fax Scan Count

Set the number of scanned pages that have been faxed.

NOTE: M527/E52545/M528/ E52645 fax models only. Cycle Counts

Copy Pages Count (M527/ E52545/M528/E52645 only)

Scanner Settings (M527/E52545/M528/ E52645 only)

ADF Settings

Description

Set the number of scanned pages that have been printed. Leading edge front

Set the calibration values.

Leading edge back

WARNING! Do not change these values unless instructed to do so.

Trailing edge front Trailing edge back Left side front Left side back Scanner Settings (M527/E52545/M528/ E52645 only)

Glass Settings

Leading edge glass Left Side Glass

Serial Number

Set the serial number.

Service ID

Use this item to show the date that the printer was first used on the control . This eliminates the need for s to keep paper receipts for proof of warranty.

Cold Reset Paper

When you perform a cold reset, the paper size that is stored in NVRAM is reset to the default factory setting. If you replace a formatter board in a country/ region that uses A4 as the standard paper size, use this menu to reset the default paper size to A4. LETTER and A4 are the only available values.

Low Alerts

Enable Disable

Reset Low Alerts

ENWW

●

Reset to level 1

●

Reset to level 2

●

Reset to level 3

●

Set to non-HP managed mode

Turn on (or off) low alerts (for supplies).



Second level

Value

PTT Test Mode

Test the internal modem for the analog fax accessory.

NOTE: M527/E52545/M528/E52645 fax models only. PTT Test Mode

Hook Operations


Generate Random Data

Select a value from the list.

Generate DTMF Tone Burst


Generate DTMF Continuous Tone


Generate Pulse Burst


Generate Tone Dial Number

Enter dial number.

Generate Pulse Dial Number

Enter dial number.

Generate Single Modem Tone

Range: 1100–2100 Hz

NOTE: M527/E52545/M528/E52645 fax models only. PTT Test Mode NOTE: M527/E52545/M528/E52645 fax models only. PTT Test Mode NOTE: M527/E52545/M528/E52645 fax models only. PTT Test Mode

Off Hook On Hook


Description

NOTE: M527/E52545/M528/E52645 fax models only. PTT Test Mode NOTE: M527/E52545/M528/E52645 fax models only. PTT Test Mode NOTE: M527/E52545/M528/E52645 fax models only. PTT Test Mode

Default = 2100 Hz Line Measurements


Fax Transmit Signal Loss

NOTE: M527/E52545/M528/E52645 fax models only. Test

Test


Continuous Scan (M527/ E52545/M528/E52645 only)

2-sided

Continuous Copy (M527/ E52545/M528/E52645 only)

2-sided

Save to Disk

Save to Disk

ENWW


Second level

Value

Test

Raw Scan (M527/E52545/M528/ E52645 only)

2-sided Mechanical Calibration

Test

Continuous Print from USB

Test

Automatic Calibrations (M527/ E52545/M528/E52645 only)

Disabled

Runtime Configuration (M527/ E52545/M528/E52645 only)

Standard

Test

Description

Enabled*

StandardEIC Workflow WorkflowEIC Reconfigure

ENWW


Printer resets (all except M501) Review the following information and procedures about printer resets. ●

Restore factory-set defaults (all except M501)

●

Restore the service ID (all except M501)

●

Printer cold reset (all except M501)


ENWW

Restore factory-set defaults (all except M501) Use the following procedures to restore the factory-set defaults. ●

Restore factory-set defaults from a touchscreen control

●

Restore factory-set defaults from a LCD control

NOTE:

The printer restarts automatically after the reset operation completes.

Restore factory-set defaults from a touchscreen control Use the following procedure to restore factory-set defaults from a touchscreen control . 1.


2.


3.

●

General Settings (FutureSmart 3) or General (FutureSmart 4).

●

Restore Factory Settings (FutureSmart 3) or Reset Factory Settings (FutureSmart 4).

A verification message advises that completing the reset function might result in loss of data. Touch the Reset button to complete the process.

Restore factory-set defaults from a LCD control Use the following procedure to restore factory-set defaults from a LCD control . FutureSmart 3 1.


button to scroll to

2.

Use the down arrow

button to scroll to General Settings, and then press the OK button to select it.

3.

Use the down arrow it.

button to scroll to Restore Factory Settings, and then press the OK button to select

4.

Use the down arrow

button to scroll to Restore, and then press the OK button to select it.

5.


FutureSmart 4

ENWW

1.

From the Home screen on the printer control , use the arrow keys to navigate to Settings, and then select OK.

2.

Use the down arrow

button to scroll to General, and then press the OK button.

3.

Use the down arrow

button to scroll to Reset Factory Settings, and then press the OK button to select it.

4.



Restore the service ID (all except M501) Use the following procedure to restore the service ID. ●

Restore the service ID

●

Convert the service ID to an actual date

Restore the service ID When replacing the formatter, the date is lost. Use this menu item to reset the date to the original date that the printer was first used. The date format is YYDDD. Use the following formula to calculate the dates: 1.

To calculate YY, subtract 1990 from the calendar year. For instance, if the printer was first used in 2002, calculate YY as follows: 2002 - 1990 = 12. YY = 12.

2.

Subtract 1 from 10 (October is the tenth month of the year): 10 - 1 = 9. ●

Multiply 9 by 30: 9 x 30 = 270 or add 17 to 270: 270 + 17 = 287. Thus, DDD = 287.

Convert the service ID to an actual date Use the printer Service ID number to determine whether the printer is still under warranty. Use the following formula to convert the Service ID into the installation date as follows: 1.

Add 1990 to YY to get the actual year that the printer was installed.

2.

Divide DDD by 30. If there is a remainder, add 1 to the result. This is the month.

3.

The remainder from the calculation in step 2 is the date.

Using the Service ID 12287 as an example, the date conversion is as follows: 1.

12 + 1990 = 2002, so the year is 2002.

2.

287 divided by 30 = 9 with a remainder of 17. Because there is a remainder, add 1 to 9 to get 10, which represents October.

3.

The remainder in step 2 is 17, so that is the date.

The complete date is 17-October-2002. NOTE: A six-day grace period is built into the date system.


ENWW

Printer cold reset (all except M501) Use the following procedures to perform a printer cold reset. ●

Cold reset using the Pre-boot menu from a touchscreen control

●

Cold reset using the Pre-boot menu from a LCD control

Cold reset using the Pre-boot menu from a touchscreen control Use the following procedure to perform a cold reset using the Pre-boot menu from a touchscreen control . CAUTION: This procedure resets all printer configurations and settings to factory defaults (customer configurations and settings are lost). 1.


1

2

2.

Use the down arrow

button to highlight the +3: item, and then touch the OK button.

3.

Use the down arrow

button to highlight the +8:Startup Options item, and then touch the OK button.

4.

Use the down arrow

button to highlight the 2 Cold Reset item, and then touch the OK button to select it.

5.

Touch the Home button to return to the main Pre-boot menu and highlight the 1:Continue item, and then touch the OK button. NOTE:

The printer will initialize.

Cold reset using the Pre-boot menu from a LCD control Use the following procedure to perform a cold reset using the Pre-boot menu from a LCD control . CAUTION: This procedure resets all printer configurations and settings to factory defaults (customer configurations and settings are lost).

ENWW

1.

Press the Cancel

button when you see the 1/8 under the logo.

2.

Use the down arrow

button to highlight the +3: item, and then press the OK button.

3.

Use the down arrow

button to highlight the +8:Startup Options item, and then press the OK button.

4.

Use the down arrow

button to highlight the 2 Cold Reset item, and then press the OK button to select it.

5.

Touch the Home button to return to the main Pre-boot menu and highlight the 1:Continue item, and then touch the OK button.


NOTE:

The printer will initialize.


ENWW

Format Disk and Partial Clean functions (all except M501) Review the following information about the Format Disk and Partial Clean functions. ●

Active and repository firmware locations

●

Partial Clean

●

Format Disk

NOTE:

Only for printers with an optional hard-disk drive (HDD) installed).

Active and repository firmware locations The firmware bundle consists of multiple parts. The main components are the Windows CE Operating System and the printer/peripheral firmware files. There are two locations/partitions on the hard drive where the firmware components are stored: ●

The Active, where the operating system and firmware currently are executing.

●

The Repository, the recovery location.

If the Active location is damaged, or a Partial Clean was performed, the printer automatically copies over the OS and firmware files from the Repository location and the printer recovers. If both the Active and Repository locations are damaged, or a Format Disk was performed, then both locations are gone and the error message 99.09.67 displays on the control- display. The must the firmware to the printer in order for it to function again. CAUTION: The Format Disk option performs a disk initialization for the entire disk. The operating system, firmware files, and third party files (among other files) will be completely lost. HP does not recommend this action.

ENWW


Partial Clean The Partial Clean option erases all partitions and data on the disk drive, except for the firmware repository where a backup copy of the firmware file is stored. This allows the disk drive to be reformatted without having to a firmware upgrade file to return the printer to a bootable state. ●

Execute a Partial Clean

Characteristics of a Partial Clean ●

Customer-defined settings, third-party solutions, firmware files, and the operating system are deleted.

●

Rebooting the printer restores the firmware files from the Repository location, but does not restore any customer-defined settings.

●

For previous HP printers, a Hard Disk Initialization is similar to executing the Partial Clean function for this printer.

CAUTION: HP recommends backing-up printer configuration data before executing a Partial Clean to retain customer-defined settings (if needed). See the Backup/Restore item in the Device Maintenance menu. Reasons for performing Partial Clean ●

The printer continually boots up in an error state. NOTE:

Try clearing the error prior to executing a Partial Clean.

●

The printer will not respond to commands from the control .

●

Executing the Partial Clean function is helpful for troubleshooting hard disk problems.

●

To reset the printer by deleting all solutions and customer-defined settings.

●

The printer default settings are not properly working.


ENWW

Execute a Partial Clean Use the following procedures to execute a Partial Clean on the printer. ●

Execute a Partial Clean from a touchscreen control

●

Execute a Partial Clean from a LCD control

Execute a Partial Clean from a touchscreen control Use the following procedure to execute a Partial Clean from a touchscreen control . CAUTION: This procedure resets all printer configurations and settings to factory defaults (customer configurations and settings are lost). 1.

Touch the middle of the control- display when you see the 1/8 under the logo. Figure 2-155 Open the Pre-boot menu

1

2

2.

Use the down arrow


3.

Use the down arrow

button to highlight Partial Clean and then touch the OK button.

4.

Touch the OK button again.

5.

Touch the Home button to highlight Continue, and then touch the OK button. NOTE:

The printer initializes.

Execute a Partial Clean from a LCD control Use the following procedure to execute a Partial Clean from a LCD control . CAUTION: This procedure resets all printer configurations and settings to factory defaults (customer configurations and settings are lost). 1.

Press the Cancel

2.

Use the down arrow


3.

Use the down arrow

button to highlight Partial Clean and then press the OK button.

4.

Press the OK button again.

5.

Press the Home button to highlight Continue, and then press the OK button. NOTE:

ENWW


The printer initializes.


Format Disk The Format Disk option erases the entire disk drive. ●

Execute a Format Disk

CAUTION:

After executing a Format Disk option, the printer is not bootable.

Characteristics of a Format Disk ●

Customer-defined settings, third-party solutions, firmware files, and the operating system are deleted. NOTE:

Rebooting the printer does not restore the firmware files.

●

Rebooting the printer restores the firmware files from the Repository location, but does not restore any customer-defined settings.

●

After executing the Format Disk function, the message 99.09.67 displays on the control .

●

After executing the Format Disk function, the printer firmware must be reloaded.

CAUTION: HP recommends not using the Format Disk option unless an error occurs and the solution in the printer service manual recommends this solution. After executing the Format Disk function, the printer is unusable. HP recommends backing-up printer configuration data before executing a Format Disk to retain customerdefined settings (if needed). See the Backup/Restore item in the Device Maintenance menu. Reasons for performing Format Disk ●

The printer continually boots up in an error state. NOTE:

Try clearing the error prior to executing a Format Disk.

●

The printer will not respond to commands from the control .

●

Executing the Format Disk function is helpful for troubleshooting hard disk problems.

●

To reset the printer by deleting all solutions and customer-defined settings.


ENWW

Execute a Format Disk Use the following procedures to execute a Format Disk on the printer. ●

Execute a Format Disk from a touchscreen control

●

Execute a Format Disk from a LCD control

Execute a Format Disk from a touchscreen control Use the following procedure to execute a Format Disk from a touchscreen control . CAUTION: This procedure resets all printer configurations and settings to factory defaults (customer configurations and settings are lost). 1.

Touch the middle of the control- display when you see the 1/8 under the logo. Figure 2-156 Open the Pre-boot menu

1

2

2.

Use the down arrow


3.

Use the down arrow

button to highlight Format Disk, and then touch the OK button.

4.

Touch the OK button again. NOTE:

When the Format Disk operation is complete, reload the printer firmware.

Execute a Format Disk from a LCD control Use the following procedure to execute a Format Disk from a LCD control . CAUTION: This procedure resets all printer configurations and settings to factory defaults (customer configurations and settings are lost). 1.

Press the Cancel

2.

Use the down arrow


3.

Use the down arrow

button to highlight Format Disk, and then press the OK button.

4.

Press the OK button again. NOTE:

ENWW


When the Format Disk operation is complete, reload the printer firmware.


Firmware upgrades (M501) HP offers periodic printer updates, new Web Services apps, and new features to existing Web Services apps. Follow these steps to update the firmware for a single printer. When you update the firmware, Web Service apps will update automatically. ●

Determine the installed revision of firmware (M501)

●

Method one: Update the firmware using the control (M501)

●

Method two: Update the firmware using the Firmware Update Utility (M501)

There are two ed methods to perform a firmware update on this printer. Use only one of the following methods to update the printer firmware.

Determine the installed revision of firmware (M501) Use the following procedure to determine the installed revision of firmware on an M501 printer. NOTE: Print a configuration page to determine the installed revision of firmware. 1.


2.

Open the Reports menu.

3.

Select Configuration Report.

Figure 2-157 Configuration page firmware date code location (M501)

Firmware Datecode


ENWW

Method one: Update the firmware using the control (M501) Use these steps to load the firmware from the control (for network-connected printers only), and/or set the printer to automatically load future firmware updates. For USB-connected printers, use method two. 1.

Make sure the printer is connected to a wired (Ethernet) or wireless network with an active Internet connection. NOTE:

2.

From the Home screen on the printer control , open the Setup menu. ●

3.

For standard control s, press the left or right arrow button.

Scroll to and open the Service menu, and then open the LaserJet Update menu. NOTE:

4.

The printer must be connected to the internet to update the firmware via a network connection.

If the LaserJet Update option is not listed, use method two.

Check for updates. ●

For standard control s, select Check for Update.

NOTE: The printer automatically checks for an update, and if a newer version is detected, the update process automatically starts. 5.

Set the printer to automatically update the firmware when updates become available. From the Home screen on the printer control , open the Setup menu. ●

For standard control s, press the left or right arrow button.

Scroll to and open the Service menu, open the LaserJet Update menu, and then select the Manage Updates menu. Set the printer to automatically update the firmware. ●

For standard control s, set the Allow Updates option to YES, and then set the Automatic Check option to ON.

Method two: Update the firmware using the Firmware Update Utility (M501) Use these steps to manually and install the Firmware Update Utility from HP.com. NOTE: This method is the only firmware update option available for printers connected to the computer via a USB cable. It also works for printers connected to a network.

ENWW

1.

Go to www.hp.com/go/, click the Drivers & Software link, type the printer name in the search field, press the ENTER button, and then select the printer from the list of search results.

2.

Select the operating system.

3.

Under the Firmware section, locate the Firmware Update Utility.

4.

Click , click Run, and then click Run again.

5.

When the utility launches, select the printer from the drop-down list, and then click Send Firmware.

Firmware upgrades (M501) 503

NOTE: To print a configuration page to the installed firmware version before or after the update process, click Print Config. 6.

Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the installation, and then click the Exit button to close the utility.


ENWW

Firmware upgrades (all except M501) Review the following information about ing firmware upgrades. ●

Determine the installed revision of firmware (all except M501)

●

Perform a firmware upgrade (all except M501)

To the most recent firmware upgrade for the printer, go to: ●

In the US, go to http://www.hp.com//ljM501 or http://www.hp.com//ljM506 or http://www.hp.com//ljE50045 or http://www.hp.com//ljM507 or http://www.hp.com/ /ljE50145 or http://www.hp.com//ljM527mfp or http://www.hp.com//ljE52545mfp or http://www.hp.com//ljM528mfp or http://www.hp.com//E52645mfp. a.

Select Get drivers, Software, and Firmware, and then select the appropriate product by name. NOTE: More than one printer model might be listed. Make sure to select the correct model so that the upgraded firmware s all of the printer functions.

●

b.

Select the driver language and operating system.

c.

Locate the firmware , and then select .

Outside the U.S., go to www.hp.com/. a.

Select your country/region.

b.

Select Drivers & s.

c.

Enter the product name in the Find my product dialogue box, and then select Go. TIP: Click on the How do I find my product name/number? link to see a short video on identifying the printer name and number.

d.

Select the appropriate product by name. NOTE: More than one printer model might be listed. Make sure to select the correct model so that the upgraded firmware s all of the printer functions.

ENWW

e.

Select the driver language and operating system.

f.

Locate the firmware , and then select .

Firmware upgrades (all except M501) 505

Determine the installed revision of firmware (all except M501) Use the following procedures to determine the installed revision of firmware. ●

Print the configuration page from a touchscreen control

●

Print the configuration page from a LCD control

NOTE: Print a configuration page to determine the installed revision of firmware.

Print the configuration page from a touchscreen control Use the following procedure to print the configuration page from a touchscreen control . 1.

From the Home screen on the printer control , scroll to and touch the istration button (FutureSmart 3), or scroll to and touch the Reports button (FutureSmart 4).

2.


Reports (FutureSmart 3)

●


3.

Touch Configuration Page to select it.

4.

Touch the Print button to print the pages.

Print the configuration page from a LCD control Use the following procedure to print the configuration page from a LCD control . FutureSmart 3 1.


2.


Reports

●


3.

Use the down arrow

4.

Use the up arrow

button to scroll to

button to scroll to Configuration Page, and then press the OK button to select it.

button to scroll to Print, and then press the OK button to print the pages.

FutureSmart 4 1.

From the Home screen on the printer control , use the arrow keys to navigate to Reports, and then press the OK button.

2.

Use the down arrow

button to scroll to Configuration/Status Pages, and then press the OK button.

3.

Use the down arrow

button to scroll to Configuration Page, and then press the OK button.

4.

Use the down arrow

to scroll down to Cancel, and then use the right arrow to highlight the print icon



ENWW

Figure 2-158 Configuration page firmware version (all except M501)

Firmware Revision HP LaserJet M506

ENWW


Perform a firmware upgrade (all except M501) The firmware bundle is a .bdl file. This file requires an interactive upgrade method. The traditional FTP, LPR, or Port 9100 methods of upgrading are not available. ●

HP Embedded Web Server (all except M501)

●

USB flash drive (Pre-boot menu) (all except M501)

●

USB flash drive (control menu) (all except M501)

Use one of the following methods to upgrade the firmware for this printer.

HP Embedded Web Server (all except M501) Use the following procedure to perform a firmware upgrade using the HP Embedded Web Server. NOTE: The printer should be at the Ready state. The firmware update might take 10 minutes or longer based on the input/output (I/O) transfer rates and the time it takes for the printer to reinitialize. 1.

Open an Internet browser window.

2.

Enter the printer IP address in the URL line.

3.

Select the Firmware Upgrade link from the General tab or from the Troubleshooting tab.

4.

Browse to the location that the firmware upgrade file was ed to, and then select the firmware file. The file has a .bdl file extension. Select the Install button to perform the upgrade. NOTE: Do not close the browser window OR interrupt communication until the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) displays the confirmation page.

5.

After the printer reinitializes, print a configuration page and that the latest firmware version has been installed.


ENWW

USB flash drive (Pre-boot menu) (all except M501) Use the following procedures to perform a firmware upgrade using a USB flash drive and the Pre-boot menu. ●

USB flash drive firmware (Pre-boot menu) update from a touchscreen control

●

USB flash drive firmware (Pre-boot menu) update from a LCD control

IMPORTANT: Only use this method of performing a firmware upgrade if the printer cannot initialize to the Ready state. USB flash drive firmware (Pre-boot menu) update from a touchscreen control Use the following procedure to perform a USB flash drive firmware (Pre-boot menu) update from a touchscreen control . 1.

Copy the .bdl file to a portable USB flash drive.

2.


1

2

3.

Touch the down arrow

button to highlight +3 , and then touch the OK button.

4.

If necessary, touch the down arrow

5.

Insert the USB flash drive with the .bdl file on it into the USB port on the printer.

button to highlight +1 , and then touch the OK button.

NOTE: If the error message No USB Thumbdrive Files Found displays on the control display, try using a different portable storage device. 6.


button to highlight USB Thumbdrive, and then touch the OK button.

7.


button to highlight the .bdl file, and then touch the OK button.

NOTE:

The upgrade process can take 10 minutes or longer to complete.

TIP: If there is more than one .bdl file on the storage device, make sure to select the correct file for this printer. 8.

When the message Complete displays on the control display, touch the down arrow button several times until the message Continue displays.

9.

Touch the OK button to begin the upgrade. When the upgrade is complete, the printer will initialize to the Ready state.

10. When the upgrade process is complete, print a configuration page and that the upgrade firmware version was installed.

ENWW


USB flash drive firmware (Pre-boot menu) update from a LCD control Use the following procedure to perform a USB flash drive firmware (Pre-boot menu) update from a LCD control . 1.

Press the Cancel


2.

Press the down arrow

3.

If necessary, press the down arrow

4.


button to highlight +3 , and then press the OK button. button to highlight +1 , and then press the OK button.

NOTE: If the error message No USB Thumbdrive Files Found displays on the control display, try using a different portable storage device. 5.


button to highlight USB Thumbdrive, and then press the OK button.

6.


button to highlight the .bdl file, and then press the OK button.

NOTE:


TIP: If there is more than one .bdl file on the storage device, make sure to select the correct file for this printer. 7.

When the message Complete displays on the control display, turn the printer power off, and then on again.

8.

When the upgrade process is complete, print a configuration page and that the upgrade firmware version was installed.


ENWW

USB flash drive (control menu) (all except M501) Use the following procedures to perform a firmware upgrade using a USB flash drive and the control menu. ●

USB flash drive firmware (control menu) update from a touchscreen control

●

USB flash drive firmware (control menu) update from a LCD control

NOTE: USB flash drives that are not using a FAT32 format, or do not have a CD formatted partition, might not be recognized by the printer. If the printer does not recognize a USB flash drive, try using a different USB flash drive. TIP: The USB port on the printer must be enabled. If it is disabled, use the Enable Retrieve from USB item in the General Settings menu to enable it. USB flash drive firmware (control menu) update from a touchscreen control Use the following procedure to perform a USB flash drive firmware (control menu) update from a touchscreen control . 1.

Copy the .bdl file to a portable USB flash drive.

2.

Turn the printer on, and then wait until it reaches the Ready state.

3.


4.

Open the Maintenance menu (FutureSmart 4).

5.

Touch the USB Firmware Upgrade button.

6.


7.

Touch the .bdl file, and then touch the Upgrade button. TIP: If there is more than one .bdl file on the storage device, make sure to select the correct file for this printer.

8.

Select one of the following options: ●

Upgrade NOTE:

9.


●

Re-install

●

Downgrade

When the upgrade is complete, the printer will initialize to the Ready state. Print a configuration page and that the upgrade firmware version was installed.

USB flash drive firmware (control menu) update from a LCD control Use the following procedure to perform a USB flash drive firmware (control menu) update from a LCD control . FutureSmart 3

ENWW


1.


2.



USB Firmware Upgrade

3.


4.

If necessary, use the down arrow button to select.

5.

Use the down arrow upgrade.

button to scroll to the appropriate .bdl file, and then press the OK

button to scroll to Upgrade, and then press the OK button to start the firmware

NOTE: If the firmware in the .bdl file on the portable USB storage device matches the installed firmware on the printer, Upgrade is replaced by Re-Install. FutureSmart 4 1.


2.


3.

Navigate to USB Firmware Upgrade, and then select OK.

4.


5.

If necessary, use the down arrow button to select.

button to scroll to the appropriate .bdl file, and then press the OK

Solve fax or email problems Fax or email troubleshooting information is not provided in this service manual. The most current information is available in WISE or HP Channel Services Network (CSN). Search using model number then use "fax troubleshooting" as the search term. HP service personnel, go to one of the following Web-based Interactive Search Engines (WISE) sites: ●

●

AMS –

https://.hp.com/wise/home/ams-en

–

https://.hp.com/wise/home/ams-es

–

https://.hp.com/wise/home/ams-pt

APJ –

https://.hp.com/wise/home/apj-en

–

https://.hp.com/wise/home/apj-ja

–

https://.hp.com/wise/home/apj-ko


ENWW

●

–

https://.hp.com/wise/home/apj-zh-Hans

–

https://.hp.com/wise/home/apj-zh-Hant

EMEA –

https://.hp.com/wise/home/emea-en

Channel partners, go to HP Channel Services Network (CSN) at http://www.hp.com/partners/csn.

ENWW

Solve fax or email problems 513


ENWW

A

Printer specifications

Review the following specifications for the printers.

ENWW

●

Printer dimensions

●

Printer space requirements

●

Power consumption, electrical specifications, and acoustic emissions

●

Operating-environment range

●

Certificate of Volatility

515

Printer dimensions Review the dimensions for the printers. ●

HP LaserJet Pro M501 dimensions

●

HP LaserJet Enterprise M506/E50045/M507/E50145 dimensions

●

HP LaserJet Enterprise MFP M527/E52545/M528/E52645 dimensions

HP LaserJet Pro M501 dimensions Review the following dimensions for the M501 printer. NOTE: An optional 550-sheet paper feeder is available for this printer. The M501 printer s one paper feeder. Figure A-1 Dimensions for the base printer

1

1 3

2 3

2

Table A-1 Dimensions for the base printer Measurement

Printer fully closed

Printer fully opened

1. Height

289 mm (11.4 in)

289 mm (11.4 in)

2. Depth

Tray 2 dust cover closed: 376 mm (14.8 in)

569 mm (22.4 in)

Tray 2 dust cover open: 444 mm (17.5 in) 3. Width

410 mm (16.1 in)

Weight

11.6 kg (25.6 lb)

516 Appendix A Printer specifications

410 mm (16.1 in)

ENWW

Figure A-2 Dimensions for the printer with the 1 x 550-sheet paper feeder

1

1

2

3

2

3

Table A-2 Dimensions for the printer with the 1 x 550-sheet paper feeder Measurement

Printer and accessories fully closed

Printer and accessories fully opened1

1. Height

419 mm (16.5 in)

419 mm (16.5 in)

2. Depth


569 mm (22.4 in)

Tray 2 dust cover open: 444 mm (17.5 in)

1

3. Width

410 mm (16.1 in)

Weight

15.4 kg (34 lb)

410 mm (16.1 in)

These values are subject to change. For current information, go to http://www.hp.com//ljM501 or http://www.hp.com// ljM506 or http://www.hp.com//ljE50045 or http://www.hp.com//ljM507 or http://www.hp.com//ljE50145 or http://www.hp.com//ljM527mfp or http://www.hp.com//ljE52545mfp or http://www.hp.com//ljM528mfp or http://www.hp.com//E52645mfp.

Figure A-3 Dimensions for the 1 x 550-sheet paper feeder

1 3

1

2

2

3 Table A-3 Dimensions for the 1 x 550-sheet paper feeder Measurement

Value

1. Height

130 mm (5.1 in)

2. Depth

Tray closed: 376 mm (14.8 in) Tray opened: 569 mm (22.4 in)

ENWW

3. Width

410 mm (16.1 in)

Weight

3.8 kg (8.4 lb)

Printer dimensions 517

HP LaserJet Enterprise M506/E50045/M507/E50145 dimensions Review the following dimensions for the M506/E50045/M507/E50145 printer. NOTE: An optional 550-sheet paper feeder is available for this printer. The M506/M507/E50145 printer s up to three of these paper feeders at a time. Figure A-4 M506/M507 dimensions for the n and dn models; E50045/E50145 dimensions for the dn model

1

1 3

2 3

2

Table A-4 M506/M507 dimensions for the n and dn models; E50045/E50145 dimensions for the dn model Measurement



1. Height

296 mm (11.7 in)

296 mm (11.7 in)

2. Depth


569 mm (22.4 in)


410 mm (16.1 in)

Weight

12 kg (26.5 lb)

410 mm (16.1 in)

Figure A-5 M506/M507 dimensions for the x model

1 3

1

2

3

2

Table A-5 M506/M507 dimensions for the x model Measurement



1. Height

415 mm (16.3 in)

487 mm (19.2 in)

2. Depth


569 mm (22.4 in)


410 mm (16.1 in)

Weight

13.4 kg (29.5 lb)


410 mm (16.1 in)

ENWW


1

1

2

3

2


Value

1. Height

130 mm (5.1 in)

2. Depth


3. Width

410 mm (16.1 in)

Weight

1.4 kg (3 lb)

Figure A-7 Dimensions for the cabinet/stand

1 3

2

1 3

2

Table A-7 Dimensions for the cabinet/stand Measurement

Value

1. Height

381 mm (15.0 in)

2. Depth

Door closed: 632 mm (24.9 in) Door opened and rear castors rotated: 865 mm (34.0 in)

3. Width


Weight

ENWW

9.0 kg (20 lb)


Figure A-8 M506/E50045/M507/E50145 dimensions for the printer with three 1 x 550-sheet paper feeders and the cabinet/stand

1

3

2

1

3

2

Table A-8 M506/E50045/M507/E50145 dimensions for the printer with three 1 x 550-sheet paper feeders and the cabinet/ stand

1

Measurement



1. Height

1067 mm (42.0 in)

1067 mm (42.0 in)

2. Depth

632 mm (24.9 in)

865 mm (34.0 in)

3. Width

600 mm (23.6 in)

630 mm (24.8 in)

Weight

25.2 kg (55.5 lb)

Do not extend more than one paper tray at a time.

HP LaserJet Enterprise MFP M527/E52545/M528/E52645 dimensions Review the following dimensions for the M527/E52545/M528/E52645 printer. NOTE: An optional 550-sheet paper feeder is available for this printer. The M527/E52545/M528/E52645 printer s up to three of these paper feeders at a time.


ENWW

Figure A-9 M527/M528 dimensions for the dn, f, c, and z models; E52545/E52645 dimensions for the dn and c models

1

1

3

2

3

2

Table A-9 M527/M528 dimensions for the dn, f, c, and z models; E52545/E52645 dimensions for the dn and c models Measurement



1. Height

497 mm (19.6 in)

750 mm (29.5 in)

2. Depth


674 mm (26.5 in)


482 mm (19.0 in)

Weight

23 kg (50.8 lb)

482 mm (19.0 in)


1 3

1

2

2


Value

1. Height

130 mm (5.1 in)

2. Depth


ENWW

3. Width

410 mm (16.1 in)

Weight

1.4 kg (3 lb)


Figure A-11 Dimensions for the cabinet/stand

1 3

2

1 3

2

Table A-11 Dimensions for the cabinet/stand Measurement

Value

1. Height

381 mm (15.0 in)

2. Depth


3. Width


Weight


9.0 kg (20 lb)

ENWW

Figure A-12 M527/E52545/M528/E52645 dimensions for the printer with three 1 x 550-sheet paper feeders and the cabinet/stand

1

1

3

2

3

2

Table A-12 M527/E52545/M528/E52645 dimensions for the printer with three 1 x 550-sheet paper feeders and the cabinet/stand Measurement



1. Height

1268 mm (49.9 in)

1521 mm (59.9 in)

2. Depth

632 mm (24.9 in)

865 mm (34.0 in)

3. Width

600 mm (23.6 in)

630 mm (24.8 in)

Weight

36.2 kg (79.8 lb)

1

Do not extend more than one paper tray at a time.

Printer space requirements HP recommends that the following distances be added to the printer dimensions provided in this chapter to make sure there is sufficient space to open doors and covers, and to provide proper ventilation. See "HP LaserJet Enterprise M506/M507/E50145 dimensions" or "HP LaserJet Enterprise MFP M527/M528/ E52645 dimensions" in the Troubleshooting Manual. ●

ENWW

From the left-side or right-side of the printer to an obstruction, add:

Printer space requirements 523

– ●

From the front-side of the printer to an obstruction, add: –

●

430 mm (17 in)

610 mm (24 in)

From the back-side of the printer to an obstruction, add: –

460 mm (18 in)

Power consumption, electrical specifications, and acoustic emissions Review the following information about power consumption, electrical specifications, and acoustic emissions. See http://www.hp.com//ljM501 or http://www.hp.com//ljM506 or http://www.hp.com// ljE50045 or http://www.hp.com//ljM507 or http://www.hp.com//ljE50145 or http://www.hp.com//ljM527mfp or http://www.hp.com//ljE52545mfp or http://www.hp.com/ /ljM528mfp or http://www.hp.com//E52645mfp for current information. CAUTION: Power requirements are based on the country/region where the printer is sold. Do not convert operating voltages. This will damage the printer and void the printer warranty.

Operating-environment range Review the operating-environment range. Table A-13 Operating-environment specifications1

1

Environment

Recommended

Allowed

Temperature

17° to 25°C (62.6° to 77°F)

15° to 30°C (59° to 86°F)

Relative humidity

30% to 70% relative humidity (RH)

10% to 80% RH

These values are subject to change. For current information, go to http://www.hp.com//ljM501 or http://www.hp.com// ljM506 or http://www.hp.com//ljE50045 or http://www.hp.com//ljM507 or http://www.hp.com//ljE50145 or http://www.hp.com//ljM527mfp or http://www.hp.com//ljE52545mfp or http://www.hp.com//ljM528mfp or http://www.hp.com//E52645mfp.

Certificate of Volatility Review the certificates of volatility for the printers.


ENWW

Figure A-13 Certificate of Volatility (1 of 2; M501) Hewlett-Packard Certificate of Volatility Part Number: Address: J8H60A=M501n HP Development Company J8H61A=M501dn 11311 Chinden Blvd Boise, ID 83714

Model: HP LaserJet Pro M501

Volatile Memory Does the device contain volatile memory (Memory whose contents are lost when power is removed)? Yes No If Yes please describe the type, size, function, and steps to clear the memory below Type (SRAM, DRAM, etc): Size: Modifiable: Function: Used for temporary Steps to clear memory: 256MB When the printer is powered storage during the processing OFF, the memory is erased. of jobs and for applications running on the OS. Yes No Type (SRAM, DRAM, etc):

Size:

256MB Type (SRAM, DRAM, etc):

Size:

Modifiable:

Yes

Steps to clear memory:

Used for temporary storage during the processing of jobs and for applications running on the OS.

When the printer is powered OFF, the memory is erased.

No

Modifiable:

Yes

Function:

. Function:


No

Non-Volatile Memory Does the device contain non-volatile memory (Memory whose contents are retained when power is removed)? Yes No If Yes please describe the type, size, function, and steps to clear the memory below Type (Flash, EEPROM, etc):

Size:

2GB Type (Flash, EEPROM, etc):

Size:

Modifiable:

Yes

Modifiable:

Yes Type (Flash, EEPROM, etc):

Size:

No


Device Firmware Function:


Function:


No

Modifiable:

Yes

Function:

No

Mass Storage Does the device contain mass storage memory (Hard Disk Drive, Tape Backup)? Yes No If Yes please describe the type, size, function, and steps to clear the memory below Type (HDD, Tape, etc):

Size:

Modifiable:

Yes Type (HDD, Tape, etc):

Size:

Modifiable:

Yes

Function:


Function:


No

No

USB Does the item accept USB input and if so, for what purpose (i.e Print Jobs, device firmware updates, scan )? Yes No If Yes please describe below The front USB host can accept print jobs, scan s, photos and can be used to printer firmware. Can any data other than scan be sent to the USB device)? Yes No If Yes please describe below Rear USB host when configured will accept stored jobs, encrypted files stored and deleted by .

ENWW

Certificate of Volatility 525

Figure A-14 Certificate of Volatility (2 of 2; M501) RF/RFID Does the item use RF or RFID for receive or transmit of any data including remote diagnostics. (e.g. Cellular phone, Bluetooth) Yes No If Yes please describe below Purpose: Wireless Information string Frequency: Bandwidth: Modulation: Effective Radiate Power (ERP): Specifications:

Other Transmission Capabilities Does the device employ any other methods of non-wired access to transmit or receive any data whatsoever (e.g. anything other than standard hard wired T/IP, direct USB, or parallel connections)? Yes No If Yes please describe below: Purpose: Frequency: Bandwidth: Modulation: Effective Radiate Power (ERP): Specifications:

Other Capabilities Does the device employ any other method of communications such as a Modem to transmit or receive any data whatsoever? Yes No If Yes please describe below: Purpose: Specifications

Figure A-15 Certificate of Volatility (1 of 2; M506) Model: LaserJet Enterprise M506

HP Certificate of Volatility Part Number: M506n = F2A68A M506dn = F2A69A M506x = F2A70A Volatile Memory

Address: HP Development Company 11311 Chinden Blvd Boise, ID 83714

Does the device contain volatile memory (Memory whose contents are lost when power is removed)? Yes No If Yes please describe the type, size, function, and steps to clear the memory below Type (SRAM, DRAM, etc):

Size:

DRAM

512MB

Modifiable:

Type (SRAM, DRAM, etc):

Size:

Yes

No

Modifiable:

Yes Type (SRAM, DRAM, etc):

Size:

Function:


Operation system and print buffer

There are no steps to clear this data.

Function:


Function:


No

Modifiable:

Yes

No


Size:

EEPROM

32KB

Type (Flash, EEPROM, etc):

Size:

SPI

4MB


Size:

Modifiable:

Yes

No

Modifiable:

Yes

No

Modifiable:

None

Yes

Function:


Store customer setting data for backup/restore


Function:


BIOS


Function:


No


eMMC

Size:

4GB

Type (HDD, Tape, etc):

Size:

HDD

320GB

Modifiable:

Yes

No

Modifiable:

Yes

No

Function:


OS and data

Firmware update

Function:


OS and data

Firmware update

USB Does the item accept USB input and if so, for what purpose (i.e Print Jobs, device firmware updates, scan )? Yes No If Yes please describe below Walk-up USB print Can any data other than scan be sent to the USB device)? Yes No If Yes please describe below


ENWW

Figure A-16 Certificate of Volatility (2 of 2; M506) RF/RFID Does the item use RF or RFID for receive or transmit of any data including remote diagnostics. (e.g. Cellular phone, Bluetooth) Yes No If Yes please describe below Purpose Frequency:) Bandwidth: Modulation: Effective Radiate Power (ERP): Specifications:

Other Transmission Capabilities Does the device employ any other methods of non-wired access to transmit or receive any data whatsoever (e.g. anything Yes No If Yes please describe below: other than standard hard wired T/IP, direct USB, or parallel connections)? Purpose: Wireless direct print. Frequency: 2.4Ghz Bandwidth: Modulation: Effective Radiate Power (ERP: Specifications: 802.11 b/g/n

Other Capabilities Does the device employ any other method of communications such as a Modem to transmit or receive any data whatsoever? Yes No If Yes please describe below: Purpose: NFC; to tap to print only Specifications: NFC Tag Type 4 ISO 14443B

Author Information Name:

Title: Security Technical Marketing Engineer

Email:

Business Unit: IPG Date Prepared: 06/29/15

ENWW


Figure A-17 Certificate of Volatility (1 of 2; M527) HP Certificate of Volatility Model: Part Number: LaserJet Enterprise M527 M527dn = F2A76A M527f = F2A77A M527z = F2A78A Volatile Memory

Address: HP Development Company 11311 Chinden Blvd Boise, ID 83714

Does the device contain volatile memory (Memory whose contents are lost when power is removed)? Yes No If Yes please describe the type, size, function, and steps to clear the memory below Type (SRAM, DRAM, etc):

Size:

DRAM

1792MB

Modifiable:


Size:

Yes

No

Modifiable:

Yes Type (SRAM, DRAM, etc):

Size:

Function:


Operation system and print buffer


Function:


Function:


No

Modifiable:

Yes

No


Size:

EEPROM

32KB


Size:

SPI

4MB


Size:

Modifiable:

Yes

No

Modifiable:

Yes

No

Modifiable:

None

Yes

Function:




Function:


BIOS


Function:


No


eMMC

Size:

16GB


Size:

HDD

320GB

Modifiable:

Yes

No

Modifiable:

Yes

No

Function:


OS and data

Firmware update

Function:


OS and data

Firmware update

USB Does the item accept USB input and if so, for what purpose (i.e Print Jobs, device firmware updates, scan )? Yes No If Yes please describe below Walk-up USB print Can any data other than scan be sent to the USB device)? Yes No If Yes please describe below


ENWW

Figure A-18 Certificate of Volatility (2 of 2; M527) RF/RFID Does the item use RF or RFID for receive or transmit of any data including remote diagnostics. (e.g. Cellular phone, Bluetooth) Yes No If Yes please describe below Purpose Frequency:) Bandwidth: Modulation: Effective Radiate Power (ERP): Specifications:

Other Transmission Capabilities Does the device employ any other methods of non-wired access to transmit or receive any data whatsoever (e.g. anything Yes No If Yes please describe below: other than standard hard wired T/IP, direct USB, or parallel connections)? Purpose: Wireless direct print. Frequency: 2.4Ghz Bandwidth: Modulation: Effective Radiate Power (ERP: Specifications: 802.11 b/g/n

Other Capabilities Does the device employ any other method of communications such as a Modem to transmit or receive any data whatsoever? Yes No If Yes please describe below: Purpose: NFC; to tap to print only Specifications: NFC Tag Type 4 ISO 14443B

Author Information Name:

Title: Security Technical Marketing Engineer

Email:

Business Unit: IPG Date Prepared: 06/29/15

ENWW


Figure A-19 Certificate of Volatility (1 of 2; M507/E50145) Model: HP LaserJet Enterprise M507 series HP LaserJet Managed Enterprise E50145 series

Hewlett-Packard Certificate of Volatility Part Number: Address: Enterprise Managed Hewlett Packard Company 1PV86A=M507n 1PU51A=E50145dn 11311 Chinden Blvd Boise, ID 83714 1PV87A=M507dn 1PV88A=M507x 1PV89A=M507dng

Volatile Memory Does the device contain volatile memory (Memory whose contents are lost when power is removed)? Yes No If Yes please describe the type, size, function, and steps to clear the memory below Type (SRAM, DRAM, etc): Size: Modifiable: Function: Operation system and Steps to clear memory: When the printer is powered off print/scan buffer DDR3 - DRAM

1GB

the memory is erased.

Yes

No


Size:

Modifiable:


Size:

Modifiable:

Yes Yes

Function:

No


. Function:


No


Size:

IOD EEPROM

32KB

Type (Flash, EEPROM, etc): SPI Flash

Size:

4MB


Size:

Modifiable:

Yes

No

Modifiable:

Yes

No

Modifiable:

Yes

Function:




Function:


Contains the boot code and factory product configuration data required for the device to function. modifications are limited to ing digitally signed HP firmware images.

There are no steps to clear this data

Function:


No


Size:

HDD

320GB


Size:

EMMC

8GB


Modifiable:

Yes

No

Modifiable:

Yes

No

Function:


OS and data

Firmware update

Function:


OS and data

Firmware update

ENWW

Figure A-20 Certificate of Volatility (2 of 2; M507/E50145) USB Does the item accept USB input and if so, for what purpose (i.e Print Jobs, device firmware updates, scan )? Yes No If Yes please describe below Print jobs, HP digitally signed firmware upgrades, 3rd party application loading. USB ports can be disabled. Can any data other than scan be sent to the USB device)? Yes No If Yes please describe below Diagnostic service logs can be ed. Print files can be printed via a USB thumb drive.

RF/RFID Does the item use RF or RFID for receive or transmit of any data including remote diagnostics. (e.g. Cellular phone, Bluetooth) Yes No If Yes please describe below Purpose: Frequency: Bandwidth: Modulation: Effective Radiate Power (ERP): Specifications:

Other Transmission Capabilities Does the device employ any other methods of non-wired access to transmit or receive any data whatsoever (e.g. anything Yes No If Yes please describe below: other than standard hard wired T/IP, direct USB, or parallel connections)? Purpose: WiFi Direct Print Frequency: 2.4 GHz, 5 GHz Bandwidth: 2401 - 2495 MHz; depending on selected channel in 2.4GHz band. 5180 - 5825 MHz; depending on selected channel in 5GHz band. Modulation: Effective Radiate Power (ERP): Specifications: 802.11 b/g/n

Other Transmission Capabilities Does the device employ any other methods of non-wired access to transmit or receive any data whatsoever (e.g. anything other than standard hard wired T/IP, direct USB, or parallel connections)? Yes No If Yes please describe below: Purpose: Device Beaconing, Secure Print Apps Frequency: 2.4 GHz Bandwidth: 2400-2483.5 MHz; depending on selected channel. Modulation: Effective Radiate Power (ERP): Specifications: BTLE4.0 compliant

Other Capabilities Does the device employ any other method of communications such as a Modem to transmit or receive any data whatsoever? Yes No If Yes please describe below: Purpose: Specifications:

ENWW


Figure A-21 Certificate of Volatility (1 of 2; M528/E52645) Model: HP LaserJet Enterprise M528 series HP LaserJet Managed Enterprise E52645 series

Hewlett-Packard Certificate of Volatility Part Number: Address: Enterprise Managed Hewlett Packard Company 1PV64A=M528dn 1PS54A=E52645dn 11311 Chinden Blvd Boise, ID 83714 1PV65A=M528f 1PS55A=E52645c 1PV66A=M528c 1PV67A=M528z

Volatile Memory Does the device contain volatile memory (Memory whose contents are lost when power is removed)? Yes No If Yes please describe the type, size, function, and steps to clear the memory below Type (SRAM, DRAM, etc): Size: Modifiable: Function: Operation system and Steps to clear memory: When the printer is powered off print/scan buffer DDR3 - DRAM

1GB

the memory is erased.

Yes

No


Size:

Modifiable:


Size:

Modifiable:

Yes Yes

Function:

No


. Function:


No


Size:

IOD EEPROM

32KB

Type (Flash, EEPROM, etc): SPI Flash

Size:

4MB


Size:

Modifiable:

Yes

No

Modifiable:

Yes

No

Modifiable:

Yes

Function:




Function:


Contains the boot code and factory product configuration data required for the device to function. modifications are limited to ing digitally signed HP firmware images.

There are no steps to clear this data

Function:


No


Size:

HDD

320GB


Size:

EMMC

8GB


Modifiable:

Yes

No

Modifiable:

Yes

No

Function:


OS and data

Firmware update

Function:


OS and data

Firmware update

ENWW

Figure A-22 Certificate of Volatility (2 of 2; M528/E52645) USB Does the item accept USB input and if so, for what purpose (i.e Print Jobs, device firmware updates, scan )? Yes No If Yes please describe below Print jobs, HP digitally signed firmware upgrades, 3rd party application loading. USB ports can be disabled. Can any data other than scan be sent to the USB device)? Yes No If Yes please describe below Diagnostic service logs can be ed. Print files can be printed via a USB thumb drive.

RF/RFID Does the item use RF or RFID for receive or transmit of any data including remote diagnostics. (e.g. Cellular phone, Bluetooth) Yes No If Yes please describe below Purpose: Frequency: Bandwidth: Modulation: Effective Radiate Power (ERP): Specifications:

Other Transmission Capabilities Does the device employ any other methods of non-wired access to transmit or receive any data whatsoever (e.g. anything Yes No If Yes please describe below: other than standard hard wired T/IP, direct USB, or parallel connections)? Purpose: WiFi Direct Print Frequency: 2.4 GHz, 5 GHz Bandwidth: 2401 - 2495 MHz; depending on selected channel in 2.4GHz band. 5180 - 5825 MHz; depending on selected channel in 5GHz band. Modulation: Effective Radiate Power (ERP): Specifications: 802.11 b/g/n

Other Transmission Capabilities Does the device employ any other methods of non-wired access to transmit or receive any data whatsoever (e.g. anything other than standard hard wired T/IP, direct USB, or parallel connections)? Yes No If Yes please describe below: Purpose: Device Beaconing, Secure Print Apps Frequency: 2.4 GHz Bandwidth: 2400-2483.5 MHz; depending on selected channel. Modulation: Effective Radiate Power (ERP): Specifications: BTLE4.0 compliant

Other Capabilities Does the device employ any other method of communications such as a Modem to transmit or receive any data whatsoever? Yes No If Yes please describe below: Purpose: Specifications:

ENWW



ENWW

Index

Symbols/Numerics 1x550-sheet paper feeder controller PCA connections, diagrams 145, 185 2ndary service menu (M501) 480, 482 550-sheet paper feeder paper path 57 550-sheet tray clearing jams 458 A accessories installed, information 145, 196, 202 acoustic specifications 515, 524 anti-theft feature JetIntelligence 41 toner cartridge 41 authentication JetIntelligence 41 toner cartridge 41 auto on / auto off mode M501 8 auto on / auto off mode (M501) setup and operation 8 automatic document feeder scanning and image capture (M527/E52545/M528/E52645 only) 64 B backup error 32.WX.YZ error 145 reset error 145 restore error 145 basic printer operation 3 bias generation high-voltage power supply

ENWW

23

blank pages troubleshooting 472 block diagram cross section 145, 178 external plug and port locations 145, 185 printed circuit assembly (PCA) connector locations 145, 181 sensors and switches 145, 176 browser requirements HP Embedded Web Server 145, 206 C cables USB, troubleshooting 472 calibrate colors 295 Calibrate/Cleaning menu (M506/ E50045/M507/E50145, M527/ E52545/M528/E52645), control 282 Calibrate/Cleaning menu (M506/ M507/E50145, M527/M528/ E52645), control 145 cartridge dynamic security 40 life detection 39 memory chip 39 presence detection 39 toner level detection 39 cassette presence detection trays 3-5 60 caution 1 certificate of volatility 515, 524 Channel partners WISE 1, 71 checklist problems 75

checklist (M501) problems 73 checklists pre-troubleshooting 107, 108 circuit diagrams 145, 192 clean the paper path cleaning page printing 424, 425 cleaning glass (M527/M528/E52645) 424 mode (M501) 480 paper path 295, 296, 424 printer 424 rollers document feeder (M527/ M528/E52645) 424 tray 1 rollers and separation pad 424, 430 tray 2-X rollers 424, 438 cleaning page 145, 282 clutches DC controller 15 image-formation system 45 cold reset 486, 487 color options changing, Windows 295 color theme changing, Windows 295 colors calibrate 295 component test (M506/E50045/ M507/E50145, M527/E52545/ M528/E52645) special mode test 170 component test (M506/M507, M527/ M528) special mode test 146 component test (M506/M507/E50145, M527/M528/E52645) special mode test 145

Index 535

components DC controller 13 engine-control system 12 f 25 paper feeder 60 paper handling 42 toner cartridge 38 components (M506/M507, M527/ M528) diagnostic tests 146 components (M506/M507/E50145, M527/M528/E52645) diagnostic tests 145, 169 configuration pages information 145, 196, 202 printing 145, 196 connections 1x550-sheet paper feeder controller PCA 145, 185 DC controller 145, 181 connector error 65.WX.YZ error 145 control functions f 26 control 8 button test 480, 482, 483 connections diagram 145, 181 MD 145 display test 480, 482, 483 LED test 480, 482, 483 menus 145, 210 control diagnostic flowcharts (M506x and M527) 107 control diagnostic flowcharts (M506x/M507x, M527/E52545/ M528/E52645) 118, 140 control menus 219 control message document WISE, search 289 control- menus (M501) 145, 209 control- menus (M506/M507/ E50145, M527/M528/E52645) 145 conventions used 1 cooling areas and fans 15 counts 486, 487 copy scan 486, 487 document feeder 486, 487

536 Index

document feeder duplex 486, 487 document feeder roller clean 486, 487 document feeder roller interval 486, 487 document feeder simplex 486, 487 engine cycles 486, 487 fax scan 486, 487 flatbed cycle 486, 487 page, reset 486, 487 refurbish cycle 486, 487 reset after replacing formatter 486, 487 send scan 486, 487 See also pages counts; pages counts MD error codes 289 MP WISE 291 U 10 cross section block diagram 145, 178 current settings pages 81 D date codes for firmware 145, 196, 202 product first used 486, 487 DC controller clutches 15 components 13 connections, diagrams 145, 181 fans 15 motors 14 sensors 16 solenoids 15 switches 16 DC controller communication error 55.WX.YZ error 145 DC controller firmware error 70.WX.YZ error 145 DC motors 14 decoding message 145

default settings, restoring NVRAM initialization (M501) 480, 485 defaults restoring 480, 481 restoring (M501) 480 defeating interlocks 145, 146, 153 determine problem source 107, 108 determine the installed revision of firmware (M501) 502 determine the installed revision of firmware (M506/E50045/M507/ E50145, M527/E52545/M528/ E52645) 505, 506 development process 35 diagnostics engine 145, 146, 152 networks 145 diagnostics (M506/M507, M527/ M528) component 146 LED 146 diagnostics (M506/M507/E50145, M527/M528/E52645) component 145, 169 LED 145, 149 diagrams block 145, 175 circuit 145, 192 DC controller connections 145, 181 formatter connectors (M501) 145, 182 formatter connectors (M506) 145 formatter connectors (M506/ E50045/M507/E50145) 182 formatter connectors (M527/ E52545/M528/E52645) 183 formatter connectors (M527/ M528/E52645) 145 main assemblies (printer base) 145, 189 motor and fans 145, 189, 190 printed circuit assemblies (PCAs; printer base) 145, 189, 191 rollers and pads (printer base) 145, 189, 190 timing 145, 192

ENWW

digital sending error (firmware) 44.WX.YZ error 145 dimensions, printer M501 515, 516 dimensions, printer M506/E50045/ M507/E50145 518 dimensions, printer M506/M507 515, 516 dimensions, printer M527/E52545/ M528/E52645 520 dimensions, printer M527/M528 515, 516 document feeder automatic document feeder (M527/E52545/M528/E52645 only) 64 jams 452 paper-feeding problems (M527/ E52545/M528/E52645) 449 paper-feeding problems (M527/ M528) 448 document feeder count document feeder pages 486, 487 document feeder error 31.WX.YZ error 145 document feeder kit interval 486, 487 document feeder rollers (M527/M528/ E52645) cleaning 424 documentation, printer error codes and messages WISE 291 drum cleaning 37 duplex printing accessory connections diagram 145, 181 duplexer clearing jams 465 duplexer error 69.WX.YZ error 145 duplexing unit motors 14 dynamic security toner cartridge 40 dynamic security enabled printers 39 E EconoMode setting 295, 296 electrical specifications 515, 524

ENWW

email problems get help from WISE 512 Embedded Jetdirect error 80.WX.YZ error 145 Embedded Web Server (EWS) features 145, 206 embedded web server (M506/ E50045/M507/E50145, M527/ E52545/M528/E52645) 505, 508 engine diagnostics 145, 146, 152 test page 145, 146, 152 engine error (LaserJet) 46.WX.YZ error 145 63.WX.YZ error 145 engine error (PageWide) 61.WX.YZ error 145 engine power supply connections diagram 145, 181 engine-control system components 12 envelope feeder connections diagram 145, 181 error fault 145 error codes 289 MD 289 error log (M501) information 145, 196 event log 103 clear 486, 487 clear using LCD control 103, 105 clear using touchscreen control 103, 105 error codes 289 information 202 event log (M506/M507, M527/M528) information 196 event log (M506/M507/E50145, M527/M528/E52645) information 145 event log error (firmware) 42.WX.YZ error 145 exhaust fans 15 Explorer, versions ed HP Embedded Web Server 145, 206 external plug and port locations block diagram 145, 185

F factory defaults, restoring NVRAM initialization (M501) 480, 485 failure detection laser/scanner 29 motors 14 failure detection (low-voltage power supply 22 fan error 58.WX.YZ error 145 fans connections diagram 145, 181 DC controller 15 exhaust 15 intake 15 fax problems get help from WISE 512 firmware date codes 145, 196, 202 firmware communication error 49.WX.YZ error 145 firmware install error 99.WX.YZ error 145 hard disk error 145 remote firmware upgrade error 145 firmware version 480, 482, 483 firmware, ing new (M506/ E50045/M507/E50145, M527/ E52545/M528/E52645) 505 firmware, ing new M501) 502 flatbed scanning and image capture (M527/E52545/M528/E52645 only) 63 flowcharts troubleshooting 107, 108, 109 formatter connections diagram 145, 181 resets after replacing 486, 487 formatter connectors (M501) diagrams 145, 182 formatter connectors (M506) diagrams 145 formatter connectors (M506/E50045/ M507/E50145) diagrams 182

Index 537

formatter connectors (M527/E52545/ M528/E52645) diagrams 183 formatter connectors (M527/M528/ E52645) diagrams 145 formatter control system 6 formatter lights 145, 146, 147, 149 f 25 clearing jams 463 components 25 connections diagram 145, 181 control functions 26 control-circuit function 25 identification 27 life detection 27 temperature protection 27 See also fusing and delivery unit f error 41.WX.YZ error 145 laser scanner error 145 paper path error 145 f error (LaserJet) 50.WX.YZ error 145 f test page print 145, 204 f test page (M506/M507/E50145, M527/M528/E52645) print 145 fusing process 36 G glass (M527/M528/E52645), cleaning 424 guide, print-quality troubleshooting 310 H hard disk partition error 98.WX.YZ error 145 hardware integration pocket (HIP) is not functioning 107, 118, 140, 143 heartbeat LED 145, 146, 149 heaters f 25 high-voltage power supply (HVPS) bias generation 23 circuits 23 operations 23

538 Index

home button is unresponsive 107, 118, 140, 142 HP Device Toolbox, using (M501) 145, 206 HP embedded Jetdirect page 199 HP embedded Jetdirect page (M506/ M507, M527/M528) 196 HP embedded Jetdirect page (M506/ M507/E50145, M527/M528/ E52645) 145 HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) features 145, 206 HP EWS, using (M501) 145, 206 HP internal s WISE 1, 71 HP Jetdirect print server configuration page 145, 196, 199 lights 145, 146, 147, 149 NVRAM initialization (M501) 480, 485 HVPS (high-voltage power supply) bias generation 23 circuits 23 operations 23 I I/O interfaces 10 image capture system scanning (M527/E52545/M528/ E52645 only) 63 image defects, product specific 310, 314 image defects, repetitive ruler 310, 314, 315 image quality check toner cartridge status 296 check toner-cartridge status 295, 298 tray 1 rollers and separation pad, clean 424, 430 tray 2-X rollers, clean 424, 438 image quality issues examples and solutions 310 image-formation process development process 35 drum cleaning 37 fusing process 36 laser-beam exposure 34 primary charging 34

primary transfer process 35 separation process 36 image-formation system clutches 45 motors 45 solenoids 45 image-information process 30 individual component diagnostics 145, 146 initial rotation period 4 initialization NVRAM (M501) 480, 485 input accessory error 67.WX.YZ error 145 input/output error 40.WX.YZ error 145 input/output interfaces 10 installation date calculation 486, 487 for optional accessories 145, 196 intake fans 15 interlocks defeating 145, 146, 153 internal diagnostics error 90.WX.YZ error 145 video display error 145 Internet Explorer, versions ed HP Embedded Web Server 145, 206 IPv4 information 145, 196, 199, 200 IPv6 information 145, 196, 199, 200 J jam error (LaserJet) 13.WX.YZ error 145 jam error (PageWide) 13.WX.YZ error 145 jams 550-sheet trays 458 auto-navigation 451 causes of 452 detection in trays 3-5 61 document feeder 452 duplexer 465 f 463 output bin 464 rear door 463 recovery 470 sensor locations 450

ENWW

sensors 450 toner cartridge area 461 Tray 1 455 Tray 2 458 jams (M506/E50045/M507/E50145, M527/E52545/M528/E52645) diagnostic test for 157 jams (M506/M507, M527/M528) diagnostic test for 146 jams (M506/M507/E50145, M527/ M528/E52645) diagnostic test for 145 Jetdirect print server lights 145, 146, 147, 149 NVRAM initialization (M501) 480, 485 JetIntelligence anti-theft feature 41 authentication 41 toner cartridge 41 job ing error (firmware) 48.WX.YZ error 145 job management error (firmware) 145 job pipeline error (firmware) 145 job parser error (firmware) 47.WX.YZ error 145 printer calibration error 145

LEDs (M506/M507/E50145, M527/ M528/E52645). See lights LEDs, troubleshooting (M501) 145, 146, 147 lights formatter 145, 146, 147, 149 lights (M501) formatter 145, 146, 147 lights (M506/M507, M527/M528) troubleshooting with 146 lights (M506/M507/E50145, M527/ M528/E52645) troubleshooting with 145, 149 link speed settings 145 location setting 480, 482, 483 low-voltage power supply (LVPS) converted DC voltages 20 failure detection 22 operations 22 protection for components 21 stops and interruptions 20 LVPS (low-voltage power supply) converted DC voltages 20 failure detection 22 operations 22 protection for components 21 stops and interruptions 20

K keyboard

M M501 auto on / auto off mode 8 main assemblies (printer base) block diagram 145, 189 memory NVRAM initialization (M501) 480, 485 toner cartridge 39 Memory Enhancement technology (MEt) 11 memory error 82.WX.YZ error 145 EMMC error 145 hard disk error 145 menu istration menu (M506/M507/ E50145, M527/M528/E52645) 145

8

L laser scanner error (LaserJet) 51.WX.YZ error 145 52.WX.YZ error 145 laser-beam exposure 34 laser/scanner failure detection 29 operations 28 safety 29 laser/scanner assembly connections diagram 145, 181 last rotation period 4 latent image formation 30 LEDs (M501) formatter lights 145, 146, 147 LEDs (M506/M507, M527/M528). See lights

ENWW

Backup/Restore menu (M506/ E50045/M507/E50145, M527/ E52545/M528/E52645) 282 Backup/Restore menu (M506/ M507/E50145, M527/M528/ E52645) 145 Calibrate/Cleaning menu (M506/ E50045/M507/E50145, M527/ E52545/M528/E52645) 282 Calibrate/Cleaning menu (M506/ M507/E50145, M527/M528/ E52645) 145 control , access 145, 210 Copy Settings menu (M527/M528/ E52645) 145 Copy/Print (M527/E52545/M528/ E52645) 228 Display Settings menu (M506/ M507/E50145, M527/M528/ E52645) 145 Fax menu (M527/E52545/M528/ E52645) 257 Fax Settings menu (M527/M528/ E52645) 145 General menu 222 General Settings menu (M506/ M507/E50145, M527/M528/ E52645) 145 HP Web Services (M501) 145, 210 Manage Supplies menu 267 Manage Supplies menu (M506/ M507/E50145, M527/M528/ E52645) 145 Manage Trays menu (M506/M507/ E50145, M527/M528/E52645) 145 Network Settings menu (M506/ M507/E50145, M527/M528/ E52645) 145 Network Setup (M501) 145, 216 Networking 269 Print (M506/E50045/M507/ E50145) 228 Print Options menu (M506/M507/ E50145, M527/M528/E52645) 145 Print Settings menu (M506/M507/ E50145, M527/M528/E52645) 145

Index 539

Quick Forms (M501) 145, 217 Reports (M501) 145, 210 Reports menu 219 Reports menu (M506/M507/ E50145, M527/M528/E52645) 145 Scan/Digital Send Settings menu (M527/E52545/M528/ E52645) 249 Scan/Digital Send Settings menu (M527/M528/E52645) 145 Service (M501) 145, 215 Service menu (M506/E50045/ M507/E50145, M527/E52545/ M528/E52645) 282, 283 Service menu (M506/M507/ E50145, M527/M528/E52645) 145 Settings menu 222 Tools menu 281 System Setup (M501) 145, 211 troubleshooting menu 283 troubleshooting menu (M506/ M507/E50145, M527/M528/ E52645) 145 USB Firmware Upgrade menu (M506/E50045/M507/E50145, M527/E52545/M528/E52645) 282, 283 USB Firmware Upgrade menu (M506/M507/E50145, M527/ M528/E52645) 145 menu map 79 menu map (M501) 74 menus, control Calibrate/Cleaning (M506/E50045/ M507/E50145, M527/E52545/ M528/E52645) 282 Calibrate/Cleaning (M506/M507/ E50145, M527/M528/E52645) 145 motor and fans block diagram 145, 189, 190 motor control trays 3-5 59 motor error (LaserJet) 59.WX.YZ error 145 motors connections diagram 145, 181 DC controller 14

540 Index

failure detection 14 image-formation system 45 paper feeder 60 stepping 14 movement of paper through printer. See paper handling multiple feed prevention trays 3-5 60 N Near Field Communication error 81.WX.YZ error 145 Bluetooth error 145 external I/O card error 145 internal EIO error 145 wireless error 145 Netscape Navigator, versions ed HP Embedded Web Server 145, 206 network configuring (M501) 145, 216 Network Setup menu (M501) 145, 216 networks diagnostics 145 HP embedded Jetdirect configuration page 145, 196, 199 link speed settings 145 wireless page 145, 196, 200 no control sound 107, 118, 140, 141 note 1 NVRAM initialization (M501) 480, 485 O operation Sleep delay (M501) 7 Sleep mode (M506/M507/E50145, M527/M528/E52645) 6 operation sequence 4 operations laser/scanner 28 toner cartridge memory 39 output accessory error 66.WX.YZ error 145 output bin clearing jams 464

over-current protection 21 over-voltage protection 21 OXPd/Web kit error 45.WX.YZ error 145 P page error 21.WX.YZ error 145 pages blank 472 not printing 472 printing slowly 472 pages count 486, 487 reset 486, 487 See also counts; counts paper default size reset 486, 487 jam detection 61 jams 452 selecting 295, 296, 300 paper (M506/M507, M527/M528) stop in path for testing 146 paper (M506/M507/E50145, M527/ M528/E52645) stop in path for testing 145, 167 paper feeder electrical components 60 paper handling components 42 overview 42 solve problems 445 paper handling error (LaserJet) 56.WX.YZ error 145 paper jams document feeder 452 paper movement operation 42 paper path 550-sheet paper feeder 57 printer 42 paper path (M506/E50045/M507/ E50145, M527/E52545/M528/ E52645) diagnostic test 157 test, sensors 159 paper path (M506/M507, M527/M528) diagnostic test 146 stop movement for testing 146

ENWW

paper path (M506/M507/E50145, M527/M528/E52645) diagnostic test 145 stop movement for testing 145, 167 paper-path (M506/M507, M527/M528) test, sensors 146 paper-path (M506/M507/E50145, M527/M528/E52645) test, sensors 145 Service menu PIN 486, 487 periods of the operation sequence 4 PJL (printer job language) 8 PML (printer management language) 8 power consumption 515, 524 power subsystem 107, 112 power supply 18 connections diagram 145, 181 troubleshooting 107, 112, 113 See also low-voltage power supply; high-voltage power supply power-on troubleshooting overview 107, 112, 113, 114 power-save mode. See sleep settings powersave (M501) 480 pre-boot menu options 83 pre-troubleshooting checklist 107, 108 primary charging process 34 print bar error (PageWide) 62.WX.YZ error 145 print quality test pages 145, 195 print stop test timing stops 168 Print Test Page 145, 222 print-quality troubleshooting 145, 310, 314, 320 AC banding 310, 314, 320, 321, 328, 336 cartridge fine pitch banding 310, 314, 320, 352, 372, 375 dark streaks (early in toner cartridge life) 310, 314, 320, 321, 328, 329 density change 310, 314, 320, 352, 365, 368

ENWW

developer defect 310, 314, 320, 352, 353, 356 fine-pitch banding 310, 314, 320, 321, 328, 331 f blisters 310, 314, 320, 352, 390, 391 f contamination 310, 314, 320, 407, 408 graininess/fixing mottle 310, 314, 320, 321, 322, 323 hot f offset 310, 314, 320, 352, 390, 393 image placement - margins and skew 310, 314, 320, 407, 411 impulse band (leading edge) 310, 314, 320, 321, 328, 343, 352, 380, 381 impulse band (trailing edge) 310, 314, 320, 321, 328, 346, 349 IPG repeating defect 310, 314, 320, 352, 372, 377 leading edge - mid-page toner scatter 310, 314, 320, 352, 365, 366 OPC gear slip 310, 314, 320, 352, 360, 361 OPC sharp bands (version 1) 310, 314, 320, 321, 328, 339 OPC sharp bands (version 2) 310, 314, 320, 321, 328, 341 OPC wide-pitch banding 310, 314, 320, 352, 360, 363 output curl 310, 314, 320, 407, 414 output stacking 310, 314, 320, 407, 419 paper handling - jams 310, 314, 320, 407, 423 paper handling - misprints 310, 314, 320, 407, 421 paper handling - multifeeds 310, 314, 320, 407, 422 poor edge fixing - outside the image assurance area 310, 314, 320, 352, 390, 398 poor edge fixing - within the image assurance area 310, 314, 320, 352, 390, 395 rain-toner attached to the OPC 310, 314, 320, 352, 353, 354

random missing toner 310, 314, 320, 352, 353, 358 right to left fade and banding 310, 314, 320, 352, 372, 373 sticky output 310, 314, 320, 407, 417 toner in the leading edge margin (f slap) 310, 314, 320, 352, 380, 384 transfer issue - random voids 310, 314, 320, 352, 365, 370 uneven Density - across the page 310, 314, 320, 352, 402, 403 vertical streaks - high temperature/humidity 310, 314, 320, 321, 325, 326 water drop (condensation) 310, 314, 320, 352, 402, 405 wide-pitch banding 310, 314, 320, 321, 328, 334, 352, 380, 387 printed circuit assemblies (PCAs; printer base) block diagram 145, 189, 191 printed circuit assembly (PCA) connector locations block diagram 145, 181 printer cold reset (M506/E50045/ M507/E50145, M527/E52545/ M528/E52645) 486, 492, 495 printer dimensions M506/M507, M527/M528, accessories 515, 516 printer job language (PJL) 8 printer management language (PML) 8 printer memory error 20.WX.YZ error 145 printer resets (M506/E50045/M507/ E50145, M527/E52545/M528/ E52645) 486, 492 printer space requirements 515, 523 printing period in operation sequence 4 stop for testing 145, 146, 167 troubleshooting 472 problem-solving networks 145 Process Cleaning Page 145, 282

Index 541

Q Quick Forms menu (M501) 145, 217 R real-time clock error 11.WX.YZ error 145 rear door clearing jams 463 repetitive image defect ruler 310, 314, 315 reports configuration page 145, 210 default info page 145, 210 demo page 145, 210 error 480, 482, 483 menu map 145, 210 network summary 145, 210 PCL 6 font list 145, 210 PCL font list 145, 210 print quality page 145, 210 PS font list 145, 210 service 480, 482, 483 service page 145, 210 supplies status page 145, 210 usage page 145, 210 resets NVRAM initialization (M501) 480, 485 restore factory settings (M506/ E50045/M507/E50145, M527/ E52545/M528/E52645) 486, 492, 493 restore the service ID (M506/E50045/ M507/E50145, M527/E52545/ M528/E52645) 486, 492, 494 restoring defaults (M501) 480 factory defaults 480, 481 restoring default settings NVRAM initialization (M501) 480, 485 revision history iii rollers and pads (printer base) block diagram 145, 189, 190 S safety laser/scanner

542 Index

29

scanner (M527/E52545/M528/ E52645) tests 172 scanner (M527/M528) tests 146 scanner (M527/M528/E52645) glass cleaning 424 tests 145 scanner error 30.WX.YZ error 145 scanner settings 486, 487 scanner tests 173 scanning image capture (M527/E52545/ M528/E52645 only) 63 secondary service menu (M501) 480, 482 security error 33.WX.YZ error 145 security settings information 145, 196, 199, 200 sensor error 54.WX.YZ error 145 58.WX.YZ error 145 sensors block diagram 145, 176 connections diagram 145, 181 DC controller 16 image-formation system 30 paper feeder 60 paper handling 44 scanner tests 173 sensors (M506/E50045/M507/ E50145, M527/E52545/M528/ E52645) diagnostic tests 159 tests, manual sensor 161 tests, manual tray/bin 164 sensors (M506/M507, M527/M528) diagnostic tests 146 tests, diagnostic sensor and paper path 146 tests, manual sensor 146 tests, manual tray/bin 146 sensors (M506/M507/E50145, M527/ M528/E52645) diagnostic tests 145 tests, diagnostic sensor and paper path 145, 156

tests, manual sensor 145 tests, manual tray/bin 145 separation process 36 serial number 486, 487 service and WISE 1, 71 Service ID convert to date 486, 487 restore 486, 487 service menu 480 secondary (M501) 480, 482 Service menu (M501) 145, 215 Service menu options (M506/E50045/ M507/E50145, M527/E52545/ M528/E52645) 486, 487 service menu settings cleaning mode (M501) 480 powersave (M501) 480 restoring defaults (M501) 480 service menu settings (M501) 480 service mode functions (M501) 480 service mode functions (M506/ E50045/M507/E50145, M527/ E52545/M528/E52645) 486 service page (M501) 74 settings restore factory (M506/E50045/ M507/E50145, M527/E52545/ M528/E52645) 486, 492, 493 sleep delay (M501) operation 7 sleep mode (M506/M507/E50145, M527/M528/E52645) operation 6 sleep settings voltage too high during 21 sleep settings (M501) 7 sleep settings (M506/M507/E50145, M527/M528/E52645) 6 solenoids DC controller 15 image-formation system 45 solve connectivity problems 477 solve performance problems 472 factors affecting print performance 472 print speeds 473 printer does not print 475 printer prints slowly 475

ENWW

solve problems 71 output is curled or wrinkled 446 paper does not feed automatically 448, 449 paper does not feed from Tray 2X 446 paper handling 445 printer does not pick up paper 448 printer does not pick up paper or misfeeds 448 printer feeds incorrect page size 445 printer picks up multiple sheets of paper 448 printer pulls from incorrect tray 445 printer will not duplex or duplexes incorrectly 445 solving direct-connect problems 477 space requirements, printer 515, 523 specifications electrical and acoustic 515, 524 space requirements 515, 523 standby period 4 stepping motors 14 stop printing for test (M506/M507, M527/M528) 146 stop printing for test (M506/M507/ E50145, M527/M528/E52645) 145, 167 sub-voltage low-voltage power supply circuit 20 supplies error (LaserJet) 10.WX.YZ error 145 supplies error (PageWide) 17.WX.YZ error 145 switches block diagram 145, 176 connections diagram 145, 181 DC controller 16 paper feeder 60 paper handling 44 system error (LaserJet) 62.WX.YZ error 145

ENWW

system requirements HP Embedded Web Server 145, 206 System Setup menu (M501) 145, 211 T T/IP information 145, 196, 199, 200 temperature f heater protection 27 test pages f 145, 204 test pages (M506/M507/E50145, M527/M528/E52645) f 145 tests component tests list and descriptions 145, 146, 170 engine 145, 146, 152 networks 145 scanner (M527/E52545/M528/ E52645) 172 scanner (M527/M528) 146 scanner (M527/M528/E52645) 145 tests (M506/E50045/M507/E50145, M527/E52545/M528/E52645) disable cartridge check 155 manual sensor tests 161 paper path 157 paper path sensors 159 tray/bin manual sensor 164 tests (M506/M507, M527/M528) disable cartridge check 146 manual sensor tests 146 paper path 146 paper path and sensor diagnostic 146 paper-path sensors 146 tray/bin manual sensor 146 tests (M506/M507/E50145, M527/ M528/E52645) disable cartridge check 145 manual sensor tests 145 paper path 145 paper path and sensor diagnostic 145, 156 paper-path sensors 145 tray/bin manual sensor 145

tests (M527/E52545/M528/E52645) scanner tests 172 tests (M527/M528) scanner tests 146 tests (M527/M528/E52645) scanner tests 145 theory of operations 1 thermistors f 25 thermoswitches f 25 timing chart 145, 192 timing stops print stop test 168 tip 1 toner image formation, use during 30 toner cartridge anti-theft feature 41 authentication 41 dynamic security 40 JetIntelligence 41 life detection 39 memory chip 39 presence detection 39 toner level detection 39 toner cartridge (M506/E50045/M507/ E50145, M527/E52545/M528/ E52645) diagnostic test 155 toner cartridge (M506/M507, M527/ M528) diagnostic test 146 toner cartridge (M506/M507/E50145, M527/M528/E52645) diagnostic test 145 toner cartridge area clearing jams 461 toner cartridges 38 components 38 error conditions 38 operations 38 touchscreen blank, white, or dim (no image) 107, 118, 140 touchscreen control 8 touchscreen has an unresponsive zone 107, 118, 140 transfer processes 35 tray lift operation 60

Index 543

Tray 1 clearing jams 455 tray 1 rollers and separation pad cleaning 424, 430 Tray 2 clearing jams 458 tray 2-X rollers cleaning 424, 438 tray motor error (LaserJet) 60.WX.YZ error 145 tray selection - use requested tray 145 trays 3-5 cassette lift operation 60 jam detection 61 motor control 59 multiple feed prevention 60 tray presence detection 60 troubleshooting 71 blank pages 472 check toner cartridge status 296 check toner-cartridge status 295, 298 checklist 75, 107, 108 clean the paper path 424, 425 configuration pages for 145, 196 control checks 118 direct-connect problems 477 flowchart 107, 108, 109 jams 450, 452 network problems 477, 478 NVRAM initialization (M501) 480, 485 pages not printing 472 pages printing slowly 472 power 107, 112, 113 process 107 USB cables 472 wired network 477, 478 troubleshooting (M501) checklist 73 control checks 107 LED diagnostics 145, 146, 147 troubleshooting (M506/M507, M527/ M528) lights, using 146 troubleshooting (M506/M507/ E50145, M527/M528/E52645) lights, using 145, 149

544 Index

troubleshooting (M506/M527) control checks 107 U understand lights on the formatter formatter lights 149 understand lights on the formatter (M506/M507, M527/M528) formatter lights 146 understand lights on the formatter (M506/M507/E50145, M527/M528/ E52645) formatter lights 145 understand the lights on the formatter heartbeat LED 149 HP Jetdirect LEDs 149 understand the lights on the formatter (M506/M507, M527/M528) heartbeat LED 146 HP Jetdirect LEDs 146 understand the lights on the formatter (M506/M507/E50145, M527/M528/ E52645) heartbeat LED 145 HP Jetdirect LEDs 145 upgrade firmware (M506/E50045/ M507/E50145, M527/E52545/ M528/E52645) 505, 508 upgrades, ing product firmware (M506/E50045/M507/ E50145, M527/E52545/M528/ E52645) 505 upgrades, ing product firmware M501) 502 USB flash drive firmware upgrade, control (M506/E50045/M507/E50145, M527/E52545/M528/E52645) 505, 508, 511 firmware upgrade, pre-boot menu (M506/E50045/M507/E50145, M527/E52545/M528/E52645) 505, 508, 509 USB port troubleshooting 472 Use Requested Tray 145

warranty date information 486, 487 Web browser requirements HP Embedded Web Server 145, 206 Web-based Interactive Search Engine (WISE) HP internal s and Channel partners 1, 71 weight, printer M501 515, 516 weight, printer M506/E50045/M507/ E50145 518 weight, printer M506/M507 515, 516 weight, printer M527/E52545/M528/ E52645 520 weight, printer M527/M528 515, 516 wireless configuration page 145, 196, 200 wireless page 200 wireless page (M506/M507, M527/ M528) 196 wireless page (M506/M507/E50145, M527/M528/E52645) 145 WISE MD 291 email problems 512 fax problems 512 HP internal s and Channel partners 1, 71 Wise control message document 289

W waiting period 4 warning 1

ENWW

Manual De Servicio Hp Laserjet Enterprise M501-m506-m507-mfp M527-m528 Managed Mfp E52645-e50145-e50045-e52545.pdf 1j3b1i

Overview 6h3y3j

More details h6z72

Related Documents 543cg

Hp Laserjet Enterprise Mfp M525 Series 24351e

Manual De Servicio Hp Laserjet Enterprise M501-m506-m507-mfp M527-m528 Managed Mfp E52645-e50145-e50045-e52545.pdf 1j3b1i

Hp Laserjet Enterprise 605dn 5w2k4f

Hp Laserjet Pro Mfp M426dw 2v2oi

Hp Laserjet Enterprise M855 M880 Flow Mfp Repair Manual 1 4br4o

Hp Color Laserjet Enterprise M553 Repair Manual 3u376l

More Documents from "manuel molina" 1q6k33

Manual De Servicio Hp Laserjet Enterprise M501-m506-m507-mfp M527-m528 Managed Mfp E52645-e50145-e50045-e52545.pdf 1j3b1i

Pronunciacion.pdf 4d5m56

Listado_de_residencias_militares.pdf 3c625q

Climograma 6j1b1m

Beispieltest Ondaf Onset 2j4g1k

Inhomogeneidad 55414